Home

4.1-E1

image

Contents

1. 2 Using a public network to connect a receiver and a given center for every application directly Strength If a proper protocol is selected implementation of a receiver will be compact Every center can share one access point Limitation Since multiple centers share one access point scheduling of the access point may be necessary Figure 4 3 shows the connection type 6 9 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Collection network Host number A Receiver Public network etc Host number B Center Figure 4 3 Direct connection with host numbers 4 5 2 Network service 1 A network performs data processing such as data collection in the data communication between a receiver and a center Data processing type varies according to each service One example of network services especially associated with broadcasting is a mass calling service A typical one of the service is a massive calls reception service In that service an incoming call switch of receivers counts the number of incoming calls and notifies the total to the center from point to point Strength Implementation of a receiver is compact Processing at a center such as data counting is simple Limitation Some services may require a contract with a carrier in advance Figure 4 4 shows the connection type Receiver
2. Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for CPRM copy_control_ a encryption__ Type recording ode 7E control data 1 Recordable as Copy Free with specifying CGMS and EPN in RDI Packs as Copy freely 6 Recordable as Copy One Generation with encrypting the content and updating CGMS and EPN in RDI Packs to No 00 more copies gt 0 Or Recordable applying Encryption Plus Non Assertion EPN with encrypting the content and updating CGMS and 01 EPN in RDI Packs to Protected using CPRM but copy control restrictions not asserted 6 Recordable as Copy One Generation with encrypting the 10 Don t care content and updating CGMS and EPN in RDI Packs to No more copies 8 01 Don tcare Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 00 Ar Recordable a Copy Free with specifying CGMS and EPN in RDI Packs as Copy freely 10 Don t care Not recordable 11 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 a Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor DEERE Pecordaple a Copy Free with specifying CGMS and EPN in RDI Packs as Copy freely This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for the
3. 1 Basic Low speed CA I F Mandatory ID number display Mandatory Error notification Card response Mandatory Power on control including the control Mandatory specified by the NIT Descrambling Mandatory ID card test Mandatory Identification of multiple CAS operations Mandatory 2 Pay broadcasting Flat tier Contractual viewing processing Mandatory Parental control Mandatory Password setting and deletion Mandatory Pay broadcasting reservation Optional 3 Pay broadcasting PPV PPV viewing processing including the Optional fee based on ES Phone modem Mandatory Recordable purchase Optional Power on call in control Optional Viewing information upload Optional Parental control Optional Password setting and deletion Optional 5 78 e s z2 3 4 xS ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 PPV program reservation pay Optional broadcasting reservation Control of PPV monthly purchase limit Optional Control of single PPV limit Optional PPV purchase record and display Optional Retry over notification display function Optional User call in request function Optional Notification of viewing history Optional information upload date and time Phone line connection test Optional 4 EMM message service Automatic display message Mandatory IC card non insertion message automatic Mandatory display message used during n
4. Public network etc Figure 4 4 Connection of massive calls reception service 6 10 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 5 3 Down radio wave and uplink 1 In bi directional communication a public network is used for sending upward signal such as a reguest and radio wave is used for distributing a response to the reguest Strength When a satellite or ground radio wave is used for vast common data distribution an inexpensive service can be provided A variety of applications that has not been provided by the existing broadcasting and communication services may be available In this connection type each receiver uses one uplink downlink and common center Therefore communication between receivers is also available Limitation It requires a complicated system If a protocol that links an upward public line and downward satellite radio wave is necessary a large scale of development is necessary Figure 4 5 shows the connection type Satellite Ground wave Cent Receiver enter Public network etc Figure 4 5 Connection with down radio wave and uplink 4 5 4 Internet connection Level 3 1 A receiver is connected to the access point of an internet service provider ISP via a public network etc Then the ISP accesses an ISP at a center side via the Internet and connects the receiver to the center via a leased line etc
5. Data link layer Specification A BASIC procedure code independent mode Refer to 5 3 for more detail Basic function modem Specification A V 22bis MNP4 Mobile phone circuit switched data PDC 9600bps Specification B PHS Specification B PIAFS 32kbps or higher In the basic function it may be changed to V 22bis MNP4 in the mobile phone network 6 13 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 Advanced function high speed modem mobile phone PHS communication protocol Specification B Select one of communication protocols shown in Table 5 3 and 5 4 as advanced function communication protocol according to service However a receiver having a high speed modem mobile phone or PHS must have the basic function communication protocol in order to maintain compatibility with services for low speed modems and effectiveness In addition a high speed modem and mobile phone must have the calling function with the similar modulation method and transmission speed as low speed modems in order to prevent increase of negotiation time Communication between a mobile phone and a center may be converted to analogue communication by a mobile network or center Table 5 3 shows protocol for text communication and Table 5 4 shows protocol for binary communication Table 5 3 Text communication protocol stack Layer Protocol stack Application layer Selected according to service D
6. 140 149 440 449 oe teen Oe ae 141 4 142 143 Non 744 745 746 Temporary 144 Asahi Satellite Broadcasting 150 159 450 459 750 759 Limited 151 5 152 153 Non 753 755 756 757 BS i Incorporated HERE io OE EN EE 460 469 761 769 908 161 6 162 163 Non 766 768 908 Temporary 169 B S Japan Corporation ee ile een eee 470 479 J NN 110 779 EE 171 7 172 173 Non 770 779 Temporary 179 Fuji Satellite Broadcasting Inc 180 189 480 489 780 789 181 8 182 183 Non 780 781 Temporary 188 189 WOWOW INC ER AA KO 490 SAP J 790 799 noch 191 9 192 193 Non 791 792 STAR CHANNEL INC f 200 209 f 500 509 ___ 800 809 200 10 Non 800 Nippon BS Broadcasting 210 219 510 519 810 819 Corporation 211 1 Non World Hi Vision Channel Inc 220 229 520 529 820 829 EE 222 12 Non WORLD INDEPENDENT 330 339 630 639 NETWORKS JAPAN Inc 22 ss EE anne 633 636 AA PER IR his 910 919 cee 910 The Association for Promotion of I Snn oo 920 929 Digital Broadcasting 929 Z ote 1 Appendix table 8 2 2 lists 10 to 30 service_ids secured for the individual broadcasters in accordance with the service_id allocation guideline in 8 1 2 The values shown below the broken lines in each cell designate service_ids actually written in the NIT The numbers in brackets beside the service ids represent button allocation examples that may be referred when incorporating a
7. S id 290 S id 291 S id 292 1 N eBid ER NV H S id 999 S id 999 EE AE i RES RE F Sid 000 S id 000 Ek mad v T a A S id 099 i Sid 600 le gt _S id 300 lt gt S id 600 k Figure 8 1 1 Conceptual image about service transition 7 53 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 8 1 1 Allocatable service_ids Consignment broadcaster Television Radio Data VHF broadcaster 1 300 309 600 609 VHF broadcaster 2 310 319 610 619 VHF broadcaster 3 320 329 620 629 VHF broadcaster 4 330 339 630 639 VHF broadcaster 5 340 349 640 649 VHF broadcaster 6 350 359 650 659 VHF broadcaster 7 360 369 660 669 VHF broadcaster 8 370 379 670 679 VHF broadcaster 9 380 389 680 689 VHF broadcaster 10 390 399 690 699 Television broadcaster 1 100 109 400 409 700 709 Television broadcaster 2 110 119 410 419 710 719 Television broadcaster 3 120 129 420 429 720 729 Television broadcaster 4 130 139 430 439 730 739 Television broadcaster 5 140 149 440 449 740 749 Television broadcaster 6 150 159 450 459 750 759 Television broadcaster 7 160 169 460 469 760 769 Television broadcaster 8 170 179 470 479 770 779 Television broadcaster 9 180 189 480 489 780 789 Telev
8. Toshiba America Information Systems Inc Warner Bros Entertainment Inc Contact http www aacsla com To be installed according to the requirements Requi t equi remen described in Appendix B 2 11 1 The formal names are as follows DVD RAM Digital Versatile Disc Rewritable DVD R Digital Versatile Disc Recordable DVD RW Digital Versatile Disc Re recordable 8 34 of 3 4 52 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 The license name of the content protection system is Memory Stick PRO Secure Video Recording Format Content Protection License This content protection system is provided after making a contract for both of the following licenses Hi MD Secure Video Recording Format Content Protection License and VIDEO ADDENDUM to the Hi MD Secure Video Recording Format Content Protection License This content protection system is provided after making a contract for both of the following licenses Video Content Protection System Agreement and DVD RW R Recorder Content Protection Agreement The license name of the content protection system is Embedded Memory with Playback and Recording Function Secure Video Recording Format Content Protection License 8 35 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 Requirement for Installing the Content Protection System B 2 1 Requirement for Installing Content Protection System for Blu ray Disc Rewr
9. 1 2 6 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OFF X ON o Mobile phone OFF X line ON X OFF X PHS line ON X PSTN O Add X Not add It is recommended that 122 is added only when a line with fixed preferred connection setting is used and an ID of a carrier other than the carriers specified to perform fixed preferred connection is input When a massive call reception service vote function is specified a special number and a carrier ID number must not be added regardless of ON or OFF of the network specification identification This function is applicable for receivers that come to market after version 2 2 revision of this document and applied to all receivers that come to market as a new model one year after the revision 3 Call function Specification A A receiver should be able to add an outside line capture number stored in the receiver to make a call A receiver should be able to dial in tone 10 pulse second or 20 pulse second according to a dial type stored in the receiver Dial pause should be available before and after a given point of an outside line capture number added by a receiver each special number and carrier ID number pause time depends on receivers Dial pause 6 99 should be available during the dialing process at a given point in a phone number according to described in the phone number on contents one me
10. Note In a case where a single broadcaster is used by more than one company the broadcaster_id having the smallest number shall be used Note 1 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to Media Serve Inc business discontinued on November 30 2004 Note 2 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to Megaport Broadcasting Inc business discontinued on September 30 2005 Note 3 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to Nippon Data Broadcasting business discontinued on September 30 2005 Note 4 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to JFN Satellite Broadcasting business discontinued on November 30 2005 Note 5 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to Japan MediArk Co Ltd business discontinued on 7 68 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 November 30 2005 Note 6 This broadcaster id had been allocated to BS Communications Corporation business discontinued on March 31 2006 Note 7 This broadcaster id had been allocated to Digital Cast International Ltd business discontinued on March 31 2006 8 2 4 Logo ID list A logo ID specifies the correspondence of logo data and a service id It is issued and managed by The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting Dpa The allocation of logo IDs is performed according to each broadcaster In principle television broadcasters radio broadcasters and data broadcasters are allocated 9 IDs 6 IDs and 3 IDs respectively However this principle d
11. half width commas and half width colons Hiragana name Use Hiragana and symbols Use 2 byte code Kanji name Any character type can be used Use 2 byte code Hiragana address Use Hiragana alphanumerical and symbols Use 2 byte code Kanji address Any character type can be used 6 43 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Use 2 byte code Postal code Use alphanumerical 1 byte code Use only numbers from 0 to 9 Phone number and FAX number Use alphanumerical 1 byte code Insert a half width space between the area code local code and numbers Use only numbers from 0 to 9 For definition of Hiragana alphanumerical and symbols in this section refer to Table 6 4 Note 9 8 Contents using area This area can be used to deliver data to the service with a different broadcast ID The contents uses an extended function for broadcasting epgTune to deliver data to the selected service Writing from all contents is approved In case of writing in the contents using area overwrite information of the block to be used with a half width space first to delete the recorded information and then write new data 9 Operation of writing history In case of writing in each block of the shared area for all operators always write the date time of update and the service ID of operator who performed the update in each block according to the format in Table 6 6 As a servi
12. Functions and operations that a center and receiver perform when possible It is necessary to use a common cryptosystem Level 3 In order to handle a receiver as a voting terminal of election a higher security function of digital voting should be implemented It is also necessary to assure the followings Validity of voter check of voting right Secrecy of voting protection of anonymity Eliminate of multiple voting Confirmation of reflection for voting to secure the right to request for reinvestigation However just like an ordinary voting voting against a voter s will for example in case where the voter is coerced into giving his her vote cannot be detected in an electronic voting system 6 78 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 1 2 4 Simple two way authentication between viewer and host Table 1 7 shows items that should be considered for two way authentication between viewer and host classified into four levels Table 1 7 Two way authentication level Security level Applied service Reguired module Level 2 Strong authentication Internet service Both Public key cryptosystem PKCS hash function Level 1 Protected simple Purchase of comparably Common key authentication low price product cryptosystem process time stamp Level 0 Non protected simple Survey needing no Receiver Receiver ID authentication identification etc When an application needing privacy protection or to check t
13. Note 5 112 06Fh 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 113 070h 114 071h Note 2 115 072h 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 116 073h 117 074h Note 7 118 075h 990 998 999 119 076h 991 992 993 120 077h 994 995 121 078h 996 997 Nippon BS Broadcasting 122 079h 935 123 07Ah 936 Note 9 Note 1 This logo ID has been replaced with a transparent logo by a television broadcaster following the discontinuity of VHF broadcasting business Note 2 This logo ID had been allocated to Media Serve Inc business discontinued on November 30 7 62 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2004 This logo ID had been allocated to Music Bird Co Ltd business discontinued on November 30 2004 This logo ID had been allocated to Megaport Broadcasting Inc business discontinued on September 30 2005 This logo ID had been allocated to Nippon Data Broadcasting business discontinued on September 30 2005 This logo ID had been allocated to JFN Satellite Broadcasting business discontinued on November 30 2005 This logo ID had been allocated to Japan MediArk Co Ltd business discontinued on November 30 2005 This logo ID had been allocated to BS Communications Corporation
14. Please refer to Volume 4 in this document for the operation of link descriptor 5 15 CA Service Descriptor 5 15 1 Operation The arranged channels of the broadcaster who operates automatic display message are displayed and the display control information of such message is described Several CA service descriptors may be listed in the CAT In this case the automatic display message operation will be carried out by the CA system id specified by the CA service descriptor when multiple conditional access systems are operated in such TS Also one CA service descriptor is placed for each broadcaster when the display of the automatic display message is controlled Therefore the number of the CA service descriptor that can be listed in the CAT when multiple conditional access systems are operated is the number of the combinations of the broadcaster identifier and the CA system id which executes the automatic display message 5 15 2 Delay Time Operation The delay time to display the built in automatic display message of the IC card is indicated in day unit However OxFF signifies that the delay time is not transmitted Delay time suspension The starting date should be the current date of automatic display message acquisition command described in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B 25 When the automatic display message function is used for the received and stored program in the receiver with storage function the lowest bit of the delay time is ope
15. Sending ACK R2 If NG Sending NAK 2 R2 Sending ACK 3 R2 Disconnecting 4 EOT Sending ACK S0 Sending NAK Sending NAK Timeout Resending T2 ENQ EOT R1 R2 S1 S2 S3 Disconnecting Resending data Resending Retry out C1 Disconnecting 1 When in the SO state and there is no data to be sent from a receiver it is desirable to suspend sending ENQ until data to be sent is input Also when T2 timeout waiting for ENQ occurs at a center side during the stand by state the receiver receives NAK but ignores it 2 Refer to 5 3 5 2 1 3 4 5 6 3 Refer to 5 3 5 2 2 1 4 Refer to5 3 5 2 2 2 Note An empty space is ignored 6 31 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 S1 After sending ENO Sending data S2 2 Error on receiving data There are following patterns in errors on receiving data in case of R2 data receiving NG in the state transition table 1 If correlation between BN and BN complement of 1 does not match NAK is sent 2 If correlation between BN and BN complement of 1 matches but it is not an estimated value 1 If BN and BN are just before the target the data is discarded and ACK is sent 2 In case other than above transmission is disconnected If it is a CRC error NAK is sent If there is no DLE STX NAK is sent If there is no DLE ETX NAK is sent N ON Ye If data has a format that is
16. section 7 2 5 of this document The receiver must be designed and manufactured to prevent extraction of all the confidential information used to protect the received content including the encryption algorithm in a usable format 7 1 2 Subject of Protection The content whose digital copy control descriptor digital recording control data specifies that copying is restricted and the content whose content availability descriptor encryption_mode specifies that the content is to be protected The control signal for the conditional access broadcasting system described in section 7 2 5 of this document 7 2 Detailed Installation Standard 7 2 1 Overall Structure The receiver must not be equipped with the function that easily allows bypassing or disabling the content protection system specified by the functional requirement and maliciously extracting changing and copying the content in the compressed digital signal format and control signal to be protected The following are the examples A switch jumper or equivalent function that bypasses the protection system A special wiring that enables bypassing if disconnected or connected The service menu that tests the protection system and content output and the control function such as a remote control system For details of installation see section 8 5 of this document 8 20 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 2 2 Output of the Content The content specified in sect
17. the result by created multinomial X X X 1 The surplus is CRC 16 In the CRC 16 method surplus 16 bit is sorted from the highest bit to lowest bit in 8 bit unit However in the basic function protocol all bits are sorted in descending order in order to improve security Therefore the highest bit of the surplus is the lowest bit of CRC and the lowest bit of the surplus is the highest bit of CRC Calculation example Target data 104 Multiply X that is sorted in descending order by X and divide it by X X X7 1 The surplus is X X X X 1 80334 In case of a bi directional service data collection protocol sort 8033 1000 0000 0011 0011 in 16 bit unit As a result CRC is CCO1 1100 1100 0000 0001 In general CRC 16 the result of this case is 01CC y 6 27 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 BN BN Block serial number A block serial number BN starts from 01 The complement BN of 1 in the block serial number is FE 254 The block serial number increases one by one when text is sent from one side continuously between ENQ and EOT When the block serial number reaches FF 255 the next block serial number is 00 Figure 5 16 shows flow of block serial numbers Figure 5 17 shows the block serial number sequence or oo gt o ees JPlelols rarr EE mr ma re O re Figure 5 16 Flow of block serial numbers 6 28 A
18. 00XY OABCDEFGHJ K 2 In the case 1 use also the special number for caller information notification service 184 186 simultaneously 184 186 122 OOXY OABCDEFGHJ K 5 2 Connection conditions 1 Calling via PSTN A Table 5 1 shows connection conditions at the time of sending 122 00XY phone number of access point from a receiver Table 5 1 Connection conditions at the time of sending 122 OOXY phone number of access point Line at receiver With the fixer preferred Without the fixer preferred Phone number connection setting connection setting sample of access point Caller charging OABCDEFGHJ 0120 DEFGHJ Reverse charging 0800 DEFGHJ OOX YAS CH k k k k k 0180 DEFGHJ Caller charging 0990 DEFGHJ KI KI KI KI x x O Pe pd x K mM KD 0570 DEFGHJ Explanatory note O Connecting to the OOXY operator number following 122 A After the guidance saying that 122 is not necessary connecting to the OOXY operator number following 122 X Not connected B At the time of sending 122 phone number of access point a call is not connected 6 94 2 Calling by mobile phone or PHS a b At the time of sending 122 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El OOXY phone number of access point a call is not connected At the time of sending 122 phone number of access point a call is not connected 5
19. 5 6 Note 1 Discard data stored from when the state transits to the service signal waiting state until the first CRLF is received Note 2 The no communication monitoring timer of the receiver starts after a host number command is sent or resent Refer to 5 3 6 for T1 value Remote echo Since a host side performs echo back after a receiver sends a host number command local echo back process in the receiver is not reguired The host receives the host number command from the receiver performs echo back and then sends service signal Timing to start no communication monitoring timer at the host Counting of the no communication monitoring timer at the host starts when the line connection completes Modem negotiation completion The timeout value of no communication monitoring T1 is reset after service signal CRLF ERRAINV CRLF is sent 6 24 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 5 3 4 Data transfer sequence 1 Telegraphic message sequence example Figure 5 13 shows an example of data transfer sequence between a receiver and a collection network i i Access Receiver Public network Collection network Center and others point ENQ Note Immediately after connection a receiver sends ENQ ACK DLE STX BN BN data DLE ETX CRC CRC ACK EOT DLE STX BN BN data DLE ETX CRC CRC ACK DLE STX BN BN data DLE ETX CRC CRC ACK Note More than 10 ms interval is necessary be
20. Ox3F tickers For the values of data_component_id refer to table 8 1 2 Data broadcasting 0x40 Ox7F May be allocated Reservation 0x80 OxDF 5 1 2 Maximum number of ES transmissions per single service Regarding BS digital broadcasting the maximum number of ESs per single service of the same service_id for each stream type is as below O Maximum number of video ES transmissions 4 O Maximum number of audio ES transmissions 8 Transmission shall be performed so that the maximum number above is not exceeded Due to the restriction of the PID filter resource on a receiver up to 12 ESs can be processed simultaneously Therefore the maximum number of ESs per a single service for simultaneous display audio play included and simultaneous recording shall also be 12 The maximum number of ESs subjected to charging is also 12 due to the condition of the Conditional Access System With the operation of multiview and others taken into account the maximum number of ES transmissions per single service shall be 32 but ESs beyond 12 cannot be processed simultaneously Therefore if the number exceeds 12 a receiver may have restrictions regarding display and recording The maximum numbers defined here designate the maximum numbers of ESs that are simultaneously transmitted by consignment broadcasters second loop of PMT maximum ES loop number 7 14 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 1 3 Default
21. The EMM individual message is stored in the IC card and the EMM common message is basically received when it is displayed This function can be operated if in the CA service descriptor listed in the CAT the CA_system_id obtained by the IC card response corresponds to the CA_system_id listed on the CA service descriptor and the service_id during channel selection is listed The distinction of mail and automatic display message in EMM messages is made by referring the message control for the non encrypted header of the message main body in the EMM individual message section If this is IC card storage 0x01 it is the message which corresponds to automatic display message The EMM individual message for automatic display is always encrypted and the IC card decodes and stores it The receiver sends the message code area to the IC card by using the EMM individual message reception command response to obtain the response message code The length of message code area is shorter than the message partition length obtained by the initial setting condition and it is sent to the IC card by single command without being divided In the automatic display message stuffing may be present at the last part of the response message code area The receiver ignores the stuffing part The response message code area is as follow 5 22 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 4 13 1 Response Message Area of Automatic Display Message Items in the
22. The allocation of logo IDs is performed according to each broadcaster In principle television broadcasters radio broadcasters and data broadcasters are allocated 9 IDs 6 IDs and 3 IDs respectively However this principle does not apply to broadcasters who had set more number of logo IDs before the establishment of the rule When finishing broadcasting services broadcasters shall replace used logo files with transparent ones so that the logos are not displayed even if selectable with a receiver In a case where new broadcasters use logo files that had been used by former broadcasters and have been kept in the range allocated to the new broadcasters the files shall be replaced Table 8 2 4 shows the logo ID and service id allocation as of April 1 2007 Table 8 2 4 BS digital broadcasting logo ID list Z o Logo service id Remark Broadcaster ID 000h 101 NHK 001h 1102 002h 103 104 105 003h 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 004h 005h 006h 007h 008h SININ MN BR WI NO Re VO O 009h J140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 B S Japan OOAh 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 Note 1 12 00Bh 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 13 00Ch 14 00Dh 15 00Eh 16 00Fh 17 010h 18 011h 19 012h 150 151 154 155 156 157 158 159 Asahi Satellite Broadcasting 450 451 452 453 454 457 458 459 20 013h 152 21 014h 153 22 015h
23. When Ox1FFF is specified in the PMT as a conditional access PID it indicates that the relevant ES is not treated with scrambling non chargeable When Ox1FFF is specified in the CAT as a conditional access PID the receiver ignores it Exceptional rule The decision of pay or free program is made by the free CA mode 1 Free program free CA mode 0 2 Pay program free CA _mode 1 Notes The conditional access system descriptor ECM_PID 0x1FFF is applied in the first loop of the PMT only if the parental rate is set for free programs In pay programs the ECM PID OXIFFF is applied in the second loop only for non chargeable 5 56 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 components other than the default ES group The first one byte of the data described in the data area of the conditional access system descriptor should be the parental rate The second and later bytes will not be operated in the immediate future The parental rate operations are as follows 0x00 No assignation 0x01 0x11 Restricted age 3 0x12 0xFF Broadcaster assignation Not operated in the immediate future The parental rate should be valid only if the conditional access system descriptor is listed in the first loop of the PMT To define the parental rate based on each stream is prohibited The receiver ignores the first byte the parental rate value of the data area of the conditional access system descriptor listed in the second loop of the PMT
24. business discontinued on March 31 2006 This logo ID had been allocated to Digital Cast International Ltd business discontinued on March 31 2006 8 3 List of Slot Allocation for Each Broadcaster Tables 8 3 1 to 8 3 4 show slot allocation for individual broadcasters and services stated in the consignment broadcasting business certificate according to each repeater of the broadcasting satellites The tables show the allocation as of April 1 2007 Table 8 3 1 1 channel 11 72748 GHz slot allocation list Slot No Consignment Broadcaster Service 1 7 SDTV 8 broadcasting si SDTV 1 Asahi Satellite Broadcasting Limited HOES broadcasting 5 broadcasting 15 16 22 SDTV 23 broadcasting Not used 0 5 slot 24 Not used 25 32 SDTV broadcasting 33 40 HDTV SDTV Po a broadcasting broadcasting 41 48 SDTV broadcasting 7 63 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 8 3 2 3 channel 11 76584 GHz slot allocation list Slot No Consignment Broadcaster Service 1 8 SDTV broadcasting 9 15 WOWOW INC HDTV SDTV l broadcasting broadcasting 16 22 SDTV broadcasting 23 30 SDTV broadcasting 31 37 HDTV SDTV Bp lapa Comoration broadcasting broadcasting 38 44 SDTV broadcasting 45 WOWOW INC 0 5 slot HDTV SDTV broadcasting broadcastin
25. independent data in PES packets A single ES is transmitted by the PES packet that has the same stream ID Event Event is a collection of streams in predefined starting ending time within the same service arranged channel such as news and dramas 5_2 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 PID Packet ID identifier Packet Identifier It is a 13 bit stream identifying information which shows individual stream attribution of the relevant packet PMT PMT specifies the packet ID of TS packet that transmits encoding Program Map Table signals to compose programs and the packet ID of TS packet that transmits the common information from pay program related information PPV Pay per view is pay broadcasting Fees are charged for each Pay Per View program or for program groups based on the viewing mode SDT Service description table holds the information related to arranged Service Description Table channels such as channel names and broadcasters names Automatic Display Message Among the EMM messages sent to each IC card the message stored in the IC card is defined as automatic display message and it is simultaneously displayed during program reception Mail Among the EMM messages sent to each IC card the message stored in a receiver is defined as mail and it can be arbitrarily called up by the user operation Parental Control Viewer Age Restriction Parental control is a
26. 2 3 4 Break 1 normal broadcasting break period All signals video audio data etc sent from a consignment broadcaster to an uplink station through the main line become null packets and the PAT includes no relevant service Handling according to each service ID is required Break 2 break status in terms of independent audio and data broadcasting For independent audio broadcasters and data broadcasters relevant services are written in the PAT but PMT is absent Note 1 Break 3 a temporary service is in the break status For a temporary service its PAT information does not exist when its broadcasting is finished No signal broadcasting break status due to equipment failure or maintenance works This represents a status where no signal is transmitted from a consignment broadcaster to an uplink station for any reasons such as failure on the transmitter or the line between the consignment broadcaster 1 46 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 and uplink station or maintenance works for the transmitter or line terminal station equipment of the consignment broadcaster failure or maintenance for the line line terminal station equipment MUX equipment to an identical TS At that time null packets are put in main line signals by an uplink station and are transmitted with TC8PSK Table 7 6 1 Type of broadcasting operation and break ESE ae a Display example of ma
27. 6 7 Hiragana name and Kanji name 7 8 Hiragana name and Kanji name 8 ATP E STEVE 2 Note3 S 56B Hiragana address 1 9 ac addes Na 8 CH Fi paa BUCIE U 4B Registration date time ETAO S 4B Service ID Hiragana address Full width S 48B Hiragana address 2 2 o ANOO E lt 24character EUC JP S 7B Postal code Half width U 4B Registration date time Note 5 9 Postal code 1078006 Aa S 4B Service ID AKER 2 4 Noe3 S 56B Kanji address 1 11 Kanji address 1 8727 ER E HER U 4B Registration date time Er TERETA S 4B Service ID 6 41 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 is Kanit address Zee 2 deerant EUC JP Nee a Pasa code Eanes EE at E a m Phone number 03 1234 xxxx is chamet EUC Jp Se x is FAX number i aange Jes AN E a 14 Reserved S 4B Service ID 13 yee ave porn spat plete operator Hereafter specified by operator Note 1 Separate the family name and first name with a full width space and store Any character type can be used Note 2 Separate the family name and first name with a full width space and store using Hiragana or symbols Note 3 Skip a name of prefecture and city government and store an address starting from city ward and county Note 4 In case it cannot be stored in address 1 store the characters that cannot fit in address 2 When writing or updating the address in address 1
28. 7 None A D Independent audio broadcasting that provides services even with low CN 8 None A Inhibition V and A designate video and audio respectively and subscripted h an designate high hierarchy and low hierarchy respectively D in parentheses designate that a descriptor is accompanied For data broadcasting the descriptor shall be handled in the same way as for audio broadcasting 7 1 5 Duplicative reference of the low hierarchy 1 Duplicative reference regarding multiple suits of audio In a case where multiple suits of audio are used low hierarchy audio may not be prepared for every suite of audio A hierarchy transmission descriptor added for each ES includes only a single reference value reference_PID so the standard below shall be followed to handle audio shall be possible Duplicative reference from multiple suits of high hierarchy audio to a single suit of low hierarchy In a case where the ADTS of multiple suits of high hierarchy audio performs duplicate reference relative to a single suit of low hierarchy audio transition to the identical low hierarchy ADTS is conducted respectively return to the original high hierarchy ADTS is not guaranteed for some receivers Because only one high hierarchy can be referred to with the descriptor of the low hierarchy ADTS Example Ifthe reference values of the components PID and descriptor are determined as shown table 7 1 3 Japanese compone
29. All rights reserved No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of ARIB 3 The ARIB Standards and ARIB Technical Reports are usually written in Japanese and approved by the ARIB Standard Assembly This document is a translation into English of the approved document for the purpose of convenience of users If there are any discrepancies in the content expressions etc between the Japanese original and this translated document the Japanese original shall prevail 4 The establishment revision and abolishment of ARIB Standards and Technical Reports are approved at the ARIB Standard Assembly which meets several times a year Approved ARIB Standards and Technical Reports in their original language are made publicly available in hard copy CDs or through web posting generally in about one month after the date of approval The original document of this translation may have been further revised and therefore users are encouraged to check the latest version at an appropriate page under the following URL http www arib orjp english index html1 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Preface Association of Radio Industries and Businesses in which broadcasting device manufacturers broadcasting operators radio equipment manufacturers telecommunications carriers and users have participated established basic technological requiremen
30. BASIC procedures A communication procedure BASIC procedure of data transfer control procedure developed for communication between a basic host and a terminal Only necessary functions are included CAS CAS Conditional Access system is a limited receiving system that controls utilization of services channel configuration and events programs Necessary for pay TV CBC mode CBC Mode Cipher Block Chaining Mode is a common key cryptosystem The operation result value of IV initial value is provided by XOR operation using the encrypted result and the next input CRC CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check is a circular error detection code to verify data correctness DNS DNS Domain Name Service RFC1034 RFC1035 is a protocol used for a service that maps a host name and IP address on the network FEC Forward Error Correction FTP FTP File Transfer Protocol RFC959 is a protocol used to share or transfer files between two hosts on TCP IP HDLC procedure HDLC High level Data Link Control is a highly reliable transfer control procedure mainly used for communication between computers on LAN or the Internet HTTP HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol RFC1945 is a protocol in the application layer which is used for World Wide Web data transfer ICMP ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol RFC792 is a message transfer protocol used for notification of various errors generated in the protocol data transfer process and for operation check I
31. For the data ES of 0x40 0x7F component tag the digital copy control descriptor can be listed in each ES When this ES is charged by the separate ECM from the default ES group the recordable purchase for each ES can be operated As a result when additional data ES is purchased the recordable purchase operation is executed The purchase result is accordingly reflected in the control for the output from IEEE1394 See Volume 4 and Volume 8 in this document for the detail S5 18 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 When Default ES Group Is Free i Operational rules of transmission When the default ES group is free recordable PPV cannot be operated for the ES of 0x00 0x3F component tag The PPV operation other than recordable purchase can be operated For the data ES of 0x40 0x7F component tag recordable PPV purchase can be operated In this case the digital copy control descriptor which refers the intended ES must be operated with the digital recording control_data 10 ii Receiver processing When the default ES group is free on selecting ES of 0x00 0x3F component tag the PPV purchase operation without recordable purchase should be carried out instead of recordable purchase operation regardless of the IC card response when the charge for each ES exists that is valid ECM is listed The reason for this is to avoid any inconsistency in the copy control performed by the combination of the output ES of the receiver because both the
32. If an illegal copy is distributed a person who participated in illegal copying can be identified by an embedded receiver ID Although this measure cannot prevent illegal copying it can raise deterrent effect Functions and operations that a receiver performs when possible A copy protection method needs a reproduction device based on consideration of copy protection That device must be a tamper resistant device 4 Level 3 Functions and operations that a center and receiver perform when possible Super distribution is a method to establish a free distribution of digital contents and defend an interest of copyright holders simultaneously However in the present circumstances there are still many problems in its implementation and facilities 1 2 3 Consideration of fairness Table 1 6 shows items that should be considered for fairness classified into four levels 6 76 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Table 1 6 Fairness level Security level Major application Reguired module system example feature Level 3 Simple online Simple online voting Both Applied function of public key voting cryptosystem Level 2 Fairness function Public opinion research Common cryptosystem process Safe and previous token distribution Level 1 Simple fairness Sampling duplication Receiver Pseudo random numbers function check occurrence Level 0 No consideration Massive calls reception service A reliable vo
33. MPEG 2 Moving Pictures Expert Group 2 This designates the video audio data compression coding technology ISO IEC 13818 standardized by the International Organization for Standardization MSB Most Significant Bit multiplex All data stream for transmission of multiple services within an identical physical channel MVTV Multi view TV network Aggregate of TS multiplex of MPEG 2 transmitted with a single distribution system NIT Network Information Table This allows transmission of information that relates transmission line information such as frequencies to channels and presents all channel ID numbers included in a single distribution system p f EIT s current program information p and next program information f PAT Program Association Table This identifies the packet ID of TS packets that transmit a PMT payload Bytes following header bytes in a packet PCR Program Clock reference PES Packetized Elementary Stream This designates a stream resultant from packetization of video audio discrete data and others with variable length PID Packet Identifier This is 13 bit stream identification information and indicates the attributes of discrete streams of relevant packets PMT Program Map Table This specifies the packet IDs of TS packets that transmit coding signals that compose a program and those of TS packets that transmit common information with respect to pay broadcasting related information PN signal Pseud Noise This signa
34. The record and playback functions that limit playback only by the device used to record the content DTCP Abbreviation of Digital Transmission Content Protection The standard for the content transmission and record control systems that use authentication and encryption for the digital interface DTLA Abbreviation of Digital Transmission Licensing Administrator The company licensing DTCP HDCP Abbreviation of High bandwidth Digital Content Protection System The standard for the copyright protection system for transmitting the digital video and digital video audio signals No more copies A state of content After the content whose digital copy control information is Copy one generation is recorded the content state transits to this state indicating that another copying of the content is no longer allowed Retention Stores the content temporarily in a record medium for the time shift viewing Move When the state of the content in a record medium is No more copies this function moves the content to another record medium disabling the reuse of the content in the source medium after copying Rendering unusable Disables reuse of the content by erasing the content itself or the encryption key Internet retransmission Transmits the received content via e mail or Internet Local encryption The code used to store the contents and broadcasting control signals that are to be protected into a record
35. has the responsibility to follow the accreditation criteria described below A 1 Accreditation Criteria for the Digital Recording of the TV and Data Services 1 2 3 4 5 6 Basic requirement for copy control Appropriate copy control must be performed according to the copy control information specified by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors Inheriting copy control information The copy control information mentioned above must be inherited after recording and must be in effect when the content is played Protection for recording The content specified by the digital copy control descriptor or the content availability descriptor as a subject of protection must be recorded in the state appropriately protected by encryption recording Protection for playing The content specified by the digital copy control descriptor or the content availability descriptor as a subject of protection must be protected also when it is played Restriction of the Internet retransmission The content specified by the digital copy control descriptor or the content availability descriptor as a subject of protection must not be output without protection to a terminal used for Internet retransmission Installation standard The function must be installed in a way that prevents an attempt to bypass or disable the content protection system or allow malicious extraction manipulation and copying of the content in the com
36. il content and updating CCI to No more copy 017 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free not encrypted This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for the high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 2 The content is recorded by specifying Usage Pass Type 1 TV Recording and Content Type 1 Audio For details of No more copy see Table B 2 17 8 50 Table B 2 17 Copy control field ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Playback Information Type Generation Count Definition 0x00 Not encrypted OxF Copy control not asserted EPN asserted 0x01 Ox1 Copy one generation 0x0 No more copy 8 51 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 10Requirement for Installing Advanced Access Content System AACS HD DVD 1 Table B 2 18 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control information specified by Advanced Access Content System HD DVD Table B 2 18 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresp
37. is operated in the sending period of one week Obviously the message ID 108 the Sth message mail cannot be sent in the d time area The rule of 4 pieces of mail at concurrent sending 5 70 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 Sending Example 5 Sending period 2 Message ID 104 Message ID 108 Message ID 100 Sending period 13weeks Message ID 101 Sending period 1week Message ID 103 Sending period 3days Sending period 1day Sending period 2weeks Figure 5 12 5 Message ID Sending Example 5 The message IDs of 101 103 and 104 can be sent completely within the sending period of the message ID 100 However the message ID 108 cannot be sent in the e time area because the receiver side cannot determine the completion of sending The rule of the sequence sending completion from the message mail with the oldest sending start time is assumed in the receiver side 5 13 Recording Control Response of IC Card The copy control of pay broadcasting is described in 4 11 Copy Control on Pay Broadcasting in this volume The receiver performs the copy control referring to the information related to the recording control of the IC card for the PPV operated with recoding control In this section the relation between the digital copy control descriptor and the IC card response is mentioned In the recording control of the IC card the operation is executed based on d
38. pseudorandom numbers time stamp Figure 1 9 Communication partner authentication with the message recovery method In a common key cryptosystem when a sender and a receiver verifier share a common key in advance the sender uses that common key to encrypt message Then the receiver decrypts the message and if that message makes sense the sender can be confirmed This is considered as the basic of services that provide a minimum level of security to prevent a false access 3 Level 2 In this level a series of cryptosystem commonly known as the public key cryptosystem PKCS is used This cryptosystem is implemented in browsers and popular in the Internet environment Required module in addition to Level 1 Public key cryptosystem function one way function and certificate feature Required authority Certificate management authority CA which issues refers changes updates and discards a certificate 1 2 5 Signature Table 1 8 shows items that should be considered as signature function and security level of each item Table 1 8 Signature function level Security level Major application Required module system example feature Level 3 Digital signature Information exchange Public key cryptosystem needing legal admissibility certificate issuing authority Level 2 Substitution of common Common key cryptosystem Common key cryptosystem key cryptosystem independent signature authority Level 1 Sim
39. regardless of whether or not it fits within 28 character the block of address 2 should be re written at the same time Note 5 Describe a postal code correctly corresponding to a Hiragana address When a Hiragana address is input then a postal code should be input When the Hiragana address is updated then the postal code should be updated along with it Note 6 Describe a postal code correctly corresponding to a Kanji address When a Kanji address is input then a postal code should be input When a Kanji address is updated then the postal code should be updated along with it Note 7 Separate the area code local office number and number with a half width space and store Note 8 In order to prevent wrong reading out of different field type data describe a service ID to identify the written data Also to identify different data in the same service it is recommended to describe an operator s unique standard format ID and refer to the service ID and the format ID when reading out data to check that the target data is stored Note 9 The definition of character types are as follows Hiragana 2 byte code Section 4 specified in ARIB STD B 24 Refer to Table 7 4 1 2 Alphanumerical 2 byte code Section 3 specified in ARIB STD B 24 Refer to Table 7 4 1 2 6 42 3 4 5 6 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Symbols 2 byte code Section 1 and section 2 specified in ARIB STD B 24 Re
40. s basic information information needed by uplink stations to generate TMCC shall be used This start timing and description transmission timing may present time differences that are about the same as the PMT transmission cycle Therefore after the start of the relevant bits of the TMCC generated by uplink stations using the basic information the description transmission timing also presents about the same amount of time differences 7 25 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 3 2 Handling the TMCC start bit For the start bit in the TMCC OR processing shall be performed only among the broadcasters that share the same repeater as shown in figure 6 3 1 and 6 3 2 While emergency warning broadcasting is conducted with the relevant repeater the TMCC start bit shall be always kept On XCH consignment broadcaster A xCH consignment broadcaster C Figure 6 3 1 TMCC start bit operation Broadcaster A Broadcaster B On period TMCC start bit RE EA DE AD EN EA IE EE OO Time sss Figure 6 3 2 TMCC start bit On period 6 3 3 Multiplexing position of emergency information descriptors Emergency information descriptors shall be written in descriptor field 1 of the PMT of the broadcaster which conduct emergency warning broadcasting It depends on broadcaster s judgment which service of PMT is to be written with emergency information descriptors However the relevant descriptors shall always be written in the PMT of emergency
41. service_ID 101 service_ID 101 event C service_ID 101 time event X Temporary service ID 102 Temporary event Y Temporary Temporary service_ID 103 service Temporary Figure 7 3 1 Temporary service implementation example when one normal service and two temporary services are provided 7 3 5 Implementation of event relay through a temporary service In a case where live broadcasting cannot be finished at scheduled time it is probable that the original broadcasting is continued with a temporary service that is provided using a band generated by reducing the bit rate of a subsequent regular program At that time the SI can be operated so as to enable relay recording from the original event to the temporary service s event The details about the operation are described in 7 5 Event Relay Unlike event relay among normal services the following restrictions are imposed For termination disappearance of a service in the PAT is employed Further event relay from a temporary service is not allowed 7 41 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 4 Multi view TV 7 4 1 Service overview Multi view TV MVTV refers to the application by which related contents are simultaneously broadcasted within a single service through multiple up to three SDT Vs One concrete example is such golf tournament broadcasting that 17th hole and 18th hole are broadcasted with Sub 1 and Sub
42. that the lines is used 4 When an error occurs in the calling process indicate it with a display such as a front panel LED or OSD so that viewers know that the error occurs Note This function is applied to all receivers that come to market as a new model eight months after the release of this definition 6 4 7 Operation of ISP connection information Level 3 Refer to TR B15 Part 2 Volume 6 7 4 8 Operation rules for ISP connection information 6 4 8 Operation of registered call Level 3 When a bi directional call has not been delivered correctly because of excessive traffic or other reasons contents should record that call in a receiver s registered call area and calling and sending of data should be performed according to instruction of a viewer even after the program finished The sending process in the registered call function is performed by the registered call contents or a receiver s application with a registered call function Registered call by a receiver s application is specified in Specification B Refer to TR B14 Volume 3 1 9 Operation of registered call for more detail 6 52 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 6 4 9 Guideline for transmission error Level 3 If the connection data sending and receiving and disconnection processes are not performed correctly by the auto connection function an error notification is performed Display method varies according to each product planning Method to no
43. 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy Control Not Asserted gt 10 Don t care Not recordable 11 017 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 i Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy Control Not Asserted 1 This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for the high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 2 If the service type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy control type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 3 The value of APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor is inherited to APS in the CPS Unit Usage File and Embedded CCI specified by AACS See Table B 2 24 4 APS control data is handled as 00 or the value of APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor is inherited to APS in the CPS Unit Usage File and Embedded CCI specified by AACS See Table B 2 24 s 54 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 For the CPS Unit Usage File set the value of DOT to 0 Trusted Input to 1 and ICT to 1 Table B 2 22 C
44. 043h 69 044h 70 045h 71 046h 72 047h STAR CHANNEL 73 048h 300 Note 8 74 049h 301 Note 8 75 04Ah 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 76 04Bh 77 04Ch 78 04Dh 79 04Eh 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 Note 3 80 04Fh 81 050h Nippon BS Broadcasting 82 051h 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 83 052h 84 053h 85 054h 320 324 325 326 327 328 329 620 62 1 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 Note 6 86 055h 321 Note 6 87 056h 322 Note 6 88 057h 323 Note 6 89 90 058h 059h World Hi Vision Channel 91 05Ah 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 92 05Bh 93 05Ch 94 05Dh 95 OSEh 96 OSFh WORLD INDEPENDENT NETWORKS JAPAN Inc 97 060h 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 909 98 061h 99 062h Note 4 100 063h 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 101 064h 102 065h WxX24 103 066h 929 104 067h 105 068h The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting 106 069h 933 107 06Ah 930 93 1 932 936 937 938 108 06Bh 934 Note 9 109 06Ch 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 9
45. 1 2 Considerable regulations concerning congestion of communication network 1 Terminal devices and facilities regulation Article 11 Article 18 Calling function 6 64 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Appendix 1 Supplementary explanation about security This section explains general information about security functions 1 1 Security functions 1 1 1 Data encryption To encrypt digital data a public key cryptosystem and a common key cryptosystem should be combined according to the security level It is necessary to pay attention to the intended purpose of an application needing a simple scramble A simple cryptosystem can be used for such application Outlines and features of each method are explained below 1 2 3 Common key cryptosystem This system is also called a secret key cryptosystem or symmetric cryptosystem In this system data is encrypted by a common key that a sender and a receiver share secretly at the sender side and decrypted by the same key at the receiver side A sender and a receiver must take some procedures to share a common key in advance Data that may cause violations of privacy or pecuniary damage if it is eavesdropped or decrypted must be encrypted with a full fledged cryptosystem Generally when an application needing the notification of credit card numbers and viewer information uses a public network electric wave or radio transmission at least a 56 64 bit common key cryptosystem
46. 1 2 Content transmitted through the low hierarchy 1 2 PSI PCR video audio and data shall be transmitted In a case where a scrambled service is provided ECM also needs to be transmitted For video and audio the following three different arrangements of components are possible in terms of hierarchical modulation Data can be placed on the high hierarchy and low hierarchy like audio Method 1 Transmission of video and audio to both the hierarchies High hierarchy High hierarchy video High hierarchy _ Low hierarchy Low hierarchy video Low hierarchy PSI PCR In this method both video and audio are transmitted to both the high hierarchy and low hierarchy On the low hierarchy switching is performed in terms of both video and audio For audio simultaneous broadcasting is performed using audio produced through down mix 7 32 3 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 conversion or another appropriate processing of high hierarchy audio as low hierarchy audio For example using monaural audio produced through down mix conversion allows the transmission capacity to be lowered so that audio can be transmitted using a limited band However freezing and muting occur when hierarchies are switched Method 2 Transmission of audio only to the low hierarchy High hierarchy High hierarchy video Low hierarchy Low hierarchy video Audio PSI PCR In
47. 1 7 shows how to use Message Authentication Code 6 70 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El p Match No error Verification Not match Tampered data or transmission error Signature Plaintext Signer Verifier Figure 1 7 Signature using a public key cryptosystem Process data to be sent with the message digest and attach a signature based on a public key cryptosystem 1 1 6 Key management Key management includes a key storing method key creation method key update key discard etc Even if just one item is imperfect the security level is decreased Any item must not be underestimated Key storing method This method has relation to security matters of the area where a secret key of public key cryptosystem and a common key of common key cryptosystem are memorized This security matter depends on the following items The table below shows security requirements for reference In this example the place where the center is settled and human resources are strictly managed The receiver is for an ordinary family and a certain level of attack is estimated but organized attack is not considered In the actual operation similar kind of consideration is necessary based on the security policy Generally a secret key of public key cryptosystem and a master key of common key cryptosystem are encrypted by a key of another common key cryptosystem instead of being written as raw values Usually input of PIN or password is r
48. 10 00 i Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy_control_not_asserted 1 This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for the high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 2 If the service type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy control type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 3 APSTB inherits the value of APS control data in the digital copy descriptor 4 APSTB is handled as 00 8 48 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 9 Requirement for Installing Security Architecture for Intelligent Attachment Device SAFIA 1 Table B 2 15 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by SAFIA for the TV and data services Table B 2 15 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control for SAFIA for the TV and data services Content Digital copy descriptor availabil
49. 22 2 RE 5 41 ASO Related Sindari EO ET A E auae 5 47 4 23 Caption Superimposed characters Scrambling and Display Priority vvevevenenneneneeeneeen 5 47 EEN EG 5 47 4 23 2 Superimposed characters ssssssssesssessseessseessseessseessnsessseessseeseesnessnessnsessneesseeessseeneesneessies 5 47 4 24 Valid Conditional Access System Consistency Check of CA system id of IC Card and Broadcast Wave EE 5 47 5 Operational Information esse eee 5 49 5 1 Conditional Access Broadcasting Serer eee reer ee errr errr eee eee eee reer rere rere reer Terre eee eee eee reer eeereeeerr rere errr etree 5 49 5 2 Charge Unit Chargeable ES ee 5 49 5 3 Non Scramble Scramble sesse ses tres eset EE EE EE EE Ee EER GE Ee EE Ee Ee Re ER Ee ee Ee EE ee Ee Ee ee ee ee ee Ee ee Re ee ees ee 5 49 5 3 1 OVELVICW EE EE EE EE RR snes ene neee ee 5 49 5 3 2 Operation of Caption and Superimposed characters ese esse see EE EE EE Ee EE EER Ee EE Ee Ee Ee ee EE ee ee ee 5 49 5 4 Free Program Pay Program ee 5 50 5 4 1 Definitions of Free Program Pay Program ee 5 50 5 4 2 Operation ee 5 50 5 4 3 Free Program with Content Protections rrr ttre see Ee Ee EE Ee EER EE Ee EE Ee ee ease sees Ee ee ease eens esas see 5 51 5 4 4 Possible Combination of Pay Free Scramble and Non Scramble Programs 17e sesse 5 52 5 5 Parental Rate Settings ee 5 54 5 6 Conditional Access System Descriptor EE 5 55 5 6 1 Function EE EE EE EE OE EE EG 5 55 5 6 2 Data Structure EE ED 5 55 5 6 3 Operation e
50. 26 019h 27 O1Ah Asahi Satellite Broadcasting 28 01Bh 160 161 164 165 166 167 168 29 01Ch 162 30 01Dh 163 31 O1Eh 169 32 O1Fh 461 463 465 467 469 33 020h 460 462 464 466 468 Note 1 Note 1 34 O21h 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 35 022h 768 36 023h 769 908 BS i 37 024h 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 38 025h 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 Note 1 39 026h 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 40 027h 41 028h 42 029h 43 02Ah 44 45 02Bh 02Ch B S Japan 46 02Dh 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 47 02Eh 488 Note 1 48 02Fh 489 Note 1 49 030h 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 50 031h 51 032h 52 033h 53 034h 54 035h Fuji Satellite Broadcasting 55 036h 191 192 193 198 199 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 56 037h 491 492 Note 1 57 038h 58 039h 59 03Ah 60 03Bh 61 03Ch 62 03Dh 63 O3Eh WOWOW 7 70 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 64 O3Fh 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 65 040h 66 041h 67 042h 68
51. 3 Start period of preferred connection service The 4 quarter in 2000 6 95 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 This page is intentionally left Blank 6 96 Volume 7 BS Digital Broadcasting Transmission Operation Standards ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Contents EA ME OM N RE 7 1 EN EDE EE 7 1 3 Definitions of Terminologjeseeseseseseseseeeenenenenenenenenininiiiiiiiiiii 7 2 4 Source Coding iss se esses eee eees eens seas seas titti R ERK EER ER KERR ER KERR eRR EER eRR EEEE ER ees 7 8 AAS EO Rte pelt OE RO ME EE EE ET 7 8 4 1 1 Standard for input signals esses esses RR GER KERR R sees tees Re ER Roe RR Re ER RR EERR GER Roe RR ee RR RR REK RR ttrt ee 7 8 4 1 2 MPEG2 Video operation detail s sssesesiesieeieesieesieee Rae Rae koek tees nnne annee nnen nnnnnnnent 7 9 4 1 3 Low hierarchy video format for hierarchical modulation streer sees ss esesieeeess eee ER REK ee 7 9 EE EE IE EE ML OE TE NE IE 7 11 EENS EET OS TEE EE 7 11 422 MPEG2 Audio operation details s teeeteeeeeeteeeseeeeeieeiessiensen 7 12 42 3 Notes regarding audio parameter switching ses ERF RR RR ROER R KEER KERR RE RR ee ER ee Reese ttt 7 12 4 2 4 Ranges of audio coding raestr etetett etttrtettteteteterttttttresestt teet ettet terrse ntteeett ettet ttt 7 13 42 5 High quality services sees eee ieee R Re RReR Re E Re snn nanna E Roe R ee REKE Rees 7 13 5 VEE 7 14 1 Multiplexing inside a Service sss eres sree esse GER RGER REK REK REK REK REK R
52. 4 Detail of calling process 6 54 7 Security ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El This chapter explains the concept about security functions that are necessary for bi directional services Implementation rules for receivers are defined in the separate rules added to this operation rules or operators standard of the CAS conference data broadcasters and center operators 7 1 Security functions required for bi directional service When providing a bi directional data broadcasting service which needs sending and receiving of the viewer information a comparably small amount of payment and consideration of fairness security functions may be necessary In Table 7 1 bi directional services are classified in three service classes according to the viewpoint of security and security functions that are necessary for each class are shown Table 7 1 Service class Simple service Security function required for each service class Standard service Advance service Service outline Simple service that needs no payment or authentication Application example Anonymous survey Document request Service that distributes charged digital contents Service that needs a small amount of payment personal authentication and m fairness VERE ee ee ed Shopping Distribution of music Gambling software Registered survey Distribution of game Precise opin
53. 455 Note 1 23 016h 456 Note 1 24 017h 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 25 018h 26 019h 27 01Ah 7 60 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 28 01Bh 160 161 164 165 166 167 168 29 01Ch 162 30 01Dh 163 31 O1Eh 169 32 O1Fh 461 463 465 467 469 Note 1 33 020h 460 462 464 466 468 Note 1 34 O21h 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 35 022h 768 36 023h 769 908 BS i 37 024h 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 38 025h 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 Note 1 39 026h 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 40 027h 41 028h 42 029h 43 02Ah 44 02Bh 45 02Ch B S Japan 46 02Dh 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 47 02Eh 488 Note 1 48 02Fh 489 Note 1 49 030h 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 50 031h 51 032h 52 033h 53 54 034h 035h Fuji Satellite Broadcasting 55 036h 191 192 193 198 199 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 198 799 56 037h 491 492 Note 1 57 038h 58 039h 59 03Ah 60 03Bh 61 03Ch 62 03Dh 63 O3Eh WOWOW 64 03Fh 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 800 801 802 803 804 805 806
54. 807 808 809 65 040h 66 041h 67 042h 68 043h 69 044h 70 045h 71 046h 72 047h STAR CHANNEL 73 048h 300 74 049h 301 75 04Ah 76 04Bh 77 04Ch 78 04Dh Note 8 7 61 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 79 O4Eh 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 80 04Fh 81 050h 82 051h 83 052h 84 053h Note 3 85 054h 320 324 325 326 327 328 329 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 86 055h 321 87 056h 322 88 057h 323 89 058h 90 059h Note 6 91 05Ah 330 33 1 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 92 OSBh 93 05Ch 94 05Dh 95 OSEh 96 OSFh WORLD INDEPENDENT NETWORKS JAPAN 97 060h 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 909 98 06lh 99 062h Note 4 100 101 063h 064h 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 102 065h WxX24 103 066h 929 104 067h 105 068h The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting 106 069h 933 107 06Ah 930 93 1 932 936 937 938 108 06Bh 934 Note 9 109 06Ch 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 110 06Dh 111 O6Eh
55. Call in date and time can be obtained by the call in date and time request command response of the IC card Because the preparation time for connecting line is also considered the call in date and time obtained from the IC card can be displayed before the connection is established and then the preparation for the connection is prompted Also the call in date and time obtained a few minutes earlier than the actual time can be displayed as year month day and approximate hour and minute for instance Call in may not be initiated if no data exist for it Therefore it is preferable to describe this in the user manual etc as needed 5 21 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 This function is a manufacturer option 4 12 5 Related Standards Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 4 4 3 3 4 Command Response Detail Chapter 4 4 5 1 Receiver Operation during Viewing Information Collection Communications Reference 2 3 7 Transmission of viewing history information Reference 2 3 8 Power on call in control Reference 2 3 26 Notification of retry over Reference 2 3 27 User call in request 4 13 Automatic Message Display 4 13 1 Basic Operation This is a mandatory function for the CAS Automatic message display is obtained from the EMM individual message IC card stored message which is transmitted to each receiver and the EMM common message which is transmitted commonly to all receivers
56. Format and Recording RE EE gees Sea EE Sse Sade SNe viele Se Se EE Selle EE EL OE ET EE ates Ses 8 29 A l Accreditation Criteria for the Digital Recording of the TV and Data Services 8 29 A 2 Accreditation Criteria for the Digital Recording of the Audio Services ee ee etree 8 29 Appendix B Content Protection Systems for the Removal Record Media Available to the Receiver Subject to This Document EE EE EE EE EE EE EE TTE 8 3 1 BI Approved Content Protection Systems tree tese sesse ee sek Se Se eke ER ee Se ee eke ER Se Ge eke ER ee ee ee Reese ee ee ees 8 3 B 2 Requirement for Installing the Content Protection System terte seek see ER ER ER ee ee ee et ee ee ee ee ee ee 8 36 B 2 1 Requirement for Installing Content Protection System for Blu ray Disc Rewritable 77 8 36 B 2 2 Requirement for Installing D VHS tees esse ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ek ek ee et ee ERK ek ee ee ER ER ER ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ese 8 38 B 2 3 Requirement for Installing Content Protection for Recordable Media CPRM reses 8 40 B 2 4 Requirement for Installing MagicGate Type R for Secure Video Recording MG R SVR for Memory Stick PRO 1 rsesseeereteteeeeeeetensneeneseseeeeteneeneneanenenenenenseeeeeenenceseas 8 42 B 2 5 Requirement for Installing MagicGate Type R for Secure Video Recording MG R SVR for Hi MD tee ee ee ee ee ee eek ee ee ee ee ee ek ee ee ee ee ER ER ER ee ee ee ee ee ee REK ek ee ee ee ER ER ER ee ee ee ee ee ER ek ee ee ee ee ER ee ee ee tt
57. ML 4 2 Audio 4 2 1 Standard for input signals lt Sampling rate gt 1 The same sampling rate shall always be used according to each service This prevents silence from occurring within the service of an identical broadcasting station when the clock of the D A converter is changed 2 The sampling rate shall be 48 kHz For independent audio broadcasting service provided by VHF broadcasters 32 kHz also shall be available For data broadcasting refer to 6 3 Audio encoding in Part 1 Volume 3 BS Digital Broadcasting Data Broadcasting Operation Standard lt Audio mode gt Follow the standard provided in 6 2 1 Audio decoding process in ARIB STD B21 lt Down mix coefficient gt Follow the standard provided in 6 2 1 Audio decoding process in ARIB STD B21 There are cases where down mix coefficients are not transmitted If this is the case the default value shall be used for decoding When a down mix coefficient other than the default value is used transmission shall always be performed lt Audio level gt In a case where down mix conversion from multi channel stereo signals into 2 channel stereo signals is performed down mix calculation may frequently cause clipping due to overflow resulting extreme 7 11 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 deterioration of audio guality With respect to such a source it is desirable that the deterioration of audio guality due to down mix conversion is reduced for ex
58. PMT If the special system for content protection is adopted in the future the operation must be executed with the same Ks transmission in the ECM that complies with Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 and the ECM that complies with the special content protection system as illustrated below in order to allow the viewing of free program intended for content protection in the receiver 5 80 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 ECM complying with STD B25 Encrypt the contents with the common Ks ECM complying with the special system for content protection Figure A 8 1 Operational Image of Multiple Conditional Access Systems for Content Protection The possibility of multiple conditional access system operation provided this time is not limited to the purpose of content protection shown in Figure A 8 1 For example the operation of the conditional access system which has different charges based on the program or the channel service_id in the same TS is not necessarily denied It was stipulated assuming that such operation would be processed without malfunction by displaying a noncompliant message for the conditional access system service that is not installed in the receiver if carried out A 8 2 Concept of Compliance with Part 1 of STD B25 Assumption This document intends to be continuously used as long as the already circulated receivers are constantly used without any complication when a different conditional access system ope
59. RR ER ER Se KERE ER Se eens nreneneeetiesneeeeeiesansnticeetisasensaceeeitesanentes 8 16 6 5 1 Storage of the Content reset eeeeeteteeeeteeeeseseseeteeeeeeaeseeneneeneneeeeeeeeeenensieateneneneneneeeeeeetetees 8 16 6 5 2 Ede EE EE EG 8 17 6 5 3 Retention RE ET EE ET see s euis erele e 8 17 6 5 4 Move Function EE EE EE EE OT ie ereiene 8 17 6 6 Digital Recording of the Content for the Removable Record Media ee ee ee etter 8 18 6 6 1 Digital Recording of the TV and Data Services tities ee Ge ee ER ee R ee ee ER ER ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 8 18 6 6 2 Digital Recording of the Audio Service vrs teeteteretrreeeeteeeseseeteeeeeeneeeneneneeneneeee ee ee se 8 19 6 7 Analog Recording of the Content for the Removable Record Media ee ee ett 8 19 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 7 1 Analog Recording of the TV and Data SerVicCeS ees Ee Ee ee ee ER GR GR ER EE EE Ee ee ee ee ee ee 8 19 6 7 2 Analog Recording Of the Audio Servicers see se se Ee EE EE eee EE ee Ee te Ee cece GR ER ee EE EE EE ee ee ee ee ee 8 19 7 Installation Standard for the Receiver seer esse SEE EE EE Ee te Ee et eee GR EE EE EE EE Ee Ee Ee ee ee ee ER ER ER ee ee Ee ee ee ee ee ee 8 20 7 1 Installation Standard for the Content Protection System ee 8 20 7 1 1 Basic Requirement for Installation Standard sr ere es ee EE EE ee Ee ee ER ER ER ER EE EE Ee ee ee ee ER ee ee se ee 8 20 7 1 2 Subject of Protection eer ere ese EE Ee Ee Ee Ee Ee ER GE ER EE EE EE Ee Ee Ee Ee ee ee GR GR ER EER EE ee
60. Record Media 6 6 1 Digital Recording of the TV and Data Services 1 2 3 4 To receive the content for the digital TV emergency video data emergency data and bookmark list data services for which the digital copy control and content availability descriptors specify protection and digitally record it in the removable record media the record format and content protection system that are authorized by Engineering Committee of the Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting hereafter referred to as Dpa according to the accreditation criteria described in Appendix A must be used For details of accreditation contact Dpa The authorized record formats and content protection systems are officially announced Section 8 9 1 of this volume provides additional explanation When the digital copy descriptor digital recording control data is 10 so that the content is specified as Copy one generation more than two copies of the content must not be created Also multiple copies in the same record format must not be created When the copy is digitally recorded as a backup in the area not accessible from the user this restriction does not apply Section 8 9 2 of this volume provides additional explanation The above restriction for recording to the digital record media applies on a receiving component basis When more than one receiving component exists the restriction above applies to each component If the receiver s recor
61. Relations between APS_control_data in the digital copy control descriptor and APSTB for AACS HD DVD pA Eb controlata fhe Setting of APSTB Definition of APSTB digital copy control descriptor 00 000 APSTB is OFF 01 001 Type 1 of APS1 is ON 10 010 Type 2 of APS1 is ON 11 011 Type 3 of APS1 is ON 8 53 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 11 Requirement for Installing Advanced Access Content System AACS Blu ray Disc 1 Table B 2 21 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by Advanced Access Content System Blu ray Disc Table B 2 21 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control for AACS Blu ray Disc Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for AACS Blu ray Disc copy_control_ T encryption _ recording m de op control data l Recordable as Copy Free Copy Control Not Asserted gt 00 0 Recordable as Copy Free with applying Encryption Plus Non Assertion EPN Asserted gt i 10 Don t care Recordable as Gopy One Generation with encrypting the content and updating CCI to No more copies gt 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable
62. Super frame Implementation of site diversity within The change instruction is instruction for the super frame period after N incremented at the time of bit start site diversity super frames following bit 1 After and end implementation the implementation of site diversity bit 0 in M super frames 3 Main station Signals uplinked from the main station Even if this bit is changed by site instruction are always set as 1 diversity the change instruction is not incremented 2 Sub station Signals uplinked from the sub stations Even if this bit is changed by site instruction are always set as 1 diversity the change instruction is not incremented l Reserve A receiver must not react to the change of this bit for the time being The timing of bit 4 concerned with site diversity switching is defined as below Carrier switching occurs somewhere in one super frame period after N super frames since the bit start At this time the career is overlapped or interrupted for several milliseconds The career just before and after switching presents frequency differences within several kHz Figure 6 4 1 shows the timing The variation of the change instruction is also shown for reference Switching occurs somewhere in this super frame 1SF 11mS E lt gt i T es erg T Dit 4 l l l N 1 N 2 1 0 1 M Change instruction C C 1 C 2 Figure 6 4 1 TMCC operati
63. TS signals coming from consignment broadcasters It is also impossible to preschedule site diversity operation for avoiding line disconnection resulted from rainfall Therefore no processing shall be performed for TS signals at the time of site diversity operation for avoiding line disconnection resulted from rainfall Processing such as CAS release shall not be performed neither However for prescheduled site diversity operation such as facility maintenance and switching back to the main station it is desirable that processing such as picture freezing and audio muting is performed so that recipients hardly recognize switching For signals output just before and after switching the matching precision will be several milliseconds but complete matching cannot be guaranteed Therefore it is desirable that a receiver performs almost unnoticeable processing such as freezing and muting To recognize the occurrence of site diversity operation TMCC signals described below can be used 6 4 3 TMCC Operation At the time of site diversity operation the operation is notified beforehand with the TMCC The operation method is as below Regarding TMCC transmission reception control signals in terms of site diversity operation the bits of the extension field are defined in table 6 4 1 description with MSB first 7 28 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 6 4 1 Bit operation for TMCC extension field bit Content Characteristic Remark 4
64. allowed time listed on the content availability descriptor See Volume 8 for the detail 4 11 4 2 Transmission Rules and Receiver Processing for Recordable PPV 1 When Default ES Group Is Chargeable i Operational rules of transmission The valid ECM is listed on the first loop of the PMT and the operation of recordable program purchase will be carried out In the PPV mentioned here which the recordable purchase operation is performed for the IC card response before the program purchase is Recordable only by the purchaser Digital copy control descriptor is listed on the first loop of the PMT The digital recording control data must be operated with 10 and the APS_control_data is also always operated with values other than 00 Nevertheless if the service type is digital audio including temporary or data broadcasting including temporary with copy control type ll it can be operated with digital_recording_control_data 10 and APS 00 This is intended for the audio programs with copy control on the audio Therefore the macrovision control does not work for the video ES which is additional data When applying the macrovision control to the video ES in these service types it must be operated only with digital recording control data 10 and APS 00 In the second loop of the PMT the digital copy control descriptor can be listed individually for the ES of 0x40 0x7F component tag When the default ES is chargeable and i
65. and Scrambling Key Change 2 5 8 5 ECM Update Retransmission When the scrambling key of the ES to which the ECM is applied is changed the ECM will be updated before the change of the scrambling key The ECM update will be notified by the change of the version number of the extended section format 5 8 5 1 Scrambling Key Change control flag in the relevant ES header Along with the scrambling key change the transport scrambling control flag is also changed every time It is changed from even number key to odd number key and from odd number The scrambling key Ks for the ES to which the ECM is applied is changed by the transport scrambling key to even number key The same key is never changed continuously 5 8 5 2 Update Retransmission Cycles Please refer to 4 Attached Tables in Reference 2 in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 The update frequency per ECM is one second or more The minimum retransmission frequency of ECM is 100 ms 5 60 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 8 5 3 ECM Update and Scrambling Key Change 1 The ECM update and the scrambling key change when a single ECM is applied are illustrated below The same ECM transmission period ECM update cycle ECM transmission Scrambled TS packet group The same scrambling key use period ir 1600ms lt T1 0 lt T2 T1 T2 gt 2000ms Figure 5 8 1 ECM Update and Scrambling Key Change When a Single ECM Is Applied When the ECM is applied to multi
66. and copying of the content in the compressed digital signal format and control signal to be protected 8 30 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Appendix B Content Protection Systems for the Removal Record Media Available to the Receiver Subject to This Document This appendix describes the content protection system or the recording format for the removal record media mounted on the device subject to this document when recording function is installed The systems described in this appendix are reviewed and approved by the organization described in sections 6 6 and 6 7 according to the criteria in Appendix A To install each system the receiver manufacturer should contact with the licenser of the system If the installing system is not included in this appendix the approval from the above organization is required in advance For the contact for approval see section 8 9 1 The terms used in Applied service in Table B 1 indicate as follows TV service indicates digital TV services and emergency video services Data service indicates data services emergency data services and bookmark list data services and Audio service indicates digital audio services and emergency audio services B 1 Approved Content Protection Systems Table B 1 Content protection systems for the removal record media available to the receiver ene Approved item Description Content protectio
67. asserted 1 This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for the high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 2 If the service type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy_control_type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 3 APSTB inherits the value of APS control data in the digital copy descriptor 4 APSTB is handled as 00 8 42 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 5 Requirement for Installing MagicGate Type R for Secure Video Recording MG R SVR for Hi MD 1 Table B 2 7 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by MG R SVR for Hi MD Table B 2 7 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control for MG R SVR for Hi MD Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for MG R SVR for Hi MD Copy control a encryption _
68. banking payment Home banking payment does not need the implementation of new protocol 3 Necessary function for center Bank account number management function Function to previously manage information required for home banking according to need Function to support the cash card payment center Function to support inquiry for the balances money transfer etc 6 89 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Appendix3 Supplementary explanation about congestion 3 1 What is congestion When excessive traffic that is over the unit time capacity is concentrated on a switch the telephone lines go dead Many people try to call repeatedly until they can get though and congestion gets worse 3 2 Effect of congestion avoidance Table 3 1 shows effects that viewers and broadcast stations can get Table 3 1 Effect that viewers and broadcast stations can get Since line busy during calling seldom occurs they can communicate almost all the time Viewer Therefore they don t have to call repeatedly If traffic is concentrated in short period of time in conjunction with a program the Broadcast station cannot accept response data when the volume of data goes over the station s station capacity for operating traffic However call delay or other functions allow collecting a large volume of response data effectively in the event 3 3 Mechanism of congestion occurrence Figure 3 1 shows the mechanism image of congestion occu
69. by specifying Usage Pass Type 1 TV Recording and Content Type 0 Audiovisual For details of Copy control not asserted and No more copy see Table B 2 17 4 APS in the copy control descriptor inherits the value of APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor or is set to 00 APS is Off 8 49 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 APS in the copy control descriptor inherits the value of APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor 2 Table B 2 16 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by SAFIA for the audio service Table B 2 16 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control for SAFIA for the audio service Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for SAFIA Copy control T encryption _ recording mode op control data 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free not encrypted 10 Bo cae Recordable as Copy One Generation with encrypting the 01 content and updating CCI to No more copy 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free not encrypted 10 Don esse Recordable as Copy One Generation with encrypting the
70. control level is changed for each ES of the video and audio of the main program especially at the time of ES switching and also to avoid a complicated operation by the combination the video is free but the audio is prohibited of ES that outputs CGMS A Example Explanation of mentioned above example To simplify the explanation the copy control descriptor is listed only in the first loop as CGMS 10 and APS 00 in this example It is assumed to be the recordable PPV purchase operation by the default ES group As an example of not complying with the operational stipulations in this document only the secondary audio 2 is operated as the recordable purchase with separate ECM If the user purchases the program with a recordable default ES group and a non recordable secondary audio 2 and selects the primary video and the secondary audio 2 to output the video will be also prohibited from recording because for example the CGMS A is recorded with the audio encoded with MPEG etc when the strict approach is taken The user supposedly purchased the primary video as recordable In this document it is provided that the recordable operation is carried out for the transmission for the ECM of the secondary audio 2 and the receiver controls whether the program is recordable or non recordable based on the purchase result of the PPV recordable purchase by the default ES group in such operation 5 76 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 The ECM f
71. current copy oN wn output prohibited 11 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 11 00 No See Vol 4 in this document No descriptor No See Vol 4 in this document Digital 01 00 00 No See Vol 4 in this document audio 10 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 10 007 Yes Recordable No current No current OFF copy once purchase output output View only ON No current No current copy output output prohibited 11 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 11 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 11 00 00 No See Vol 4 in this document Audio recordable OFF No output a copy once 10 007 Yes purchase PY View only SCMS copy OFF Noioutput copy prohibited prohibited 10 00 Yes Recordable OFF No output SCMS copy once purchase copy once View only SCMS copy oN Does copy prohibited prohibited 11 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 11 00 No See Vol 4 in this document No descriptor No See Vol 4 in this document Data 01 00 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 10 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 10 00 Yes Recordable OFF 10 10 No current copy orice purchase output View only No current copy ON mee output prohibited 11 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 11 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 11 00 00 No See Vol 4 in this document Audio f recordable OFF No output Eed Copy once 10 007 Yes purchase PY View only SCMS copy OFF No gutput copy prohibited prohibited 10 00 Yes Recordable OFF No output SCMS copy once purchase copy once View only SCMS copy oN Ho ou copy prohib
72. data communication protocol with PHS system of which data communication method is 32kbps and 64kbps PIN Personal Identification Number In order to get access permit of a certain system a secret number allocated in advance is used to identify a person PKCS PKCS Public Key Cryptography Standard is a cipher system mainly based on a public key cryptosystem including functions such as common key encryption hash function pseudorandom numbers etc PN code The PN Pseudo Noise is a code generating and 0 randomly and used for energy diffusion of digital signal The maximum length sequence is often used POP3 POP3 Post Office Protocol version3 RFC1939 is a protocol used to view an e mail list get or delete an e mail message in the mail server spool PPP PPP Point to Point Protocol RFC1661 is a protocol allowing transfer based on multiple protocols on the Point to Point link Used for dial up connection PPP in HDLC like Flaming The frame configuration for building up as upper protocol of ppp The configuration method of headers and footers according to the frame configuration used in the HDLC procedure PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network reserved Not defined yet In the definition of the encoding bit stream it shows that it may be defined in ISO for the future extension Any bit that has not been defined in the ARIB standard separately is set as 1 reserved fut
73. described below In the EMM message there are mail and automatic display message The former is the receiver specification and does not have a problem with its display form On the other hand the latter is the message superimposed on the screen Thus the control code to achieve a rough position control for the display position was defined Instead of providing some kind of function that is specific to the CAS to display characters using the caption installed in the receiver was considered However because it cannot specify the video format to display the messages instead specifying rough positions as mentioned in this volume and leaving the detail to the receiver were stipulated as the format For the maximum number of characters for the automatic display message the maximum of 400 bytes is described in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 but the restriction of numbers of characters and lines were additionally provided for the control in consideration of the assumption of character size installed in the receiver and the effective position control of top center bottom left and right at the reviewing stage Moreover the frame size was stipulated to be optimized on the receiver side with the maximum number of the transmitted character per line and the line number in order to make the video be easily seen as much as possible for the distinction from other captions etc 5 74 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 A 3 Retransmission Cycle and Update Cyc
74. device and output them to the user access bus Confidential information Information that compromises the content protection security if leaked such as the encryption algorithm local encryption key unique key for the receiver and confidential data and the information in the digital copy control and content availability descriptors that specify the restriction for copying and use of the content Removable record media The record medium that is removable from the receiver and usable on other players such as a tape and disk Digital recording Records the content in a record medium as digital signals Analog recording Records the content in a record medium as analog signals Recording format The specification for the record media and the physical and logical recording system for the record media Recording format includes the specification for the recording and playback requirements Content protection system Technology such as encryption which prevents malicious changing and copying of the content to protect the content copyright 8 2 5 Transmission Operation Rules 5 1 Definition of Scramble and Non scramble ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 The receiver determines the scramble mode for the component based on the transport scrambling control field in the TS packet header For the BS digital broadcasting free CA mode is used only to determine whether the program is to be c
75. digital interface IEEE1394 A neces 2 5 RGB analog video output C 2 6 Digital video output C 3 1 Support of Support of the digital copy control descriptor A content OREST f Section 6 3 3 2 protection Support of the content availability descriptor B information Internet Prohibition of internet retransmission by the A 4 1 EF Section 6 4 retransmission receiver function Storage function including the No more copies A 5 1 Support of function Section 6 5 5 2 storage 9 Retention function A i 5 3 Move function A 6 1 Installation Support of the content availability descriptor B 6 2 standard for the Support of storage A Section 7 6 3 receiver Other than 6 1 and 6 2 A A When the function is installed on the receiver no allowable period B Applied to all the new model receivers released after October 1 2003 C See Section 6 3 of this volume 1 The allowable period for supporting the storage function applies to the receiver released after March 28 2002 8 28 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Appendix A Accreditation Criteria for the Content Protection System in the Record Format and Recording The contract between the manufacture including distributor of the digital record device for the content and all the devices that can play the recorded content and the licenser for the record format and content protection system for recording must clearly state that the manufacturer including distributor
76. display of caption for scrambled default ES group is basically left to product planning of the receiver As a guideline it is desirable that the caption is displayed only if the default ES group is normally descrambled when the caption display is valid regardless of the scrambling condition of the caption components 4 23 2 Superimposed characters The display of superimposed characters for scrambled default ES group is basically left to product planning of the receiver 4 24 Valid Conditional Access System Consistency Check of CA_system_id of IC Card and Broadcast Wave Even though several conditional access systems can be operated the distinction of the conditional access system is made based on CA system id In the valid conditional access system the CA_system_id obtained by the initial setting condition 5 47 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 command response from the IC card when inserted corresponds to the CA system id sent by the PSI SI Even if several numbers of CA system id are described in the CAT or the PMT the receiver processing provided in this volume is executed if they match with the CA system id obtained by the IC card command response For the conditional access system descriptor in the PMT and the CA contract information descriptor in the SDT EIT the error display provided in 4 18 Error Notification Screen in this volume should be carried out in consideration of preventing malfunction even for the servic
77. displayed as a character string such as 2 The function to void the viewer setting information at the time of transferring or discarding a receiver should be implemented 6 51 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 4 5 2 Guideline for user interface to set viewer setting information Level 3 A receiver should have a user interface to input change or delete the viewer setting information Specification A 1 A user interface should have a menu help and guidance such as navigation to avoid setting errors Specification B 2 When a receiver s function is used to change the viewer setting information that has been already set the current setting information should be displayed However a password should not be displayed in terms of security protection Specification B 6 4 6 Operation of display at the time of calling Level 3 1 When connection has been already established and when the call function is used for connection a dialogue related to the connection should not be displayed Note 2 When a call is originated by the data sending function or others while connection has not been established it is recommended to display that connection will be established soon together with the host information such as ISP name phone number etc Specification B 3 During a line is used indicate it with a display such as a front panel LED or OSD so that viewers know
78. duration time 2 T3 Automatic display duration time 3 1 T1 T2 T3 One automatic display period Figure 4 13 1 Display Operation of Automatic Display Message The receiver repeats the on off control mentioned above as many times as the automatic display described in the EMM common message main body After the receiver repeats it for a predefined number of times it erases the display If the program selection is executed one more time the receiver carries out again the above mentioned control 5 23 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Each operation of the receiver for the three kinds of automatic display erasure described in the EMM common message section is as follow 1 0x00 Erasable Message can be erased by the viewer operation during the display period including the on off of message mentioned above 2 0x01 Non erasable Message erasure must not be executed by the viewer operation during the message display period 3 0x02 Display erasure No automatic display message will be displayed When it is updated to Display erasure while the automatic display message is being displayed the display of the automatic display message including the frame of the message will be terminated The means for the erasure by the viewer operation should be left to product planning The time until the display of automatic display message starts is controlled by transmitting the delay time sent to the IC card by the CA service de
79. ee 7 48 7 14 Effective screen area area in which time tickers can be displayed ere ees ere ee 7 48 7 7 5 Handling daylight saving al EE EE EE EE eensesaea seen eee en es 7 48 7 8 Subtitles and Superimposed EES EE 7 49 7 8 1 ES TIETE EE EE EG 7 49 7 8 2 SURE EE OE RE EE ene aeee ences 7 49 7 8 3 Superimposed EISE EE OE EE EE EE EE 7 49 Allocation List of Various Numeric ValueS se see ses see EE Ee Ee ces EE Ee Ee Ee EE ee EE Ee ER ee GR Ee ee Ee Ee Ee ee Ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 50 8 1 Guidelines for Allocation of Various Numeric Values ser esse se se eerste ec eset Ee EE ee EE Ee ee ee ee ees ences 7 50 8 1 1 Transport stream ID transport stream id allocation guidelinesvevevevevvenennnnnnne 7 50 8 1 2 Guidelines for allocating the service IDs service id of the individual services 177 7 51 8 1 3 Allocation of information provider IDs information provider id Heer ee Ere ee 7 55 8 1 4 Allocation of broadcaster IDs broadcaster_id EE 7 55 8 1 5 Identifier ENE cee eee 7 56 8 1 6 Identifier values other than the above sesse eet ese EE Ee Ee et Ee ee SE Ee sete Ee EE ee Ee ee ee ee ee Ee ee Re ee ee ee ee 7 56 8 2 Identifier BERE EE EE EE RE EG 7 57 8 2 1 TS_id EE EE EE OE ER Ee 7 57 S m ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 TEER a E C D i EE EE EG 7 58 8 2 3 broadcaster id EE EE EE EE eens 7 59 8 2 4 Logo ID T Re EERER ER EER ER ER GER KERR KERKE Ree eek ERGE ERK ERGER EER ER eeR EER ER ERGER ERK ee GER ee R ee GER ee Roe Re ee Reese 7 60 8 3 List of Slot
80. encrypted data stolen in the middle of the communication path is reused to create a mess In order to prevent such a case a sender side includes a different pseudo random number in every transmission data and a receiver performs simple calculation e g adding 1 and returns it challenge code Seed of a timer or counter is calculated by a common cryptosystem and the result can be a pseudo random number Time stamp Time stamp is used to prevent a third party from reusing correct signature data Even the same signature content has no repeatability Simple identification function In order to confirm that a person has a right to use a certain data or module it is necessary to identify the person PIN is often used as the simplest identification technique PIN authentication PIN is used to confirm a card owner Since digit number should be suitable for people to memorize and for input by a remote control device 4 digit to 8 digit of numerical numbers are appropriate Certificate Certificate is mandatory when a public key cryptosystem is used to authenticate a partner Authorities that issue a certificate must be capable of issuing a correct certificate without any interpolation Therefore they should be organizations in neutral position in which a signer and a verifier put trust Receiver ID Receivers have two card IDs Decoder ID for the receiver body and card ID stored in the IC card Although both IDs can be used for identification
81. first loop or the descriptor 2 the second loop in the PMT 5 6 3 Operation When the conditional access system descriptor is operated with the same CA_system_id in the CAT only one description should be listed The same number of the conditional access system descriptors specified in the CA_system_id which transmits the EMM in the relevant TS are described in the CAT The same number of the conditional access system descriptors specified in the CA_system_id operated in the relevant program is described in the PMT When the component in the program is subject to charge the valid ECM ECM_PID 0x1FFF is specified by the conditional access system descriptor in the PMT The placement rules are as follows 1 When the conditional access system descriptor is placed in the first loop of the PMT the relevant ECM is applied to all the components in the program 2 When the conditional access system descriptor is placed in the second loop of the PMT the relevant ECM is applied only to the relevant component 3 When the conditional access system descriptors are placed in the first loop and the second loop the ECM listed in the second loop should be the valid description 4 When multiple conditional access system descriptors are listed the number of the conditional access system descriptors listed in the first loop and the second loop are the same as the number of the listed CA_system_id Ox1FFF can be specified as a conditional access PID
82. in the introductory period EMM transmission must follow Part 1 of ARIB STD B25 and Volume 5 in Part 1 of this document The transport scrambling control field in the TS packet header If the default ES group is scrambled ECM_PID used to scramble the component for the caption or superimposed characters is the same as that for the default ES group Even if the default ES group is scrambled the component for the caption the component tag value is 0x30 0x3F the component for the superimposed characters and the data component other than the default ES group the component tag value is 0x40 0x7F can be handled without scrambling In this case ECM_PID 0x1FFF which is invalid for the corresponding ES must be specified in the second loop of PMT 5 3 Protected Free Program 5 3 1 Definition The protected free program is a free program transmitted securing the copyright within the broadcast wave without applying customer management and the default ES group is non chargeable The protected free program is handled by the functions for scrambled free program in the conditional access system for reception which conforms to Part 1 in ARIB STD B25 8 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 All the default ES groups for the protected free program are non chargeable Note however that some components other than the default ES group may be charged For the protected free program ECM with the common broadcaster group identif
83. information is transmitted using the first 8 bytes of the 16 byte RS code section following 188 bytes of the main body of a TS packet For multiple slots Information is repeated frame and super frame identification bits differ So that packet data is protected it is possible to add an optional 8 byte parity with RS 204 196 obtained by shortening RS 255 247 7 22 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 TMCC s basic TS packet 188Byte 2 Information configuration n a K R 8Byte 8Byte The bit allocation of the TMCC s basic information shall conform to table 6 1 1 Table 6 1 1 Bit allocation of the TMCC s basic information bit 0 LSB Byte bit Content Remark 0 7 Reserved Invalid for a TS synthesis device 6 Reserved Invalid for a TS synthesis device 5 Reserved Invalid for a TS synthesis device 4 Buffer reset Buffer reset control This is available in such a case that a consignment broadcaster installs a synchronization device in an uplink center and controls its buffer reset Invalid for a TS synthesis device 3 Start control for emergency Receiver start control signal for emergency warning broadcasting broadcasting During emergency warning broadcasting this is set to 1 for each super frame It is 0 normally 2 Change instruction Used to instruct the change of the content of TMCC information When a change is made this is set to 1 during one super fram
84. input supplements of viewers and not used for another purpose without permission 6 45 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 of the viewer For more detail refer to the section Rules to register customer information to the center server 6 3 7 Rules to read out the shared area Do not leak any information in the shared area for all operators with communication methods such as phone lines without permission of the viewer Do not copy any information in the shared area for all operators to external devices without permission of the viewer 6 3 8 Rules of customer registration change contents Update the registration date time and service ID of the customer registration change contents of each broadcaster only under the following circumstances 1 When a viewer updates information by using information change function of the customer registration change contents 2 When a viewer re inputs information in a field having incorrect information e g a field without registration date time or service ID In case of registering a new customer information when there is no data in the shared area for all operators it is recommended to write information in each field for items prepared in that area such as Hiragana name Hiragana address postal code and phone number It is optional whether or not the information in the shared area for all operators is written into the operator s dedicated area The customer registration chan
85. is utilized in the viewpoint of cost effectiveness In JIS X5060 ISO IEC9979 the algorithms of common cryptosystems are registered Since these algorithms do not guarantee safety of cryptosystem pay attention when selecting one from them Public key cryptosystem This system is also called an asymmetric cryptosystem In this system a key for encryption public key and a key for decryption secret key are different Releasing a public key and managing a secret key secretly allows cipher communication Comparing to a common key much more calculation is required Therefore this system is mainly used to share a common key for a common key cryptosystem Some public key cryptosystems e g RSA have a signature function When using this system as a signature function data to be signed is calculated with a secret key Then a verifier uses a public key to verify a signature result Simple encryption For example there are such encryption methods available as Vernam cipher and a synchronous stream cipher of linear feedback shift register type which uses Maximum length sequence for its random number key generator However since data encrypted by this method has linear form and can be decrypted by a known plaintext attack pay attention when applying this system Vernam cipher is a basic cipher expressed in the Figure 1 1 6 65 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Encrypted message Random number Random number key generator key generat
86. latest mail are stored in the receiver side When the IC card that has different card ID from the one at the time of storing the mail is inserted the display processing of the mail is arbitrarily defined by the receiver For this processing the followings are assumed Example 1 The mail with different card ID is not displayed Example 2 Ifthe mail with different card ID is stored the user will be notified about it even though the mail with different card ID is not displayed Example 3 All of the stored mail is displayed regardless of the inserted card ID Whether to delete already read mail by the user operation is arbitrarily defined by the receiver The retransmission check of the same mail is conducted by using the message ID and the broadcaster identifier listed on the EMM individual message section In order to avoid receiving the deleted mail again it is desirable for the receiver to have a mechanism to prevent the re reception of the same mail by storing the identifications message ID and broadcaster identifier of the mail that has been deleted after its content was checked Moreover the receiver can reset the stored message ID management data such as mail identifications message ID and broadcaster identifier when the IC card with different CA system id from 5 28 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 the one of the IC card previously attached is inserted When the received mail is used as a title approximately the first
87. message code area Description Number of bit alternation detector Alternation check 16 limit_date Expiration date 16 fixed_message ID Fixed phrase message number 16 extra message format version Differential format number 8 extra message length Differential information 16 extra message code length N stuffing Differential information M Stuffing The receiver obtains the EMM individual message information stored in the IC card by the automatic display message information acquisition command response of the IC card at the time of the program selection The receiver must generate one automatic display message information acquisition command from one CA service descriptor The receiver first obtains the fixed phrase message number from the EMM individual message information obtained by the IC card and it receives the corresponding EMM common message Next the receiver adds the differential information in the EMM individual message information to the EMM common message to display it on the screen The differential information may not always exist When displaying the automatic display message the receiver performs the operations described below in accordance with the automatic display duration time 1 2 and 3 listed on the EMM common message main body Automatic display message Displayed Automatic display Automatic display T1 Automatic display duration time 1 message message Not displayed Not displayed T2 Automatic display
88. nee en es 5 21 4 12 4 Notification Function of Viewing History Information Upload Date and Time 077e 5 21 4 12 5 Related Standardseeeeeeeeerereereseseerereererseressereesereresesessesssseserseressereesersereesereerereesseeeesesereerereereerenee 5 22 4 13 Automatic Message Display ee 5 22 4 13 1 Basic Operation EE 5 22 4 13 2 Related ESEG EIS OE EE EE serene eeee es 5 25 4 13 3 Display ee 5 25 4 13 4 Automatic Message Display for Receiver with Storage Function When Replaying Stored Programs sessssesssesssesesessesessnesseseeseeeneseseeneenssneessesseascnsessesscaneaiessencsnsaneessensenssneessessensenenaes 5 26 TEN vd EE 5 27 4 14 1 Ee EE 5 27 4 14 2 Related Standards taen un ee EER See ER EER EE ER a ER EER See ER A ee Re ee ENS ee ER ee ee ee EE A ee ee ees 5 29 4 14 3 Message ID Processing etetett e RR eek EeE eek KERR EER EER eE Re e EER KERR EER ERK EER ee RR ee KEER eek ERGER ee Reen ee ees 5 29 4 15 Parental Control Viewer Age Restriction 1sssttteerestesesieieseeseeeeseeneeneenesneeneeseennenneneeneety 5 31 4 15 1 Tunction Oyetyiew rE r en ee 5 31 4 15 2 Parental Level Minimum Age for Viewing svi eeeesetreseeseeteeeeeeeeeeneeeeeen teen enneenneeneenneenes 5 32 4 15 3 Password NI STE 5 32 4 15 4 Non Restricted Condition iest tiene a ee ee ER ee ER EER ER ER ee Re ee ER ee ee ee ee ee ee ER ee ee Re ee ees ee 5 32 4 15 5 Information Display of Viewing Restricted Programs s setts ER ee eek ER ee GER ee ee GER ee eeR ee Roe Reen 5 32 4 15 6 R
89. not defined NAK is sent 5 3 6 Timeout value and retry out value Table 5 12 shows the timeout value and retry out value on using a collection network Table 5 12 Timeout value and retry out value Tl 30 second Timeout T2 10 second Retry out C1 3 times 5 4 TCP IP communication protocol Level 3 Refer to TR B15 Section II Chapter 6 6 TCP IP communication protocol definition 6 32 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 6 Operation of bi directional communication 6 1 Phone number system and network This section explains envisioned network configuration and phone number system when the BS digital broadcasting starts 6 1 1 Network configuration example Figure 6 1 shows an example of network configuration in a bi directional data broadcasting service that will be available when the BS digital broadcasting starts Bi directional data broadcasting Broadcast access point phone number station other numbers and information Collection network Receiver Recess Relay network A network Relay network B sender t ublic network Relay network n Access point Receiver ADP Mobile phone network PHS network POI Point Of Interface Figure 6 1 Bi directional data broadcasting service network configuration sample 6 1 2 Phone number system Table 6 1 shows the telephone number system as of August 25 1999
90. one touch button function that allows channel selection with a single touch of a button However actual implementation should depend on product planning Note 2 Television broadcasters have not been certified for consignment broadcasting business of radio broadcasting services but the relevant service_ids are shown in square brackets to indicate that other broadcasters cannot use the service_ids in the ranges 7 67 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Note 3 The allocation of service id 908 to BS i Incorporated will be temporarily conducted until service ids reconfiguration in July 2011 8 2 3 broadcaster id list Appendix table 8 2 3 BS digital broadcasting broadcaster id list scheduled start December 1 2007 broadcaster id Consignment Broadcaster 0x01 Japan Broadcasting Corporation 0x02 B S NIPPON CORPORATION 0x03 Asahi Satellite Broadcasting Limited 0x04 BS i Incorporated 0x05 B S Japan Corporation 0x06 Fuji Satellite Broadcasting Inc 0x07 WOWOW INC 0x08 STAR CHANNEL INC 0x09 Not used Note 6 Ox0A World Hi Vision Channel Inc 0x0B Not used Note 4 0x0C WORLD INDEPENDENT NETWORKS JAPAN Inc 0x0D Not used Note 2 OXOE WX24 OXOF The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting 0x10 Not used Note 7 0x11 Not used Note 3 0x12 Not used Note 1 0x13 Not used Note 5 0x14 Nippon BS Broadcasting Corporation
91. only for the caption and the superimposed characters with the component tag value of 0x30 0x3F and the data component of 0x40 0x7F that excludes the default ES group The reason for this is that except for the data ES the digital copy control descriptor in the first loop of the PMT is followed and the video ES and audio ES other than the default ES group are not subject to content protection as applied to the default ES group Additionally when the default ES group is operated with non scrambled the caption and superimposed character components will not be scrambled For the program whose default ES group is free when the chargeable PPV operation is conducted for the ES other than the default ES group scrambling is required for the default ES group to be subject to content protection In this case the default ES group needs to be scrambled with the common broadcaster identifier for right protection provided in 5 4 3 2 in this volume in order to make the viewing possible without customer management If it is scrambled with the broadcaster identifier that is unique for each broadcaster the individual EMM is required beforehand in the same way as the one in the pay broadcasting etc even if it is not chargeable This case should be included in the pay broadcasting No 5 in order to distinguish from the case of No 4 in this table For the free program with content protection See 5 4 3 in this volume the EMM and the EMM message may be transmitted
92. order to prevent any problem When the ES other than the default ES group is operated with charge it should be operated with the broadcaster identifier which is unigue for each broadcaster instead of the common broadcaster identifier for right protection provided in 5 4 3 2 in this volume On digital satellite broadcasting all broadcasters who conduct free programs with content protection should operate with the common broadcaster identifier for right protection described in Volume 8 in this document 5 4 4 Possible Combination of Pay Free Scramble and Non Scramble Programs Table 5 4 2 shows the list of the operational conditions for pay free scrambled and non scrambled programs Moreover Table 5 4 3 describes the possible combinations of scramble and non scramble for the default ES group and the ones other than the default ES group Table 5 4 2 Operation of Pay Program Free Program and Service for Content protection No 1 2 3 4 5 Program type Free program whose default ES Free program with content Pay program group is not subject to content protection protection The default ES group is subject to content protection Classification of pay free program Free Free Free Free Pay Charge added ES x O x O O Free CA_mode 0 0 0 0 1 Content Default ES No protection No protection Protection Protection Protection protection group available available availabl
93. parts that correspond to the conditional access system indicated in the ministerial ordinance As a security module the low speed interface method that uses the IC card in accordance with the ISO7816 electrically Ones that fully complies with the current initial setting command among the IC card commands responses CA system id It is an identifier which indicates an individual conditional access system The identifier in the range of conditional access system shown in Figure A 8 2 The relation between the content protection system that may be adopted in the future and the four concepts described above is illustrated in Figure A 8 2 5 82 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Conditional access system Content protection B25 compliant system system System of CA_ system_ID 0x0005 casel Eg Assumed content protection system case n Figure A 8 2 Positioning of Possible Content Protection System In this document the content protection system which may be designed in the future is classified and assumed into four cases In each case the operational specifications are formulated for the receivers which would have been distributed by the time to be used continuously as much as possible without any problem Case 1 This case is a totally unknown system at this point and it is impossible to prepare for it Also it involves the essential formulation of the ARIB standards and it exceeds the categ
94. payer Using HTTP1 0 subset alternatively Network layer Data link layer Physical layer Advanced function modem Mobile phone circuit switched data PHS Layer V 34 or higher V 42bis PDC 9600bps PIAFS 32kbps or higher Protocol stack Application layer Selected one from HTTP1 0 RFC1945 Telnet FTP NNTP SMTP POP3 DNS and others according to service Transport layer TCP RFC793 UDP RFC768 Network layer IP RFC791 ICMP RFC792 Data link layer PPP RFC1661 1662 IPCP RFC1332 Physical layer Advanced function modem Mobile phone circuit switched data PHS Mobile phone packet switched data V 34 or higher V 42bis PDC 9600bps PIAFS 32kbps or higher PDC P etc 9600bps or higher 6 15 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 3 Detail specification of basic function protocol Specification A This section defines connection between a receiver and a collection network and data transfer sequence in bi directional service data collection by using the collection network that connects the receiver and center Figure 5 2 shows the bi directional data broadcasting service system Collection network Hereafter public network and mobile phone network PHS network collectively mean Public network and others Receiver Center Public network Mobile phone network PHS network Receiv
95. protocol 3 Necessary function for center Prepaid card number management function Function to manage necessary information such as prepaid ID password value etc Sales management function Function to manage information about sales of products product code price data broadcasting program name etc 6 88 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 2 5 2 Home banking Figure 2 5 shows an example of home banking Broadcast station A bank Viewer s Collection network Center Cash card account Receiver Public payment NBA A network etc N center odem etc p B bank Viewer s account Scope of home banking Figure 2 5 Home banking 1 Service outline a Data that is necessary for home banking bank account number bank name etc should be registered on the center in advance according to need b When a viewer of bi directional program requests home banking the center performs two way authentication of the viewer and host c The center connects to the bank of which the viewer has an account via the cash card payment center d The center and the bank of which the viewer has an account take necessary procedures to support the viewer s request based on the home banking requirements that the viewer requests For example if the viewer requests payment fee is charged on the account of the bank B 2 Necessary function for receiver Communication function It is necessary to implement a security function required for home
96. receiver hen the message main body is not defined in the same TS Display the built in message of the receiver when there is no description in the Private_data area Figure 4 22 2 Example of CAAlternative Service Operation and Receiver Processing 4 The transfer confirmation message consists of 80 characters and 160 bytes or less It is also assumed that the maximum of 24 characters per one line and the number of line for display is 6 or less including line break as display specifications 5 When the link descriptor is placed the transfer confirmation screen should be displayed in addition to the message described in the private_data area of the link descriptor or the built in message of the receiver as the example shown below The message displayed here is preinstalled in the receiver and the content should be Do you want to switch to the guide channel The method of displaying frame etc is arbitrarily defined by the receiver An example of transfer confirmation screen is illustrated below 5 44 Note 1 When the CA alternative service function is explained Message example of 2 Private data byte No program video To view this program a contract and a registration are necessary For the detail please contact to the customer center kkkk kkkkkk etc Guide channel switch function should be used Note 2 When there is no description in the Private data byt
97. reference is presented decoding is performed on the hierarchy specified with the guality level If there exists a hierarchy transmission descriptor for the low hierarchy that does not present a reference decoding is always performed A hierarchy transmission descriptor shall always be added to components transmitted with a modulation method other than 8PSK The reference components specified with reference_PID as hierarchical modulation shall be of the same type However for video cross reference between video and audio is possible In a case where no reference is present 0x1 FFF null packet PID shall be written for the referene PID Combinations of hierarchical modulation Table 7 1 2 shows the combinations of hierarchical modulation and their respective examples about handling the descriptor 7 34 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 7 1 2 Examples about handling the descriptor regarding hierarchical modulation High hierarchy Low hierarchy How to handle Relevant example D IV A None Normal broadcasting non hierarchical modulation 2 Vh D Ah D VID Al D Hierarchical modulation with reference Method 1 3 Vh D VID A D Hierarchical modulation with reference For A Method 2 to be always decoded 4 V A D Hierarchical modulation without reference For Method 3 A to be always decoded 5 V A Inhibition 6 A None Normal independent audio broadcasting
98. signal Table 5 7 Host number command and service signal format Item Format Remark Host number command NINSNNANSNNENG CR Echo back 8 digit alphanumeric JIS8 unit code 0 9 A Z a z Characters returned by echo back NiNoN3N4aNsNoN7Ng CRLF Service Connection CR Transmission separator code signal completion CEPET ON BEE LF Line feed code Command error CR LF ERRAINV CR LF A means space 6 22 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Receiver s operation after sending host number command 1 Waiting for remote echo of the sent host number After sending a host number command a receiver transits to the waiting state and waits for remote echo Table 5 8 shows the receiver s operation during waiting for remote echo Table 5 8 Receiver s operation waiting for remote echo Received signal Operation after receiving signal Remote echo that is same as the sent host number Receiving NjN2N3N4aNsNeN7Ng CRLF Back in the previous characters from CRLF comparing only 8 characters Ni Ns and ignoring the 9 character and later Transiting to the service signal waiting state Receiving remote echo MIM MMCRLF different from the sent host number HEHE means a given length of code line with more than O byte except Ni NoN3NaNsNoN7Ns Disconnecting immediately Not receiving CRLF within the defined time period after sending or resending a host number within T1 time at
99. system to restrict program viewing using the combination of parental rate age restriction rate listed as program attribution and parental level minimum age for viewing in the receiver set by the user using a password Parental Level Minimum Age for Viewing Parental level is the information of the minimum age for viewing that is set in the receiver to achieve parental control Password PIN Number Password is a confirmation code used for parental control viewer age restriction and PPV program purchase limit function It consists of a 4 digit number CA Alternative Service CA alternative service is a service that broadcaster provides to direct their viewers to Guide Channel when they select scramble channels that are not in their subscription Conditional Access Conditional access broadcasting is broadcasting that uses Broadcasting conditional access method descriptor In this broadcasting there are pay programs broadcasting that uses EMM messages and free programs with content protection Pay Program Pay program is a program whose default ES group is subject to charge and it is listed as free CA mode l in the SDT and in the EIT Free Program Free program is a program whose default ES group is not subject to charge and it is listed as free CA mode 0 in the SDT and in the EIT Free Program with Content Protection Free program with content protection is a free program sen
100. this method video is transmitted through both the high hierarchy and low hierarchy and audio is transmitted only through the low hierarchy On the low hierarchy switching is performed in terms of video only This way of transmitting audio allows the quality to be maintained even with low CN This method does not cause muting due to switch between the hierarchies However the low hierarchy slot needs enough capacity for transmission of needed audio mode Method 3 Transmission of different components to the individual hierarchies High hierarchy Video Low hierarchy Audio PSI PCR In this method video is transmitted to the high hierarchy and audio is transmitted to the low hierarchy When the low hierarchy is in use reception of only audio can be continued Audio is processed in the same way as method 2 This method does not require components to be switched depending on the hierarchies However descriptors need to be added so that a receiver can recognize component transmission through different hierarchies For actual application method follow 7 1 4 Video to be transmitted through the low hierarchy shall conform 4 1 3 Low hierarchy video format for hierarchical modulation In a case where one TS includes a service with hierarchical modulation conducted and a service without hierarchical modulation conducted the PMT of the latter service can be transmitted through the high hierarchy a service w
101. through operation by a recipient who recognized through notification that the original program is extended 7 44 3 4 5 6 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Start of relay recording When a programmed event which has been set with an event relay is being executed a receiver identifies the event relay through EIT p f When the original event ends and the next target event occurs automatic transition to recording of the target event relay destination event takes place SI operation in terms of recording When the relevant event occurs the event_type of the event_group_descriptor is operated as event relay to automatically switch recording output to the relay destination service for relay recording EIT p f for event relay shall be transmitted at least 30 seconds before the start of the service Also in a case where a temporary service is used it is preferred that corresponding information is sent before and after the service Termination of relay recording For a temporary service a receiver recognizes the end of event relay through disappearance of PMT_PID in the PAT Recording is finished accordingly Notes for the start of relay recording A receiver which supports event relay due to product planning waits for the ES of a relay destination service when the original service s event is ended The change of the service at that time causes the initial portion to be missed This problem shall be dealt with
102. through the TS having the smallest slot number shall be allocated 5 TS synthesis shall be performed using packets that match the number of slots that has been assigned to business companies and that arrive within the frame cycle As for the range of the same modulation method the slot position and service are not necessarily constant However the average TS rate of each service coincides with the rate determined based on the number of slots for TS composition licensed for business companies 6 Up to four types of modulation method per carrier are selectable according to each carrier The decision of the selection method is left as a task for the future 7 Inacase where modulation methods other than TC8PSK are used the allocation of null packets and the setting of the PCR shall be performed in accordance with 2 7 Flame Arrangement Regarding Modulation Mode in Chapter 2 of ARIB STD B20 6 1 2 Dealing with TMCC that violates the regulation In a case where TMCC or the number of TS packets received do not meet the regulation as the result of an error in the transmission line between a consignment broadcaster and an uplink station or a failure on the system of consignment broadcaster the TS synthesis device deals with as below Therefore broadcasting signals do not present contradiction in terms of TMCC and frame composition and other TSs that share a single repeater are not adversely affected For a receiver basically TMCC proble
103. to sender s encoders 3 Delay attributing to multiplexing eguipment 4 Delay attributing to a receiver decoder The total amount of delay is assumed to be about 1 second but it differs depending on the factors such as broadcasters eguipment and parameter setting To minimize the time difference with terrestrial broadcasting individual broadcasters shall identify their absolute delay time 7 7 2 Event issue start end etc time Regarding issue of all events broadcasting operation the intra station clock terrestrial system shall be followed by a sender so that link with a terrestrial system is allowed An event shall not be transmitted beforehand due to consideration of absolute delay time 7 7 3 Time ticker and time tone In a case where time ticker or time tone is to be provided it is preferred that absolute delay time is considered and preceding transmission is performed by a sender so that the difference with the correct time is minimized on a receiver 7 7 4 Effective screen area area in which time tickers can be displayed The range of the effective screen area shall be determined with the 1035 monitor taken into account 7 7 5 Handling daylight saving time Daylight saving time shall be handled through the control of offset time with the TOT That is the value of UTC 9 hours shall always be employed and during implementation of daylight saving time Local_time_offset_descriptor with offset time written shall be
104. transmitted through the TOT The change of a station system clock shall depend on individual stations 7 48 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 8 Subtitles and Superimposed charcters 7 8 1 General 1 Two kinds of services shall be provided subtitles that relate to the program contents and superimposed characters such as breaking news 2 The subtitle display area effective screen area shall conform to the one presented in 7 7 4 3 For character type font size and color transmission shall be performed with the restrictions on the display capability of receivers into consideration 7 8 2 Subtitle 1 Subtitles shall be transmitted with the independent PES method and synchronization with program contents shall be implemented 2 Subtitles shall be displayed when the display is selected by a receiver 3 Up to two languages shall be supported and transmission shall be performed within a single ES 4 Basically placement in the PMT in the unit of an event shall be conducted but it is also possible to make the PMT always be written For handling in terms of multi view refer to 5 2 5 2 7 8 3 Superimposed characters 1 Superimposed characters shall be transmitted with the independent PES method and shall be operated without synchronization with program contents They shall be transmitted in the automatic display mode and be automatically displayed at a receiver side In a case where such a setting has been made on a
105. up Because the SDT has longer transmission cycle than the PMT it is expected that it takes time to receive the SDT to check the link descriptor and to display the transfer confirmation screen Therefore once the relevant service is selected the operation to switch to the transfer confirmation screen can be performed a moment after the non contractual message built in the receiver is displayed In order to avoid the repetition of such operation every time a program selected it is desirable that the receiver caches the SDT in the RAM and the transfer confirmation screen is displayed immediately after selecting the relevant service As a guide for caching the messages of CA alternative service sent simultaneously on digital satellite broadcasting should be 20 types and the message number for CA alternative should be from 21 to 40 0x15 0x28 If the other number is sent for CA alternative message number the receiver voids the message and displays its built in message as an exceptional processing Once the completion processing after transferring to the link service by the CA alternative service is ended the condition that the link service is being selected remains instead of returning to the link source service Moreover when the link service is an audio service or a video service without data components the condition that the link service is being selected also remains instead of returning to the link source service It is moved to the o
106. utilize this Technical Report willingly ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table of Contents Part 1 Operational Guidelines for BS Digital Broadcasting Volume Volume 2 Volume 3 Volume 4 Volume 5 Volume 6 Volume 7 Volume 8 BS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Downloading reses Fascicle 1 Functional Specifications for BS Digital Receivers ese esse ese esse ee ee ee ee ese ee ee ee Fascicle 1 BS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Data Broadcasting Fascicle 1 BS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for PSI SI ee eers ese seer ee Fascicle 2 BS Digital Broadcasting Specifications and Operational Guidelines for Conditional Access System CAS Receivers EE EE EE OE EE ie Fascicle 3 BS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Bi directional Communication ETE RE EE AE EE EE EA vies Fascicle 3 BS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Transmission ree ere Fascicle 3 BS Digital Broadcasting Guidelines for Contents Protection res ee ese ese Fascicle 3 Part 2 Operational Guidelines for Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting and Functional Specifications for BS Broadband CS Combined Digital Receivers Volume 1 Volume 2 Volume 3 Volume 4 Volume 5 Volume 6 Volume 7 Volume 8 Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Downloading Fascicle 4 Functional Specifications for BS Broadband CS Combined Dig
107. warning broadcasting itself in order to notify EWS supporting receivers of the end of emergency warning broadcasting 7 26 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 6 3 1 PMT to be written with emergency information descriptors PMT of broadcasting other than PMT of emergency warning emergency warning one broadcasting Writing emergency Arbitrary Mandatory information descriptors 6 3 4 Multiplexing timing and writing period of emergency information descriptors The timing for writing and deleting emergency information descriptors to from the PMT does not necessarily coincide with the TMCC start bit On Off timing because more than one broadcaster may conduct emergency warning broadcasting at different timing as shown in figure 6 3 3 When emergency warning broadcasting is finished the relevant descriptor shall be deleted from the PMT Timing for deleting the emergency information descriptor from the PMT Broadcaster A Broadcaster B TMCC start bit Time Figure 6 3 3 TMCC start bit On Off and timing for writing and deleting the emergency information descriptor 6 3 5 Signal operation for emergency warning test broadcasting For emergency warning test broadcasting operation shall be performed with the emergency information descriptor s start_end flag value processed as 0 at the end signal side from the beginning During test broadcasting the PMT shall always include the relevant descriptor When t
108. with the smallest slot number assigned to the broadcaster included in the TS The value shall be the same as the relative TS number in the TMCC signal However in a case where the TS having the smallest relative TS number is moved to another repeater or eliminated as the result of reconfiguration the remaining relative TS numbers shall be shifted forward so that it is possible to allocate the previous values of bit 2 0 7 50 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Also note that 0x0000 and OxFFFF shall not be allocated as transport stream ids In such a case that the repeater which transmits a TS is changed in the future the ID shall be changed in accordance with the rule above but the ID Ox40f1 and 0x40f2 of the default TS needed for making initial settings on a receiver shall not be changed Note 4 Note 1 The use of channel 9 will be started on December 1 2007 Note 2 For channels 5 7 and 11 the use for digital broadcasting is assumed as the result of the end of analog broadcasting Note 3 Bit 8 shall be 0 However in a case where a channel is further added and it is operated with the same network_id bit 8 shall be 1 and shall indicate a channel number together with bit 7 4 Note 4 It is desirable that the ID of the default TS needed for making initial settings on a receiver is standardized and presented in the TR 8 1 2 Guidelines for allocating the service IDs service_id of th
109. 000000 900000000000000000 900000000000000000 000000000000000000 00000000000000000 000000000000000000 900000000000000000 900000000000000000 900000000000000000 000000000000000000 900000000000000000 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 5 68 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 11 CA Contract Information Descriptor Please refer to 4 7 2 PPV in Chapter 4 in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Please refer to 20 3 Settings of Viewing Record Reservation Confirmation Information in Volume 4 in this document for the operation of CA contract information descriptor The Fee name of the CA contract information descriptor used for PPV program is a mandatory The Fee name of the CA contract information descriptor for contractual programs such as flat tier will not be used The amount information will not be specified in the fee name in order to avoid user confusion since the fee is separately shown in the IC card response based on the contract confirmation information 5 12 Message ID 5 12 1 Operation The recycle of message ID is stipulated The messages which the broadcaster can send simultaneously the number of mail N pieces The message ID recycling period of the broadcaster M or more days The one message sending period of the broadcaster Within L days Tt is assumed on the receiver side that the message mail sending ends in sequence from the message
110. 10 characters are used Although the mail display is arbitrarily defined by the receiver displaying it in the center of the screen with the size that the user can easily read is desirable 4 14 2 Related Standards Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 4 4 2 9 Mail Display Chapter 4 4 6 Display of EMM Message 2 Mail Display Reference 2 3 11 Reception of EMM and EMM Message However the reception by power on control should be supported for 3 11 2 Different forms of EMM and EMM message reception in Reference 2 in Part 1 4 14 3 Message ID Processing The receiver prepares 7 storage areas for the message ID and the reception time for each broadcaster 7 areas are reserved area of 2N 1 N the number of the message mail which the broadcaster can receive at the same time For the area where 14 days has passed since the reception time the contents will be deleted as ending the send period When all of 7 areas are filled with information and the 8th new message mail is received the message ID and the reception time will be overwritten on the area that has the oldest time The examples of the sending period and the receiver operation are illustrated below 5 29 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Message ID 101 Sending period 4 Message ID 102 Sending petiod Bl Message ID 103 Sending period 2 E Message ID 104 Sending period 1 i Bobs Mess
111. 11 Copy Control for Pay Broadcasting in this volume When the receiver equips functions such as the PPV monthly purchase limit and the single program purchase limit the predetermined operation should be performed at the time of PPV purchase Even if the video components whose service type is not digital do not exist the PPV with program based charge can be operated The PPV mentioned here means an operational form with charge despite of its service type When program viewing is interrupted during the preview status by the menu or the parental control etc the IC card recognizes it as the middle of the preview status if the ECM is being sent continuously to the IC card Thus this should be considered at the time of designing The viewing fee and the recording fee can be obtained by the PPV status request and the contract confirmation commands responses The recording fee mentioned here means the viewing fee that includes the fee for recording in the case of purchasing a recordable program 5 12 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 On the purchase screen of recordable PPV the viewing fee and the recording fee should be shown clearly At the time of issuing PPV purchase command the request of recordable program purchase should be correctly issued 4 10 2 Related Standards Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 4 4 2 3 3 PPV Viewing Processing Reference 2 3 15 6 PPV viewing proces
112. 2 respectively while Main is used as the overall channel In this case the overall channel is selected when broadcasting is started but switching by audience is possible according to each program 7 4 2 Requirements for MVTV 1 Among multiple SDTVs distinction shall be clearly provided between Main one and Subs the others 2 When MVTV is started Main shall always be selected When it is ended Main shall be automatically restored 3 Basic attributes such as the video mode of MVTV components shall be the same 4 All services shall be recordable with a digital VTR but it is all right that only Main is recordable with an analog VTR 5 Itis not mandatory to equip a function that displays multiple SDTVs simultaneously 6 For MVTV processing in the unit of event is assumed Start and end in the middle of an event shall not be performed 7 For hierarchical modulation operation using low hierarchy components that correspond to Main shall be possible 7 4 3 MVTV operation method Operation with 1service id and multiple ES method is assumed lt Operation requirements gt 1 For MVTV the component group descriptor of component_group_type 000 shall always be placed in EIT p f The component configuration of Main and Sub s is identified with the component_group_ descriptor 2 The ES with the default ES s component tag value assigned shall be placed in Main The tag value shall be written in the loop of component_gro
113. 3 EWS Operation The 4 bit operation of the extension area shall conform to the description in 6 4 Site Diversity Operation 7 24 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 2 6 Extension information The extension information field shall not be used for the time being A receiver shall be inhibited from using this field on its own 6 3 Emergency Warning Broadcasting EWS Operation 6 3 1 EWS transmission Each consignment broadcaster can start and end EWS independently The following procedures should be followed to start and end EWS When starting 1 Each consignment broadcaster transmits such information TMCC s basic information to uplink stations that causes the TMCC s start control bit to be set to 1 2 Emergency warning descriptors with EWS conditions set are transmitted with the PMT the EWS conditions include start_end_flag 1st class 2nd class identification and local codes 3 For uplink stations the TMCC s start control bit is set to 1 based on the TMCC s basic information 4 Broadcasting is started using contents that are recognizable as emergency warning broadcasting When ending 1 Such TMCC s basic information is transmitted that causes the start control bit to be kept as 0 2 The emergency warning descriptors are deleted from the PMT 3 For uplink stations the TMCC s start control bit is set to 0 For information about implementation of EWS by consignment broadcasters the TMCC
114. 3ch shall have different service IDs and the individual channels shall be independent For service IDs seguential numbers shall be assigned 3 Ina case where such a relation as the main program and sub program exists within multiple SDTV and a single ID is used for operation follow the standard provided in 7 4 Multi view TV 7 2 2 HDTV operation with three service IDs Such an operation is possible that one group of HDTV components are specified with three service IDs For details refer to Chapter 17 Sharing Events in Part 1 Volume 4 BS Digital Broadcasting PSI SI Operation Standard 7 2 3 Operation at the sender side regarding video format switching 1 In a case where different video formats are switched with the same service ID it is preferred that seamless switching is possible For the operation method follow the standard provided in Chapter 4 Seamless Switching of Appendix of Part 1 of ARIB STD B32 2 When the video format is switched such an effective procedure shall be implemented by a sender as fading operation and still picture or black screen insertion so that clumsy appearance is eased 7 3 Temporary Scheduling 7 3 1 Service overview In a case where a service to which service id cannot be always applied is to be provided in parallel with a channel normally scheduled its broadcasting can be performed using a temporally scheduled channel that is temporarily available One concrete application ex
115. 49 110 06Dh 111 06Eh Note 5 7 71 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 112 J06Fh 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 Note 2 113 070h 114 071h 115 072h 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 Note 7 116 073h 117 074h 118 075h 990 998 999 Note 10 119 076h 991 992 993 120 077h 994 995 121 078h 996 997 122 079h 935 Note 9 123 07Ah 936 Note 1 This logo ID has been replaced with a transparent logo by a television broadcaster following the discontinuity of VHF broadcasting business Note 2 This logo ID had been allocated to Media Serve Inc business discontinued on November 30 2004 Note 3 This logo ID had been allocated to Music Bird Co Ltd business discontinued on November 30 2004 04Eh Note 4 This logo ID had been allocated to Megaport Broadcasting Inc business discontinued on September 30 2005 Note 5 This logo ID had been allocated to Nippon Data Broadcasting business discontinued on September 30 2005 Note 6 This logo ID had been allocated to JFN Satellite Broadcasting business discontinued on November 30 2005 054h 057h Note 7 This logo ID had been allocated to Japan MediArk Co Ltd business discontinued on November 30 2005 Note 8 This logo ID had been allocated to BS Communications Corporation business discontinued o
116. 599 where 300 to 399 are allocated to audio dedicated broadcasters and are not subjected to transition to the television field 7 51 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 3 Data services are allocated three digit values 600 to 999 where 900 to 999 are allocated to data dedicated broadcasters and are not subjected to transition to the television or audio field In a case where ID shortage occurs 001 to 099 also are allocated 4 Considering the future increase of services 10 service_ids shall be allocated according to each service as IDs that can be used by individual broadcasters independently A total of 30 service_ids will be available to television broadcasters 10 for television radio and data respectively A total of 20 service_ids will be available to VHF broadcasters 10 for radio and data respectively 10 data service_ids will be available to data broadcasters The total number of service_ids shall not exceed 200 In a case where this number may be exceeded the number of IDs shall be adjusted among consignment broadcasters 5 For 16 bit service id a 3 digit decimal number shall be allocated to 16 bits as a binary number 7 52 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Television service Radio service Data service N S id 100 S id 101 S id 102 S id 110 S id 111 S id 112
117. 6 5 2 No More Copies The content stored as No more copies must not be copied except for the move function specified in section 6 5 4 of this volume When the content stored as No more copies is output by being played the high speed digital interface must first perform the operation for No more copies which is specified by DTCP before output That is DTCP_CCI in DTCP descriptor and DTCP CCI audio in DTCP_audio_descriptor are set to No more copies and the content is encrypted to output For the analog video output the content whose APS control data is other than 00 is handled as Copy never and the output control shown in Table 6 1 for the case where digital redording control data is 11 must be applied before output 6 5 3 Retention When the digital copy descriptor digital recording control data is 11 so that the content is specified as Copy never the content can be temporarily retained for the permitted period When the retention duration exceeds the permitted period the content must be rendered unusable The content must be rendered unusable generally within one minute after the permitted retention period elapsed Also the content must be rendered unusable within an appropriate period after an event occurs so that the accurate time management is not possible for example when the power supply for the device is shut down Section 8 3 2 of this volume provides additional explanation on rendering
118. 8 43 B 2 6 Requirement for Installing Content Protection for Recordable Media CPRM SD Video 8 44 B 2 7 Requirement for Installing Video Content Protection System VCPS critter etree 8 46 B 2 8 Requirement for Installing MagicGate Type R for Secure Video Recording MG R SVR for EMPRovvsrsseeesesesesseeesesesesseseseseeetseeseeseneneneneneeeeeeseesnseeasaneneneneaenseereeatecacasasanens 8 48 B 2 9 Requirement for Installing Security Architecture for Intelligent Attachment Device GIE EE 8 49 B 2 10 Requirement for Installing Advanced Access Content System AACS HD DVD ee 8 52 B 2 11 Requirement for Installing Advanced Access Content System AACS Blu ray Disc 8 54 iii ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 This page is intentionally left blank jv ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 1 Foreword Content protection for BS digital broadcasting follows the rules described from Volume 1 to Volume 7 in Part 1 of this document and the following standards issued by Association Radio Industries and Businesses hereafter referred to as ARIB Service Information for Digital Broadcasting System ARIB STD B10 and Receiver for Digital Broadcasting ARIB STD B21 For actual implementation of the rules however the detailed specifications are reguired and all the broadcasters and receiver manufacturers shall have the common understanding of the content protection system To satisfy these requirements this volume Content P
119. ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 ARIB ENGLISH TRANSLATION OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL SATELLITE BROADCASTING ARIB TECHNICAL REPORT ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 Fascicle 3 Established on October 26th 1999 Revised on March 29th 2000 Version 1 1 Revised on May 31st 2001 Version 1 2 Revised on July 27th 2001 Version 2 0 Revised on January 24th 2002 Version 2 1 Revised on March 28th 2002 Version 2 2 Revised on July 25th 2002 Version 2 3 Revised on September 26th 2002 Version 2 4 Revised on March 26th 2003 Version 2 5 Revised on June 5th 2003 Version 2 6 Revised on July 29th 2003 Version 2 7 Revised on October 16th 2003 Version 2 8 Revised on February 5th 2004 Version 2 9 Revised on July 22nd 2004 Version 3 0 Revised on September 28th 2004 Version 3 1 Revised on December 14th 2004 Version 3 2 Revised on March 24th 2005 Version 3 3 Revised on September 29th 2005 Version 3 4 Revised on November 30 th 2005 Version 3 5 Revised on March 14th 2006 Version 3 6 Revised on May 29th 2006 Version 3 7 Revised on September 28th 2006 Version 3 8 Revised on December 12th 2006 Version 3 9 Revised on May 29th 2007 Version 4 0 Revised on September 26th 2007 Version 4 1 Association of Radio Industries and Businesses General Notes to the English translation of ARIB Standards and Technical Reports 1 The copyright of this document is ascribed to the Association of Radio Industries and Businesses ARIB 2
120. Allocation for Each Broadcaster EE SERE N Ge ee E E A ose GE le De 7 63 Appendix List of the identifiers to be used when BS 9 ch digital broadcasting is started on December 200 Pastas ete AE DE eases ies ata DE De case ae N GR EE 7 66 sos Ter ti fee Lad Stes eee ae asec es ee ae a Deets as aes teased sg Lala es Mae E 7 66 TEER MI 7 66 8 2 2 Service id EE 7 67 8 2 3 broadcaster _id EE 7 68 8 2 4 Logo ID listssssssessesisesieeiees esses tessessieseessesseeseessessiesecseeeseesecasessiesesesseesecseesieeneaesnestan 7 69 83 Listof Slot Allocation for Each Broadcaster eiee te eer ee eer ee ees ee Rees ees ee Ee ee Ee eek ee Re Ee ee ee ee ese ee 7 73 jv ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 1 Overview This volume lays down the standards about the operation and transmission regarding BS digital broadcasting to be conducted by broadcasters It is desirable that BS digital broadcasters conduct broadcasting in accordance with these standards BS digital broadcasting receivers shall be capable of dealing with signals transmitted in accordance with the standards in the way that has been assumed regarding operations In a case where not all the standards are satisfied for transmission due to incomplete facility preparation by broadcasters receivers may not deal with signals as expected by senders 2 Applied Documents The documents relating to this volume are listed below ARIB standards ARIB STD B20 Transmission System for Digital Satellite Broadcast
121. C8PSK and null packets are transmitted 6 1 3 Dealing with broadcasting break periods There are cases where break status is notified by a broadcasting station through PSI SI operation and where broadcasting is halted due to the maintenance of a transmitter or any other reason This subsection describes how to deal with broadcasting break for which PSI SI cannot be transmitted 1 In a case where TSs to be transmitted do not arrive at a uplink station due to any reason such as the maintenance of the transmission facility of a consignment broadcaster the TS synthesis device shall process relevant TSs slots allocated as null packets and shall perform TC8PSK transmission The same operation as of line disconnection described earlier shall take place 2 An uplink station shall not generate PSI SI or other signals that allow a receiver to recognize broadcasting break 6 1 4 Method for transmitting TMCC s basic information A TS synthesis device generates TMCC to be multiplexed onto broadcasting waves using TSs sent from a consignment broadcaster to an uplink center and the TMCC s basic information relating to the TSs It is also possible to alter the transmission parameters by changing these information The method for transmitting the TMCC s basic information is concluded in Chapter 2 Annex3 in the appendix of ARIB STD B20 This subsection introduces one instance of its concrete methods 1 Transmission method The TMCC s basic
122. DEFGHJ K lt 10 gt lt 11 gt 2 Caller ID notification number lt 3 gt OABODEFGHJ K lt 10 gt lt 11 gt 3 Caller ID notification number lt 3 gt Carrier ID number lt 7 gt SC lt arbitrary gt Note Sometimes are unnecessary lt gt Maximum digit length as of September 1999 6 1 4 Phone numbers necessary for calling and their classification In order to originating a call a special number mentioned above carrier ID number and outside line capture number are necessary In this section phone numbers that are necessary to originate a call are classified as shown in Table 6 2 for convenience With this classification phone numbers that are necessary to originate a call are expressed as shown in Figure 6 2 6 34 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Table 6 2 Class of phone numbers that are necessary to originate a call Class Class of table Definition Calling number of outside line Number added at the top of phone wane from PBX number such as an outside line Outside line capture OE EE ainber capture number which is unique to each telephone terminal and necessary for calling Caller ID notification number Number for selecting an additional Special number Fixed preferred connection service function cancellation number Carrier ID number Number added to a general phone Carrier ID number number for selecting a carrier to be connected Fundamental phone General number Fundamental
123. E EE EER EE EE EE Ee EE ER EE Ee Ee Ee Ee ee EE ee ee ee ee ee ee ees 6 55 7 1 2 Information protection Ee EO rere rere rere rere reer errr eee eee 6 57 7 1 3 Tamper resistance idees lee EE EE EE EE 6 58 7 1 4 Signature idees oek EE EE EE OE EG 6 58 7 2 Operation of TLS1 0 and SSL3 0 Level 3 Ee 6 60 8 Congestion AVOIGAN CEs trrret etter erect ee et eee EE ease eens eenensneaeensnea eee ne eeeeneneneeereeeeeneneeeees 6 60 8 1 Congestion al Ie DEE EE EE EE EE EG 6 60 8 2 Congestion measure at broadcast station ese see see ee EE EE EE EER EE EE GR ee ects te EE teeta ee ee cree ee ee ee ee ee ee 6 60 8 2 1 Call delay EE errreeee errr errr eeeeerererere eee erree errr reer rere eee eer errreeeee rere reer rere rriiey 6 60 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 2 2 OES EE EE ER EE EE IG 6 61 8 2 3 Notification of call delay and call restriction Specification Bl reer ere ses ese ee eee 6 61 8 2 4 Usage Of NETWOLK doele RE EE EE EG 6 62 8 2 5 Prior information Service fOr Carriers rete Ee EE eee ee Ee ER ee GR Ee ee Ee Ee Re ee Ee ee ee see 6 62 8 3 Congestion measure carrier etre rete eee EE Ee EE EE ee Ee Ee EER seen ee GR ee GE Ee cess nsec eats tere ee EE ee ee ees ee ee ees ee 6 62 8 3 1 Decentralization of access points Ee 6 62 8 3 2 Number of lines at access point ee 6 62 8 4 Receiver function Specification A EE eee eT Eee eee eee ee reer eee rere rere eee eT Tee eee errr ee eee errr errr rere errr er eees 6 62 8 5 Congestio
124. E EE EER ER Ee ee Ee Ee ee ee ee ee 6 45 6 3 7 Rules to read out the shared area ese see etre EE EE eset ec EE EER eee ER Ee eens Ee EE ee EE ee ee ee ee ee ees ee ee ees 6 46 6 3 8 Rules of customer registration change TEE EE EE EE 6 46 6 3 9 Rules to register customer information in the center seryercovevevevevevevnnnnnnnnrens 6 47 6 4 Recommended receiver function se see ses EE EE t EER eect Ee tees GR ee ee Ee ee eee ee Ee eens ee ee ee Ee ee ee ees ens 6 48 6 4 1 Information managed by receiver Specification 7 EE EE EE EE Ee 6 48 6 4 2 Number addition function Specification A ee 6 49 6 4 3 Call function Specification Al eseeesesesososcosesoscssosesesoscccsesesocescesesoocssosesssosessesssoscsoesesoscssesesssosseseseeo 6 50 6 4 4 Call disabling function Specification RE EE EE EE EE EG 6 51 6 4 5 Operation of viewer setting information Level 3 EE eee reer errr eee eer reer errr sere 6 51 6 4 6 Operation of display at the time of calling Level 3 EE errr reer errr errr e rere ere 6 52 6 4 7 Operation of ISP connection information Level 3 ee 6 52 6 4 8 Operation of registered call Level 3 ee 6 52 6 4 9 Guideline for transmission error Level 3 EE errr rere reer rere eee eee reer rere re 6 53 6 5 Detail of phone number processing EE ee 6 54 7 Security ee 6 55 7 1 Security functions reguired for bi directional Service sr see see Ee EE EE Ee EER EE Ee Ee Ee ER ee ee Ee tees ee see 6 55 7 1 1 Simple two way authentication function ee Ee Ee E
125. E ETE EA RES 8 1 Definition of Terms RE EE EE EER EE RR OE EE 8 2 Transmission Operation Rules RE EE EE EE BOK EE EE HE vaio 8 3 5 1 Definition of Scramble and Non scramble AE ET RE IE TE 8 3 5 2 Pay Program and Free Program RE EE EE NE EE ES IE siele e s 8 3 5 2 1 Definition RE EE ER OR DE EE ER NN 8 3 5 29 Operation ER RE EA a ER EE RE EE N 8 4 5 3 Protected Free Program TE DER ER clo A EE ER N cle elaieie N ER ER EE clase 8 5 5 3 1 Definition ME ES ER EE OR N N OE EE N EE OR EE TE N EE OE ET 8 5 5 3 2 Operation EER EE HE OE ER EE EE ER N EE A OR EO HA 8 6 5 4 Operation Rules for Content Protection EE EE EE EE EE EE N 8 7 5 4 1 Transmission Operation Rules OR RE RE ER EE ER ON N 8 7 5 4 2 Details of Transmission Operation RE EE EE ER EE dees 8 7 Functional Reguirement for the Receiver DE EE EE EE EE EO See 8 12 6 1 Subject Devices EE ER EE EE EE RE EO EE EE EO EO TETO ETTET ETTI TIT 8 12 6 2 Functions for Controlling Copying and Availability Bd eles Sab vies Sse ee EE ee NES Sos EO Sees voles EE 58s 8 12 6 3 Output Control EE ER EE EE OE EE EO EE EE e vase Ses 8 12 6 3 1 Functional Requirement for Output TE EE TE EE ER EE 8 12 6 3 2 Output Control by the Digital Copy Control Descriptor and Content Availability DER EG 8 13 6 3 3 Output Control by the Output Protection Bits e seke ER Se te Re ER Se Ge ee ER ee ee ee eke ees 8 16 6 4 Functional Restriction Regarding Internet Retransmission serene eee 8 16 6 5 Storage of the Content
126. EC International Electrotechnical Commission IP IP Internet Protocol RFC791 is a protocol in the network layer which defines the Internet addressing mechanism and operates the data delivery process IPCP IPCP IP Control Protocol RFC1332 is a protocol to set up various configurations that are necessary for using IP in the PPP network phase ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ISO International Organization for Standardization ISP ISP Internet Service Provider is an operator providing various contents services on the Internet MAC MAC Message Authentication Code is a code to confirm that message text has been sent to a receiver without any interpolation or transmission error MNP4 The error correction method for modem communication MSB Most Significant Bit Maximum length sequence Sequence of numbers with comparably long cycle used for generating simple pseudorandom numbers NNTP NMTP Network News Transfer Protocol RFC977 is a protocol in the application layer used to distribute post and acquire NetNews on the Internet 6 3 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 PDC PDC Personal Digital Cellular is a digital mobile or cellular telephone system which allows 9600bps data communication PDC P PDC P Personal Digital Cellular Packet is a communication method based on PDC packet exchange which allows 9600bps 28800bps data communication PIAFS PIAFS PHS Internet Access Forum Standard is a
127. EER ERGE KEER eke R EER ERK eR GER ee R ee GER ee Ree eek ER ee KERR ee ees ee ee Roes 6 12 1 Bi directional communication and transmission phase seer eer ee eek ERK EER EER ER ees REK ess Re e Re 6 12 5 2 Transmission phase and protocol stack Ek ER EE ER FREE EER ER EER ten eseteeeneeneeeenneneeeeaneneenseneaeeneens 6 12 5 2 1 Line connection disconnection phase terre Rek EER EER R EER EER ER EER EER EE KERR ERGE EER ER ee ReER ER ER eek ees ee ees 6 12 5 2 2 Link establishment termination phaser treer eek EER ER EER EER ER ER GER GE ERK ERGE KEER ER ee KEER ER Roe Rees ee ees 6 13 5 2 3 Protocol in data transfer phase terte treer ee EER ER EER Rek EER EER ERGER EER ER eeR GER ER eR GER ee KEER ER ee ReER ER ee eek ees ee ees 6 13 5 3 Detail specification of basic function protocol Specification Als EE EER EE EE ER ee ese ee 6 16 5 3 1 Protocol conditions ee EER ee ee ee Ee ee Ee EE RA AA ERA Gee RR ee ee ER Re ee ee RR Re ee ee Re ee ee ee ee 6 16 5 3 2 Transmission conditions tree Ee ee cere ee Ee ee EA EE RA EE ERA GEE Re ee ER Re ee ee RR Bee ee RR Re ee ee Re ee dee 6 16 5 3 3 Connection and disconnection seguence treer tee EER ER EER EER ER EER EER ER eR EER GER eeR ER eeReER ER ER eek ees ee ees 6 18 5 3 4 Data ET EE EE EE 6 25 EAST TOET EE cece eeeeeceeeeeeeceeseeeecessaceecessaeeeceseaeesssseeeesssseecesseneeceeseaeeceeseaneeeeseateeeenes 6 31 5 3 6 Timeout value and retry out value tiete eek tese eek ees ee ee R EER ee eek ERGE
128. ERK ER ee Roe KERR GER Gee eek GER ee ee RR ee sees 6 32 5 4 TCP IP communication protocol Level 3 erect tsetse EER ER eR tenses GER ee Roe Reese Roe Reen 6 32 6 Operation of bi directional communication treer FREE EER FREE REK ER ER eER ER R GER EER est GER ER eeR GER ER eR ee Rees ee ee Rees 6 33 6 1 Phone number system and network svete SeSe ER Se SeSe Geek ee Ge Rek ee ee eek ER ee ee ee eek ee ee ee ees 6 33 6 1 1 Network configuration example eetet EER R SEER ee RR eER Rae RR RRRGeR RR GER RK ER RR Ge RR ReeR Roe RR ee ERK R Rees 6 33 6 1 2 Phone number EE EE EE 6 33 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 1 3 Calling order and digit length of special Ia EE OE EE 6 34 6 1 4 Phone numbers necessary for calling and their classification tte ere ee ee esse see 6 34 6 2 Phone number selection process RE EE RE sees sees eeesesesaeeeeeee ene 6 35 6 3 Operation of broadcast station Specification Al sss ees eeese REF ROER EER GE RR es ER Roe Roe R ee Roe 6 37 6 3 1 Conditions to send phone number EE EE EE OE EE EG 6 37 6 3 2 Application delete EE EE EE EE EG 6 37 6 3 3 Information which application should Store sss rrrrere etree et EE EE EE 6 40 6 3 4 Information for host connection Level 3 EE ee ere 6 41 6 3 5 Operation of shared area in receiver NVRAM Ere es esse ee se see see ee ee Ee Ee Ee ee EE ee ee GR ee ee Ee ee see see 6 41 6 3 6 Operation rules concerning writing in the Shared area ee ee EE EER ER ER E
129. ES This subsection defines the default ESs to be chosen when a service is selected by a receiver The values of the component tags to be given to ESs have been defined in 14 2 Allocation of component tag values in Chapter 14 of Part 1 Volume 4 BS Digital Broadcasting PSI SI Operation Regulations The regulations present the following definition of the default ES for each stream type based on the component tag values written in the stream identification descriptors arranged in the PMT O Video stream ES whose component tag value is 0x00 O Audio stream ES whose component tag value is 0x10 O Subtitle stream ES whose component tag value is 0x30 O Ticker stream ES whose component tag value is 0x38 O Data broadcasting program ES whose component tag value is 0x40 For multiview television refer to section 7 4 in this document ESs are grouped by component_group_descriptor Those groups are called component groups The default ES for each component group is defined as follows Regarding component_tags written in individual component groups the ES having the smallest component_tag value for each stream type is defined as the default ES of the relevant component group When an MVTV s event is chosen the component group to be selected first is the one set as component group id 0x0 with component group descriptor and this default ES is used as the default ES of the entire event In a case where component group
130. Ee Ee ee ee ee ee ee EE ee ee ee se 8 20 1 2 Detailed Installation Standard ese se se ee EE EE EE EE EE EE EE Ee Ee EE ER GR ER ER GEE EE Ee Ee Ee Ee ee ee ee ER ER ee RE Ee ee se ee ee ee 8 20 7 2 1 ST TIES II EE EE EG 8 20 TYD Output of the ONSE EE EE EE roe 8 21 7 23 Storing the ONUS TE EE RE EE EG 8 21 7 2 4 Local encryption EE ee eee eee eee eer ere rere eee eee rere rere eee eee eee eee rarer ere rere eee ere rer erere reer eee rere rer er errr errr res 8 21 7 2 5 Control Signals for the Conditional Access Broadcasting System vvveveveneveneesenns 8 22 8 Additional Explanation ee 8 23 8 1 Protected Free Program EE eee eee eT eee reer ere rere eee eee rer ere rere rere rere rer ere rere Tee reer erer errr errr Terre er er erer ery 8 23 8 1 1 Implementation of the Protected Free Program ee 8 23 8 1 2 Exceptional Operation before Implementation EE ee rer errr eee ee eee ere rer ere rer eee Tere rarer ererery 8 23 8 2 Functional Restriction for the Content Protection rr esse Ee et Ee nsec eee ER ee EE Ee ee se ee ee ee 8 24 8 3 Storage Of the OU SEE EE 8 24 8 3 1 Copy Control Information in the Record Media ees EE EE EE et Ee tees ee eet eect EE EE Ee tees ee ee ee ee 8 24 8 3 2 Rendering the Content Unusable vorrrrrrrrerrrrerere etre ee EE ect EE EE EE EE EE EE Ee Ee ee ee GR ER ER EE EE EER ee ek ER ee ee ee se ee 8 24 8 4 Functional Restriction Regarding Internet Retransmission ees esse EE rere ee Ee este eee ER ER ee ee se ee 8 25 8 5 Deta
131. Minimum Age for Viewing The parental level of program should be the age of rating 3 The rating is a value between 0x01 and 0x11 As an exceptional processing when a value of 0x12 OxFF is specified for the rating age restriction rate it should be a restricted object regardless of the setting value of parental level the minimum age for viewing unless the setting value of parental level set in the receiver is no restriction without condition or unless the parental control is set not to use as mentioned above The value to be set in the receiver can be between age 4 0x01 and age 20 0x11 and it can be assigned in increments of one year The program which does not have the rating age restriction rate will not be restricted 4 15 3 Password PIN Number 1 Digit number of password Password should be a decimal 4 digit number 2 Password deletion The password deletion requires a function based on the IC card instruction via the EMM When received while the screen for PIN number input is being displayed the screen display should be cancelled Furthermore the deletion method other than this is arbitrarily defined by the receiver The password deletion via the EMM is first requested to the customer center to which the user belongs Then when the receiver obtains the EMM for the deletion and the password deletion is set by the IC card instruction the password will be deleted Whether the message for the del
132. Multiple protocols can be displayed e g BASIC partially based on X 28 TCP IP 2 Audience setting information Information shown below is input via a user interface that a receiver has and stored in the receiver Such information is stored in nonvolatile memory of the receiver It should have scalability to support modification needed along with the change of phone number system A fixed preferred connection cancellation number of the viewer setting information should be settable only when a carrier ID is set in the viewer setting information l Postal code Showing a postal code 7 digit of the area where a receiver exits e g 100 0004 Preferred usage line type Showing a preferred line type among the lines connected to a receiver e g PSTN mobile phone line PHS line Carrier ID number ID number to select a carrier that a viewer needs currently 7 digit e g 00X OOXY 002YZ 0091N NS 6 48 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El This function is applicable for receivers that come to market after version 2 2 revision of this document and applied to all receivers that come to market as a new model one year after the revision 4 Fixed preferred connection cancellation number Number to cancel a fixed preferred connection currently 3 digit e g 122 This function is applicable for receivers that come to market after version 2 2 revision of this document and applied to all receivers that come to market a
133. Of fairness rrr terre teeter teen eee EE EE EG 6 76 1 2 4 Simple two way authentication between viewer and hosts see ee se se se see tet ee ee ee ee ees ee ee 6 79 1 2 5 Signature ee 6 80 Appendix 2 Reference for charging ao EE EE eens nseeaeeneeee eee ee eee ence 6 82 2 1 Charging system Ee 6 82 2 1 1 Network payment Ee 6 82 U ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 1 2 Pay by EE EE EE EE EE EE es 6 82 2 1 3 Other payment ee 6 82 2 2 Comparison of charging systems ee 6 83 2 3 Network payment ee 6 83 2 3 1 Information fee surrogate collection service A ere se Ee EE EE EE EE EE Ee EE teeta tees ee EE ee ee ee ee ee ees ee 6 83 2 3 2 Information fee surrogate collection service B eer esse see EE EE EE EE EE EE EE eee teeta eect ee ER ee en ees ees 6 84 2 4 Pay by CALA rrrcre eet ec et EE RE EO EE EG 6 86 2 4 1 Pay by TR RE EE EE OE ease eens eens nen eweeeseeeeees 6 87 2 5 Other payment ee 6 88 2 5 1 Prepaid network type payment ee 6 88 2 5 2 Home banking ee 6 89 Appendix 3 Supplementary explanation about congestion eee eee eee eee eee reer errr eee eee ee eee eee reer rere eee ere errr T ere rere ress 6 90 3 1 What is congestion Ee 6 90 3 2 Effect of congestion EROSIE 6 90 3 3 Mechanism of congestion OCCUITENCE Ee ees ee EE ee EE ee EE EER Ee sete Ee Ee EE EE ee ee EE ee Ee Ee ER ee snes eens ee gee ee 6 90 Appendix 4 Supplementary explanation about network Services sees ese ete EE Ee Ee Ee eee ee ee ee ees ese 6 91 4 1 Massive calls receptio
134. Overview The parental rate described in the PSI SI and the parental level the minimum age for viewing which the user has set in the receiver are compared and if the parental rate exceeds the parental level the minimum age for viewing this parental control function requests the user to input the password PIN number for the restricted program and it allows its viewing if the password just entered matches the password which the user set previously in the receiver This function is intended for programs in the conditional access service It is acceptable to install the on off function for the parental level use in the receiver as a manufacturer option On the off settings it is also adequate not to display the screen to prompt the password input for the parental level until the function is set to on When either or both of the password and the parental level are not set the receiver does not provide the service for the restricted programs at all and it displays the screen to prompt these settings Also when the on off function for parental control use mentioned above is installed in the receiver it is desirable that the above mentioned on off of the parental function can be set on the screen for the password and the parental 5 31 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 level settings At the time of factory shipping no password and parental level are set This is a mandatory function for the CAS 4 15 2 Parental Level
135. R for Memory Stick PRO Applied media recording format Memory Stick PRO Memory Stick PRO Duo Memory Stick Micro and Memory Stick PRO HG Duo Memory Stick Secure Video File Format 4 Applied service TV service and data service Licenser Sony Corporation Contact http www memorystick org Requirement To be installed according to the requirements described in Appendix B 2 4 Content protection system or recording format MagicGate Type R for Secure Video Recording MG R SVR for Hi MD Applied media recording format Hi MD Hi MD Video File Format Applied service TV service and data service format 5 Licenser Sony Corporation Coittack Intellectual Property Strategy Intellectual Property Center Sony Corporation Requirement To be installed according to the requirements described in Appendix B 2 5 6 Content protection system or recording Content Protection for Recordable Media CPRM Applied media recording format SD memory card SD Video Applied service TV service and data service 8 32 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 ee Approved item Description AC Entity LLC Intel Corporation International Business Machines Licenser Corporation TOSHIBA corporation Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd Contact http www 4centity com Requirement To be installed according t
136. RIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Receiver Public network Access Collection network Center and others point ACK BN BN le ACK BN BN ACK s le EOT ACK N ENQ D EER ACK BN BN ACK BN BN 02 FD Daa ACK i lt EOT S ACK Figure 5 17 Example of block serial number seguence 6 29 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 3 Control code format Table 5 10 shows the control code format Table 5 10 Control code format Control code HEX code Meaning Remark DLE STX 1002H Data start DLE ETX 1003H Data end ENQ 05H Line control right 1 byte sending and receiving ACK 06H Acknowledgement 1 byte sending and receiving NAK 15H Negative 1 byte sending and receiving Acknowledgment EOT 04H se ated 1 byte sending and receiving completion DLE 10H es on Inserted just before 10H in data control 6 30 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 5 3 5 State transition 1 State transition table Table 5 11 shows the state transition Table 5 11 State transition Sender of data Receiver of data Waiting for ACK RI R2 Received code S1 After sending ENQ S2 After sending data s3 Waiting for After sending EOT Sending ACK R2 Waiting for data Sending data S2 If data exists Sending data S2 If no data exists Sending EOT S3 Resending Resending data Resending ENQ EOT S1 S2 S3 If OK
137. RKS JAPAN VHF broadcasting Inc 0 25 slot WORLD INDEPENDENT NETWORKS JAPAN Data broadcasting Inc 0 25 slot WX24 0 5 slot Data broadcasting 46 WX24 Data broadcasting 47 48 Japan Broadcasting Corporation HDTV broadcasting 7 74 Volume 8 Content Protection Provisions for BS Digital Broadcasting ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Basic Concept of Overall System for Content Protection To implement content protection for BS broadcasting it is required to create the rules for the broadcast signals and receiver s functions and also specify the requirement for the record media and interfaces that connect the receiver with the recording device and other peripherals That is to protect the copyright of the signals content received by the receiver during transmission or recording the content protection information sent from the broadcaster shall be applied to the interfaces among the devices including the receiver and the recording to the record media This volume specifies the rules for the broadcasting signals and receiver functions to realize content protection for overall systems including the high speed digital interface and the bound recording method that limits playback only by the receiver mounted on the BS digital receiver nA A W N ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Contents Foreword RE RE TE LR EE EE EE EK EIN EE 8 1 References RE NE ER EE EE ER EE AE EE ER EE EE ER EES 8 1 Scope of Application EE EE EK EE OR E
138. Responses in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 if nothing else 4 20 2 Connection Test This is a function to confirm the connection to public line It is started up when the user selects this function on the test menu screen etc Once the function is started the receiver detects a dial tone after off hook The line should be disconnected unconditionally when 30 seconds has passed without detecting any dial tone after the off hook Also the line can be disconnected as soon as the dial tone is detected The result of dial tone detection should be displayed on the screen notifying the connection confirmation result 4 21 IRD Data Transmission The IRD data transmission communication that uses encryption decryption processing of the IC card should not be operated 5 40 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 22 CA Alternative Service 4 22 1 Function Overview This is a function to guide the viewer to the channel which the relevant broadcaster operates pay channels or free programs with content protection hereinafter referred to as link service if one of the followings applies when the viewer selects the channels of scrambled broadcasting service hereinafter referred to as link source service 1 No contract is made with the pay program broadcaster 2 Although a contract was signed with the pay program broadcaster the selected program is not included in the subscription 3 For some reason the Kw for the free pro
139. S group service type Description Default ES group 0x01 Digital TV service Video and audio 0x02 Digital audio service Audio 0xC0 Data service Data entry component OxAl Emergency video service Video and audio OxA2 Emergency audio service Audio 0xA3 Emergency data service Data entry component OXAA Bookmark list data service Data entry component RA ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 2 2 Operation 5 2 2 1 Free Program Some components other than the default ES group may be charged There is no charging priority among ECMs applied for the component other than the default ES group No mutual dependence For details of the protected free program see section 5 3 of this document 5 2 2 2 Pay Program The same ECM must be applied for the default ES group Some components other than the default ES group may not be charged If ECM applied for a component other than the default ES group is different from ECM applied for the default ES group that component is to be charged additionally There is no charging priority among ECMs applied for the component other than the default ES group No mutual dependence Table 5 2 Operation of the free program protected free program and pay program No 1 2 3 4 5 Program type Free program whose default ES Protected free program default ES Pay program group is not for cont
140. Strength All nationwide existing access points are available Limitation A receiver has to equip TCP IP PPP and ISP connection procedures A user has to become a member of an ISP to receive a service from a center Figure 4 6 shows the connection type 6 11 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Internet service provider Receiver Public network etc z Internet Internet service provider Leased line Figure 4 6 Connection via Internet 5 Communication protocol 5 1 Bi directional communication and transmission phase This chapter classifies protocols that use public networks in bi directional transmission such as PSTN mobile phone network and PHS network into 5 phases shown in Figure 5 1 and defines communication protocol for each phase Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Link Line establish transfer termination 4T disconnec ment tion Line connection Figure 5 1 Transmission phase 5 2 Transmission phase and protocol stack 5 2 1 Line connection disconnection phase They are phases where a receiver connects and disconnects a center via a public network etc For a modem AT commands are used to connect or disconnect a line 6 12 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 5 2 2 Link establishment termination phase They are phases where data transfer link between a receiver and
141. Sub is being watched For the details of the operation refer to 7 1 5 Duplicative reference of the low hierarchy 8 For subtitle operation with MVTV refer to 2 in 5 2 5 Handling the PMT and ES lt Service end gt 1 When an MVTV s event is ended transition to the default video and audio of the next event shall take place multi view TV SDTV multi view main service_ID 101 PID 501 HDTV SDTV multi view HDTV program A sub a program B service ID 101 service ID 101 service ID 101 PID 500 PID 502 PID 500 lt Z SDTV multi view sub b service_ID 101 PID I i time Still picture mute i Still picture mute PMT change PMT change seq_end seq_end Figure 7 4 1 MVTV operation The relationship between Main and Sub s is specified with the component_group_descriptor 7 43 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 4 4 Operation and coexistence of multiple service IDs In a case where common pointing of MVTV through multiple service IDs is intended when an event is shared the PMT having multiple ESs in each service id is used A component group descriptor is applied to individual services The concept is shown in figure 7 4 2 multi view TV HDTV SDTV multi view HDTV EDE A service ID 101 OER Prog PID 501 main Prog service_ID 101 PID 502 sub a service_ID 101 PID 500 J PID 500 HDTV program A service
142. Table This indicates the current date and time and specifies the time offset between actual time and time to be shown when daylight saving time is utilized For BS digital broadcasting only TOT is transmitted TDT is not transmitted TS Transport Stream defined by the MPEG system standard ISO IEC 13818 1 For BS digital broadcasting multiple TSs are included in a single transponder and are distinguished with TMCC signals TS id ID allocated to individual TSs This is a unique ID within a network TS frame A group of TSs transmitted for BS digital broadcasting One frame is composed of 48 TSs TS synthesis Grouping TSs to transmit multiple TSs with a single carrier UTC Universal Time Coordinated This is the time commonly used throughout the world based on international agreements version_number 5 bit area incremented following update of MPEG sections In order to transmit new PSI SI data including update information at the time of update of information in a table a sub table having the next version number is transmitted Aspect ratio Ratio of the vertical and horizontal length of TV display For BS digital broadcasting 16 9 or 4 3 is employed Up Down selection Method for switching services in the order of service_ids using the Up Down buttons on the remote control unit A ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Uplink station Station that emits feeder link ra
143. The parental rate should be operated only for pay broadcasters The reason for this is that EMM to erase the PIN number can be transmitted to only the viewer who has signed up for the pay broadcasting service When the conditional access system descriptor is listed in the CAT the receiver ignores the first byte the parental rate value of its data area 5 7 CAT Transmission 5 7 1 Transmitted TS PID As described in the Separate Paragraph No 1 PID Allocation in the Supplemental Table No 7 of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Notification No 37 2003 0x0001 5 7 2 Data Structure As described in the Supplemental Table No 10 CAT Structure of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Notification No 37 2003 5 7 3 Transmitted Descriptor and Its Structure The descriptors transmitted by the CAT are the conditional access system descriptor and the CA service descriptor The structure of the conditional access system descriptor should follow the description of the Separate Paragraph No 1 Structure of the Conditional Access System Descriptor in the Supplemental Table No 12 of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Notification No 37 2003 Please refer to Volume 4 in this document for the structure of the CA service descriptor Please refer to Volume 7 in this document for the CA system id 5 57 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 7 4 Transmission Frequency The CAT t
144. The telephone number system should conform to the Posts and Telecommunications Ministry decree No 82 Telecommunication Number Rules and may be changed in the future 6 33 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 6 1 Phone number system Service ID number Payer Number example Special l 184 186 pecial number XY ED Carrier ID number O0OXYCS Sender 00XY 0ABCDEFGHJ K 0120 Reverse charging function Receiver 0120 DEFGHJ 0800 Reverse charging function Receiver 0800 DEFGHJK Number for reverse charging 0OXY SC Receiver OOXY SC C2 General number QOABCDEFGHJ K Sender OABCDEFGHJK 0OXY SC Sender OOXY SC Fete eC 0180 Massive calls reception Sender 0180 DEFGHJ function Number for 0990 Information fee surrogate Sender 0990 DEFGHJ charging function 0570 Unified number function Sender 0570 DEFGHJ 1 Fixed preferred connection special option for specified carrier cancellation number network service 2 SC Service Code is an ID code of a network service provided by a carrier expressed by 0OXY SC code indicates a way to pay fee 3 Carrier ID numbers expressed by 00XY include 00X OOXY 002 YZ 002YZN1N2 and 0091N1N2 6 1 3 Calling order and digit length of special number 1 Caller ID notification number lt 3 gt Fixed preferred connection cancellation number lt 3 gt Carrier ID number lt 7 gt OABC
145. The upper byte is the relevant broadcasting identifier and the lower byte is 0x01 Differential format number 0x01 Differential information 0x00 No information exists CA_system_id See Volume 7 in this document For the colors of characters and frames excessively loud colors should be avoided in order to prevent excessive distraction on viewing programs in the same way as 4 13 Automatic Message Display in this 5 39 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 volume The display on off control and the procedures of other displays are the same way as those in 4 13 Automatic Message Display in this volume When program video can be provided on free broadcasting this error message should be superimposed on the viewing screen 4 19 2 Pre Registered Phase Conditions When IC Card Is Not Inserted on Sender Side Fixed phrase number The upper byte is the relevant broadcasting identifier and the lower byte is 0x01 4 19 3 Others Please refer to Part 1 Chapter 4 4 2 2 Power On in the ARIB STD B25 This is a mandatory function for the CAS Whether this message is displayed on the video output to analog VTR is not specified 4 20 System Test 4 20 1 IC Card Test The user interface for IC card test should be installed This function notifies the IC card test result The success of the IC card test should be normally ended by the initial setting condition command See Chapter 4 4 3 3 4 Detail of Commands
146. _ID 102 PID 500 HDTV program A service ID 103 PID 500 PID 503 sub b SDTV multi view service_ID 102 PID 501 main PID 502 sub a PID 503 sub b SDTV multi view service_ID 103 PID 501 main PID 502 sub a PID 503 sub b HDTV program A service_ID 102 PID 500 HDTV program A service_ID 103 PID 500 time Still picture mute Still picture mute PMT change PMT change seq_end seq_end Figure 7 4 2 Operation and coexistence of multiple service IDs and MVTV Multiple ESs are written in each service s PMT and the relationship between Main and Sub s is written with a component_group_descriptor 7 5 Event Relay 1 Service overview In a case where broadcasting of programs are continued with different service IDs like live broadcasting of high school baseball tournaments or in a case where live broadcasting cannot be finished at scheduled time it is probable that broadcasting is continued as the extended service of the original broadcasting with different temporary service IDs At that time it is possible to operate SI used for relay recording from the original event to the next extended service 2 Service start A recipient shall be informed of that an extended service is being provided after the end of the original event through methods such as tickers and announcement Switching to a relay destination channel shall be performed
147. a Disconnecting immediately receiver side Note 1 Note 1 The no communication monitoring timer of the receiver starts after a host number command is sent or re sent Refer to 5 3 6 for T1 value 2 Waiting for the sent host number After receiving remote echo NiN2N3N4NsNo6N7Ng CRLF which is same as the sent host number the receiver transits to the waiting state and waits for service signal Table 5 9 shows the receiver s operation during waiting for service signal Table 5 9 Receiver s operation waiting for service signal Received signal Operation after receiving signal Correct service signal connection completion Note 1 Transiting to the data transfer Receiving CRLF COM CRLF sequence Resending a host number command Correct service signal command error Note 1 immediately Receiving CRLF ERRAINV CRLF The time of resending is three A means space Disconnecting when receiving CRLF ERRAINV CRLF four times Wrong service signal Note 1 CRLF COMO CRLF ERRO Receiving CRLFOOOOCRLF Disconnecting immediately means a code other than CR O means a code other than space OOOO means a given length of code line with O byte or larger except COM and ERRAINV Not receiving correct service signal within the defined time period Timeout T1 at a receiver side after sending or Disconnecting immediately resending a host number Note 2 6 23 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1
148. a case where severe security level is not necessary in authentication of partner A common key cryptosystem can be used Known plaintext attack An attack to an encryption algorithm With this method an attacker inputs a known plaintext generates an encrypted message and uses them to find an encrypted key Pseudorandom numbers Generally it is difficult to create true random numbers Therefore a seguence of numbers with sufficiently long cycle and variety is often used alternatively Common key cryptosystem It is also called secret key cryptosystem or symmetric key cryptosystem A sender uses a secret key commonly shared by the sender and a receiver to encrypt and send a message and the receiver decrypts the message It is necessary to share a common key between communication partners with some other ways in advance Verifier A person who verifies whether a signer and his her sign is correct or not Severe authentication A authentication method with a public key cryptosystem Runaround A case where a sender denies a message after he she sent the message Personal information Attribute to identify a person such as name address and sometimes bank account credit card number etc Call A unit of telephone message Fixed preferred connection One of the preferred connection options When a certain carrier is registered as a local carrier there is no need to dial the identification number of
149. a center is established after line connection and where the link between a receiver and a center is terminated after data transfer is completed Table 5 1 shows the protocol stacks of link establishment termination phase Table 5 1 Protocol stack in link establishment termination phase Layer Protocol stack Data link layer Specification Al Procedures partially based on X 28 Refer to 5 3 Basic function modem Specification Al V 22bis MNP4 Advanced function modem V 34 or higher V 42bis Specification B Mobile phone circuit switched data PDC 9600bps Specification B PHS Specification B PIAFS 32kbps or higher In the basic function it may be changed to V 22bis MNP4 in the mobile phone network 5 2 3 Protocol in data transfer phase In the data transfer phase data communication between a receiver and a center is performed after link establishment The basic function communication protocol of which target is low speed modems is fundamental The advanced function communication protocol of which target is high speed modems is optional and selected according to the type of provided service 1 Basic function communication protocol Specification Al Table 5 2 shows the basic function communication protocol Table 5 2 Protocol stack in basic function communication data transfer phase Layer Protocol stack Application layer Selected according to service
150. a remote control device the and option items number of massive calls reception service is automatically called Broadcast station 0AB0 XXXXX1 5 Reponses of viewers are E displayed in real time Massive calls reception service Cut call 0AB0 XXXXX2 3 The number of responses of l viewers is counted in real time and notified HEN EE oa EN Hd NE EEN Cut call PC for e counting 4 Some of viewers are i connected to the center Center A 0AB0 XXXXX6 modem Cut through call Figure 4 1 Image of questionnaire program service target receiver only 6 91 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 1 3 Usage sample service target both of receiver and ordinary phone Figure 4 2 shows an image of guestionnaire program using a massive calls reception service 2 When a viewer selects an answer 1 Broadcast wave sends a questionnaire N with a remote control device the and option items on both of main number of massive calls reception program and data broadcasting service is automatically called Broadcast station 5 Reponses of viewers are A Receiver displayed in real time Cut call 3 The number of responses of lt Receiver viewers is counted in real Cut call time and notified PCfor is 0ABO XXXXX3 counting ER RE N Receiver Cut through call 2 The viewer calls the massive i calls reception service by phone
151. ability descriptor 2 Table B 2 2 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control for D VHS Table B 2 2 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control for D VHS Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for D VHS Copy control _ T encryption _ recording mode type control data 1 Recordable as Copy Free 00 Recordable as Copy One Generation with updating CGMS 0 Information in Format Information Area for D VHS standards to Copy restricted Recordable as Copy One Generation with updating CGMS ol 10 Don t care Information in Format Information Area for D VHS standards to Copy restricted 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy Control Not Asserted 10 Don t care Not recordable 11 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy Control Not Asserted This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for th
152. adcaster every time When the EMM reception is instructed by the CA EMM TS descriptors listed in NIT during the power on period for EMM reception specified by the power on control information request command response the EMM reception instruction by the NIT has priority as shown in the figure below Please refer to the section 4 7 Operation Priority during Standby in this volume for the other operations during standby and their priorities 5 8 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 e The power on control period by IC card response ER The sd with the description of CA emm ts nee in NIT A B ME Figure 4 5 1 EMM Reception Priority during Power on Control Period TS is defined as the reception TS_id by power on control and L4 is defined as the power on retention time TS is defined as the reception TS_id by CA_emm ts descriptor and L is defined as the power on retention time In the figure shown above the operations to obtain EMM for each A B and C period during standby are as follow Period A The reception TS TS retains the power supply for Li Period B After the reception TS TS retains the power supply for Ly the reception TS TS continuously retains the power supply for Li Period C The reception TS TS retains the power supply for Li 4 5 2 Related Standards Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Reference 1 4 Power on control Reference 2 3 12 Power on control 4 6 Powe
153. after the last character on the sender side 6 7 The margins for top bottom left and right and the designs etc are arbitrarily defined by the receiver The page feeding display of message should not be performed on the receiver side 5 67 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Display images Example of the maximum frame 18 characters per line 8 lines 200000000000000000 f ee Ed ETER 900000000000000000 ggocoggocoRocoaceg 200000000000000000 900000000000000000 Erare rE Err EEEE AA 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 R 999999009999009999 900000000000000000 200000000000000000 998909HAYRLAIAIKAS 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 SgggcgcocoRoooacas 200000000000000000 000000000000000000 990009GGBEOLBAGIS 000000000000000000 f aa z 000000000000000000 n 000000000000000000 200000000000000000 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 900000000000000000 900000000000000000 00000000000000000 000000000000000000 900000000000000000 900000000000000000 vad 900000000000000000 900000000000000000 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 900000000000000000 00000000000000000 000000000000000000 gt 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 000000000000000000 200000000000000000 900000000000000000 200000000000000000 000000000000000000 900000000000000000 000000000000000000 900000000000000000 900000000000000000 900000000000000000 900000000009
154. age ID 105 l Sending period 7 Message ID 106 Sending period 6 Message ID 107 Sending period ME Message ID 108 Sending period 8 Figure 4 14 1 Examples of Sending Period and Receiver Operation Receiver operation E Time 1 Message ID 104 is received and the message ID 104 and the reception time 1 are stored in the first area E Time 2 Message ID 103 is received and the message ID 103 and the reception time 2 are stored in the second area 5 30 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 M Time 3 Message ID 102 is received and the message ID 102 and the reception time 3 are stored in the third area E Time 4 Message ID 101 is received and the message ID 101 and the reception time 4 are stored in the fourth area E Time 5 Message ID 107 is received and the message ID 107 and the reception time 5 are stored in the fifth area E Time 6 Message ID 106 is received and the message ID 106 and the reception time 6 are stored in the sixth area E Time 7 Message ID 105 is received and the message ID 105 and the reception time 7 are stored in the seventh area E Time 8 Message ID 108 is received and the message ID 108 and the reception time 8 are stored in the first area Time 1 is the oldest reception time The elapsed time from the time 1 to the time 8 is within 14 days in this operation 4 15 Parental Control Viewer Age Restriction 4 15 1 Function
155. al pause one means two to three seconds Table 6 3 Operation of network specification identification Phone number etc Operation of network specification identification OABCDEFGHJ K 0AB0 DEFGHJ K OOXY SC If a number addition function of receiver is disabled temporarily 6 3 2 Application function 1 Phone number selection function An application refers viewer setting information and communication related information which a receiver has to check phone number related information which the application has and selects one proper phone number 6 37 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Case where no calling action is performed An application does not originate a call in the following conditions When a receiver s postal number information is used to select a phone number but no postal number has been input in the receiver When a security class that a receiver has does not satisfy a security class that an application requests When a line and others that a receiver has and a line and others that an application requests are different Receiver s information reference An application must have API for referring a receiver s communication related information and viewer setting information that are necessary to select a phone number Operation in bi directional communication charged on a caller When bi directional communication charg
156. amer Shoup Crypto 98 Elliptic curve Ellipse ElGamal It can shorten the Ellipse DSA discrete logarithm key length Ellipse Schnorr problem Derivation of each cipher algorithm and improved algorithms are skipped 3 Copyright protection method From the aspect of the diversification of distribution systems for multimedia data and ease of copying of digital data some contents need to provide solution for copyright problems For that purpose it is necessary to use techniques such as copy protection digital watermarking technique that embeds copyright information inside of contents super distribution etc 6 73 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 1 2 Security application This section shows examples on the assumption that the combination of the security functions mentioned in 5 1 in this document are used for bi directional services They are classified into multiple levels of security according to the security requirements Level 0 is for the security requirement of services which receivers without CAS function can use Presumably it is difficult to install the top level on basic function receivers that will be available at the launch of data broadcasting services It is believed that the top level should be installed in advanced function receivers or basic function receivers in the future The items within heavy line frame in Table 1 4 to 1 8 show the security functions that can be installed in receivers with CAS f
157. ample by performing attenuation at the time of input at the sender side transmitting an appropriate down mix coefficient or monitoring down mix audio 4 2 2 MPEG 2 Audio operation details Follow the standard provided in Part 2 Audio Signal and Coding System in ARIB STD B32 and the Operating Guidelines appended to Part 2 lt Coding parameter Bit stream format AAC Audio Data Transport Stream ADTS Profile Low Complexity LC Maximum number of coding Up to 5 1 channels per single ADTS channels PES packet Non synchronization with audio frames shall be allowed Mute flag Not used For muting no sound with input signals lt ADTS and audio mode gt Monaural stereo Composed as a single ADTS Multi channel stereo Composed as a single ADTS 3 1 3 2 3 2 LFE 2 audio dual monaural Composed as a single ADTS Main audio shall be output from L side Complex audio through An ADTS is composed for each audio stream language combination of above modes and multiplied on the MPEG2 system layer E g monaural x 2 or stereo x 2 4 2 3 Notes regarding audio parameter switching Muting is often implemented in a receiver because noise is generated during decoding processing at the time of audio parameter switch Therefore it is desirable that silence portion is introduced to avoid momentary audio cutout at the time of switching with respect to input signal to the encoder The durat
158. ample is an emergent news report service This service is provided by newly securing a temporary channel using a band generated by lowering the bit rate of the normal services the normal services are kept continued While actual implementation of this service is uncertain due to systematical issues at present the technical methods for implementation are concluded below 7 38 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 3 2 Requirements on temporary services The requirements on temporarily scheduled services are as below 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Service identification is conducted with service_id for a temporary service Normally a temporary service is not displayed on the EPG If EPG is transmitted a temporary service is displayed on the EPG during broadcasting Switching from a normal service to a temporary service is performed by a recipient Switching to a temporary service is performed through normal channel selection operation While a temporary service is not being provided switching to the relevant service_id results in skipping When a temporary service is finished a normal service is automatically restored Up to two channels are available for temporary services Hierarchical modulation shall be possible due to consideration regarding the coding rate 7 3 3 Temporary services and normal services The following are the differences between temporary services and normal services Temporary service Refe
159. and allows communication from phone numbers other than the specified one On the contrary in bi directional data broadcasting services receivers can restrict calling and communication However some viewers cannot call because of call restriction Figure 8 2 shows traffic image at the time of call restriction Traffic When traffic is concentrated data over the capacity Traffic cannot be received capacity Es SN EE EERS R i Call restriction Call restriction stops overflow Reception time Figure 8 2 Traffic image at the time of call restriction 8 2 3 Notification of call delay and call restriction Specification B It is recommended that broadcast stations notify viewers the call delay function and call restriction are activated during these functions are running in order to avoid misunderstanding of viewers 6 61 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 2 4 Usage of network service Consider using a massive call reception service when it is estimated that traffic is concentrated in a short period of time Since a massive calls reception service can accept a large number of calls without line busy it is possible to reduce complaints from viewers who cannot get through 8 2 5 Prior information service for carriers It is recommended that broadcast stations notify to carriers that big traffic will be generated In spite of measures mentioned above if congestion occurs consider modifying the next prog
160. and the default audio ES Table 5 4 1 Default ES Group in Conditional Access Broadcasting service type Default ES group 0x01 Digital TV service Video and audio 0x02 Digital audio service Audio 0xCO0 Data service Data Entry component OxAl Temporary video service Video and audio OxA2 Temporary audio service Audio 0xA3 Temporary data service Data Entry component OxA8 Data service for preliminary storage Data OXAA Data service of bookmark list Data Entry component 5 4 2 Operation 5 4 2 1 Free Program The components other than the default ES group may be chargeable There is no charging order among the ECMS applied to the components other than the default ES group There is no mutual dependence Please refer to 5 4 3 Free Program with Content Protection in this volume for free program with content protection 5 4 2 2 Pay Program The same ECM must be applied for the default ES group The components other than the default ES group may not be chargeable For the components other than the default ES group an additional charge will be made if a different ECM from the default ES group is applied There is no charging order among the ECMs applied to the components other than the default ES group There is no mutual dependence 5 50 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 4 3 Free Program with Content Protection 5 4 3 1 Definition It is a program which is intended for
161. aneeeensaneeetaas 5 73 5 15 1 Operation ss sssssssesssesssseeessesssseessssessesesseeeseessessnessnseesecesessssssuecssnessssesssneeneesnsssnensnessenes 5 73 5 15 2 Delay Time Operation s eerecesesesreeeeseeeeeneseestenesneseeneseetenneneeneancneesensnecasensnasecensaneeetneenseates 5 73 jy ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 A Commentary Supplementary Explanation of This Volume tte eeste ees ee ee ee eek ee ee ee ee Geek ee ee Gee ee ee see ees 5 74 A 1 EMM Reception and Update s rrstesereeresesreetteetesnertensseeeneneeneneeeeneneeneneenenesnenssneneanensaneneesensacens 5 74 A 2 History of EMM Message Format Creations essere eek ee eek ee eek ee ee ee ee ee Gee ee ER ee ee ee ee Reese ee 5 74 A 3 Retransmission Cycle and Update Cycle of ECM sere eeee sesse ee ee ee ee RR ee RR ee RR ee Roe Re ER ee Re ER ee ee ee ee 5 75 A 3 1 Retransmission Cycle sss ssesestesessieesieeeeeeieeeeeeeesssesseessessseaseeasseasseasseasseasseasseasseaseesias 5 75 A 3 2 Update Cycles EE EE EG 5 75 A 4 Recordable PPV Purchase and Copy Protection s ssssssestesiesiessisesiseeteeeieeeeceseesseeseeenen 5 76 VS E EE 5 77 EER EO eiee Aia enie EAEEREN Aa EA ENEA AEAEE AEEA EAE TEERAA A AEEA 5 77 A 5 2 Special TS veevercreeeeseseeeseeseseeeeeeseeeesesnenceneneenseeceneneeneneesensaeeeneeseassnenenneasasensacensaeensneesenses 5 77 A 6 Basic Concept of Mandatory and Optional essetereereeeeeeceeeseeseeeeetensneeeeneneeneneeeeneneeneneenenes 5 78 EEN EGTE 5 80 A 8 Sp
162. ans two to three seconds of pause When the data sending function or another is executed from BML contents while ISP has not been connected a receiver should be able to use ISP connection information that has been already set in the receiver to make a call Level 3 When the call function is executed from BML contents while ISP has not been connected a receiver should be able to refer to ISP connection information that has been already set in the receiver to make a call However a case where a preferred usage line type is Ethernet is excluded Level 3 A receiver should be able to make a call by the call function from BML contents while ISP has not been connected Level 3 When multiple communication lines are connected to a receiver a preferred usage line that a viewer selected is used for making a call However when a preferred usage line type is Ethernet and PPP 6 50 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El connection is available the call function connectPPP can be executed only for the target call only if a viewer gives approval Level 3 8 When a call has been already established no new call is originated Level 3 6 4 4 Call disabling function Specification B 1 Setting of call disabling In order to keep out of mischief of kids it is recommended that a receiver has a function to disable a call It is recommended that disabling and enabling of a call should be managed by a password with about 4
163. appropriate operations for example by providing still pictures or silence at the beginning of the program Moreover such a content shall be transmitted that switching can be recognized by recipients Event relay from a temporary service When a temporary service is ended execution of another event relay shall be inhibited Figure 7 5 1 shows the transition examples of events and EITs in terms of a temporary service 7 45 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 event A event B service_ID 101 service_ID 101 event_ID 501 event_ID 502 Transition to recording event X Recording is ended of a temporary service_ID 102 when the PMT_PID channel event_ID 999 disappears event relay 8100 9 00 10 00 1100 time service ID 101 event ID 501 p 0800 0900 f 0900 1 100 service_ID 101 event_group_D relay event_ID 502 service_ID 102 p 0900 1 100 F 1100 1200 event_ID 999 EIT service_ID 102 Temporary service_ID 102 Temporary event_ID 999 event_ID 999 f 0900 1 lt is preferred that duration is determined until 30 seconds before the end of the event Note A simplified EIT is written Figure 7 5 1 Event relay through a temporary service 7 6 Handling Broadcasting Break There are four possibilities regarding broadcasting break Table 7 6 1 shows the distinction of broadcasting operation break and PSI SI operation status 1
164. arrow down function how to narrow the target based on the sampling algorithm one of the simplest example is to 6 77 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Random number and receiver ID etc 3 4 restrict by last number of receiver ID although there are statistical problems To decide a narrow down function the bi directional broadcasting service operator must select an algorithm that has no statistical problem according to voting content In addition the narrow down function must be a one way function that can void a vote from a false receiver to a certain extent Voting Use broadcast wave to broadcast the narrow down function A receiver creates a random number and inputs the narrow down function The output result shows whether it can vote or not Figure 1 8 shows a concept of input output of the narrow down function Narrow down function Delay calling time 0 co 0 Quick calling Out of scope for calling Figure 1 8 Input output of the narrow down function Level 2 Functions and operations that a center performs when possible In order to eliminate risks such as access of a false receiver or misuse of another person s receiver ID for example settlement of a voting control center is effective The center judges whether a receiver is correct or false and distributes a token equal to digital voting ticket to the correct receiver This token and receiver ID are used to check the validity of voting
165. ase command When such error is caused by the command in which Ks is returned from the IC card it will be a descrambling error The error display in this case is left to product planning but a reference example is shown below Example of error display Information error has occurred due to descrambling Please contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code AIFE Call in is not possible The receiver gave the user call in request command to the IC card without receiving the retry over notification of the IC card instruction Error codes and error messages are not displayed 5 36 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Example 1 IC card is not inserted when scrambled broadcasting is received Insert the IC card correctly Example 2 Non usable IC card is inserted See 4 16 Valid Invalid Non usable IC Card in this volume for valid invalid and non usable IC Cards This IC card cannot be used Please contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code Example 3 Non contractual without Kw gt Case 1 This is the case in which the IC card response is A103 and the CA system id listed on the conditional access method descriptor of the selected program and the broadcaster identifier listed on the ECM are different from the broadcaster identifier used for the free program for content protection mentioned in Volume 8 in the case of pay program This program is not in your subscrip
166. at basic receivers or standard services should support when possible 6 57 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 In bi directional data transmission services service providers have to know viewers names and addresses to specify a receiver s address for shopping services When providing such bi directional services it is recommended to consider the following points to prevent leakage of the viewer information in terms of privacy protection Eavesdrop resistant on network Prevention of information leakage within center Protection of intrusion from external site to the center Only necessary personal data should be handled Do not use such data for another application or transfer to third parties without the approval of a relevant person 1 Level 0 Functions and operations that a center performs when possible It is recommended to obtain a viewer s permission when providing a service that needs the viewer information of which privacy should be protected 2 Level 1 Functions and operations that a receiver performs when possible Confirm a connection partner in advance to avoid connecting to a false center refer to 7 1 1 2 Encrypt the viewer information of which privacy should be protected before sending Functions and operations that a center performs when possible The viewer information of which privacy should be protected must be available for only a person who needs that information 3 Level 2 Functions and op
167. ata link layer No control sequence TTY procedure Physical layer Advanced function modem N Mobile phone circuit switched PDC 9600bps data PHS PIAFS 32kbps or higher Table 5 4 Binary communication protocol stack Layer Protocol stack Application layer Selected according to service Data link layer BASIC procedure required functions only code independent mode Physical layer Mobile phone circuit switched TPDC 9600bps data PHS Layer Protocol stack Application layer Selected according to service Data link layer BASIC procedure JIS X5002 code independent mode Physical layer Advanced function modem Mobile phone circuit switched data PHS PIAFS 32kbps or higher 6 14 Layer ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Protocol stack Application layer Selected according to service Data link layer PPP in HDLC like Framing RFC1662 Physical layer Advanced function modem Mobile phone circuit switched data PHS Layer V 34 or higher V 42bis PDC 9600bps PIAFS 32kbps or higher Protocol stack Application layer Selected according to service Data link layer HDLC procedure JIS X5104 X5105 X5106 Physical layer Advanced function modem Mobile phone circuit switched data PHS Layer V 34 or higher V 42bis PDC 9600bps PIAFS 32kbps or higher Protocol stack Application layer Transport
168. atable id Allocatable id id written in NIT id written in NIT id written in NIT Japan Broadcasting Corporation 100 109 400 409 Jo 700 709 101 1 102 2 103 Non 700 701 707 708 3 Temporary 104 105 B S NIPPON CORPORATION 140 149 N ee 440 449 AE ass 140 749 ia 141 4 142 143 Non 744 745 746 Temporary 144 Asahi Satellite Broadcasting __ 150 159 J 450 459 J 750 759 Limited 151 5 152 153 Non 753 755 756 757 BS i Incorporated fe 160 169 J 460 469 ___761 769 908 161 6 162 163 Non 766 768 908 Temporary 169 B S Japan Corporation HO bi Ed 410 479 i are 110719 171 7 172 173 Non 770 779 Temporary 179 Fuji Satellite Broadcasting Inc lt 180 189 J 480 489 Jo 780 789 181 8 182 183 Non 780 781 Temporary 188 189 WOWOW INC 190 199 N EN 490 499 EE 790 799 an 191 9 192 193 Non 791 792 STAR CHANNEL INC 200 209 J 500 509 J 800 809 200 10 Non 800 WORLD INDEPENDENT 330 339 630 639 NETWORKS JAPAN Inc ss Boao al ea 633 636 WX24 910 919 910 The Association for Promotion of L Snn O 920 929 Digital Broadcasting 929 Nippon BS Broadcasting 990 999 Corporation 997 998 999 Note 1 Table 8 2 2 lists 10 to 30 service_ids secured for the individual broadcasters in accordance with the service id allocation guideline in 8 1 2 The values shown below the broken lines in each cell designate service_ids actually written in the NIT The numbers in parenthes
169. ation for copying If however the content availability descriptor encryption_mode is 0 the content must be protected by the local encryption specified in section 7 2 4 When the digital control descriptor digital recording control data is 10 so that the content is specified as Copy one generation the copy control information in the record media must be stored as Copy never specified in section 6 5 2 In this case the value of the digital copy control descriptor digital recording control data does not need to be changed Section 8 3 1 provides additional explanation on the copy control information in the record media When the digital copy descriptor digital recording control data is 10 so that the content is specified as Copy one generation the content must not be copied more than once When the copy is stored as a 8 16 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 backup in the area not accessible from the user this restriction does not apply This restriction applies on a receiving component basis When more than one receiving component exists the restriction above applies to each component When the digital copy control descriptor digital recording control data is 11 so that the content is specified as Copy never only the retention specified in section 6 5 3 is allowed to store the content For the priority of the information in the digital copy control descriptor see Volume 4 in Part 1 of this document
170. ation needing privacy protection or to check that a user is a regular viewer is used in communication it is necessary to check the connected partner and host at the initial phase of transaction For that purpose the two way authentication function is available There are generally two types of two way authentication function the strong authentication based on a public key cryptosystem and the simple authentication alternatively used when a public key cryptosystem is not available because of some restrictions 1 Level 0 It is recommended that a viewer checks a communication partner is not a false center before he she sends privacy information a credit card number and others to the center host Likewise it is recommended that communication without any protection is used only for sending information that generates no big problem even when it is stolen or tampered 2 Level 1 It is recommended to use message recovery method for two way authentication It is recommended that time stamp and random numbers in the information to be sent to centers are converted by one way function in order to prevent a false viewer from reusing a receiver ID or password Message recovery method Figure 7 1 shows how to authenticate a communication partner with the message recovery method When this procedure is performed in the reverse direction two way authentication is possible 6 56 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Match Partner authentication OK N
171. ation of service start The start of a temporary service shall be informed to recipients through methods such as tickers and announcement Switching to a temporary channel is supposed to be performed by a recipient Notification during service broadcasting Such an operation shall be performed that a recipient who switched from a normal channel to a temporary service can recognize that the current service is a temporary one Switching to from a temporary channel While a temporary service is being broadcasted it shall be possible to switch to or from a temporary channel using one of the channel selection methods at least video button operation Up Down button operation and numeric key operation for direct channel number entry Switching to a temporary channel when its service is not being provided shall result in skipping When switching is performed using the Up Down buttons during temporary service broadcasting the channels are switched in the order of service_id Therefore when 101 102 temporary and 103 temporary are available pressing the Up button after selecting 103 temporary causes the channel to jump to 201 of another broadcaster and then pressing the Down button causes 103 temporary to be restored If a temporary channel is selected through another TS using one touch button momentary freezing takes place because the PAT needs to be checked Number of temporary services The maximum number of temporary services shall be two pe
172. ause of the reasons mentioned above it is desirable to make the operation of display function easier for the viewer to understand in order to avoid any confusion on the viewer s inguiry as much as possible For example it can be displayed simply with a few button operations on the menu of the receiver without going through many menu levels A 8 Specifications of Conditional Access System for Digital Satellite Broadcasting A 8 1 Operation of Multiple Conditional Access Systems For the content protection on digital satellite broadcasting a method using the conditional access system in accordance with Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 is provided in this document Furthermore considering the case in which more suitable and special system for content protection becomes available in the future the operation of multiple conditional access systems is described as additional provisions in order to allow the adaption of such system On mentioning the provisions it is mainly aimed to prevent malfunction of the receiver after the provision of the special system for content protection is applied even if multiple conditional access system descriptors are operated at the time of adopting such system Because this provision regarding the special system for content protection depends on the future discussions the details were not described And it is stipulated that multiple conditional access system descriptors and CA service descriptors can be placed in the CAT and the
173. be a video service without data components or an audio service The link service may exist on separate TS instead of on the same TS Even though the operation in which a broadband CS digital TS non scrambled data broadcasting is transferred from a digital satellite broadcasting TS is not carried out it is considered that the receiver ignores such function to prevent malfunction even if the operation is carried out in the future Note Note Due to the imbalanced BS CS reception property by the assumed BS antenna property 5 14 3 Transmission Operation of Link Descriptor When the CA alternative service is operated the link descriptor is placed in the SDT and transmitted In the link descriptor the information of link service original network id transport stream id and service id etc is listed The link descriptor may be listed in the SDT of the service with non scrambled operation when the link descriptor is operated stably on the broadcasting that includes both scrambled and non scrambled broadcasting In this case the link operation will not start because the viewing is possible with the non scrambled broadcasting The operation to place the CA alternative service link again on the link service is prohibited because the link operation may loop The first 8 bits of private_data_byte of the link descriptor should be the message number The message main body is described in the second and the later bytes The numbers
174. bling Key Change 1 ECM Update and Scrambling Key Change 2 5 8 4 2 End of Scrambling The broadcast signal changes as mentioned below when scrambled broadcasting or the ES that transmits the broadcasting program elements switches to non scrambled broadcasting or the ES that transmits the broadcasting program elements 1 2 The scrambling operation for the relevant ES group stops After t4 second the relation between the ECM and the relevant ES group is deleted and transmitted in the first or the second loop of the PMT PMT update 5 59 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 8 4 3 Change of Relation between ECM and ES that Transmits Broadcasting When the conditional access system descriptors are listed in the first and the second loops of the PMT and when the relation between the ES that transmits the broadcasting program elements and the ECM PID already described in the PMT is changed the procedure of 5 8 4 1 Start of Scrambling in this volume should Program Elements also be followed 2 3 4 5 All ES is transmitted in a non scrambled condition New ECM is transmitted t5 second after 1 the PMT is updated After t6 second the scrambling of the ES starts After t7 second the first ECM update begins t5 1 t6 the number of ECM x 2 0 lt t7 For the ECM update the sections listed below in this volume are followed Update Retransmission Cycles ECM Update and Scrambling Key Change 1 ECM Update
175. caster names section_number Section numbers that enable the sections of a specific table to be rearranged in the original order with a decoder For the ARIB standards the numbers are allocated to the sub tables Service A series of channel programs organized and scheduled by consignment broadcasters service id IDs allocated to individual services SI Service Information This represents various information defined for convenience of program selection This is defined by the postal service ministerial ordinance and stipulated as the ARIB standard Besides the extension part specific to the ARIB standard MPEG 2 s PSI information is also included start_end_flag value A value included in the emergent warning broadcasting descriptor When this value is 0 emergency warning broadcasting is provided When the value is 1 emergency warning test broadcasting is provided table Table composed of multiple sub tables having an identical table ID TC8PSK Trellis coding 8 phase PSK In this transmission method 8PSK and error correction are combined for processing resulting in the improvement of the performance time stamp This indicates the time of specific operations such as data byte arrival and video audio display TMCC Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control This is a signal for transmission control transmission system frame configuration TS id etc TOT Time Offset
176. ce ID write data that was acquired by getProgramID Table 6 6 Data configuration of registration date time Data format Data type Data length Registration Note 1 date and tii YMMDDHHMM UnsignedInteger 4Byte Service ID service id with a style in which Ox is deleted from the expression in hexadecimal character string es Dye OxXXXX Note 1 In case of December 01 2000 23 59 describe 12012359 In case of January 01 2001 13 00 describe 101011300 6 44 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 6 3 6 Operation rules concerning writing in the shared area The main purpose of the shared area for all operators in a receiver NVRAM is to improve the usability of viewers For that purpose this area can be used to supplement input information to avoid re entering of the same information that a viewer has entered once 1 Writable BML contents Writing and overwriting from contents except following ones are prohibited A Customer registration change contents of each broadcaster Broadcasters who writes or overwrites in the shared area for all operators should prepare customer registration change contents that satisfy this operation rules B General contents incorporating the documentation for customer registration change specified by each broadcaster If it is necessary to write or overwrite in this area from general contents always incorporate the documentation fo
177. ce and emergency audio service 7 Mode CO must be used for the digital audio service and emergency audio service 8 14 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 For details of Mode A C for the high speed digital interface output see Table 6 2 1 For details of mode AO BO B1 C0 and DO see Table 6 2 2 and specification of DTCP For details of CGMS A for the analog video output see Table 6 3 To APS for the analog video output the value of APS control data must be applied If however digital recording control data is 00 or APS control data is not specified 00 must be specified for APS for the analog video output For details of CGMS A and APS see Volume 2 of this document For details of Macrovision see Volume 2 in Part of this document SCMS stands for Serial Copy Management System and is information used to manage copy generation by the copyright protection bit of the channel status and category code that are specified by IEC60958 For details of the settings see Volume 4 in Part 1 of this document To SCMS T the same copy control as SCMS for the digital audio output must be applied SCMS T is information specified by Assigned Numbers in the Bluetooth SIG Inc site and like SCMS used to manage copy generation using the copyright protection bit of the channel status and category code Table 6 2 1 Definition of the high speed digital interface output serial Interface Output mode EMI Definit
178. ce type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy_control_type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 3 For the definition of CGMS Copy Generation Management System see Table B 2 11 4 For the definition of EPN Encryption Plus Non Assertion see Table B 2 12 Note that EPN is available only when CGMS is set to 00 5 The value of APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor is inherited 8 46 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 APS control data is handled as 00 or the value of APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor is inherited For the definition of APS see Table B 2 13 7 For VCPS encrypted recording is not available Table B 2 11 Definition of CGMS information for Video Content Protection System CGMS Definition 00 The associated AV Sectors may be copied without restriction 01 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 The associated AV Sectors may not be copied CGMS 1 and 2 are provided and information is written duplicated Table B 2 12 Definition of EPN information for Video Content Protection System EPN Definition 0 The associated AV Sectors are not encrypted 1 The associated AV Sectors are encrypted EPN 1 and 2 are provided and information is written duplicat
179. code encrypted ECM process pay program viewing control process viewing history information control process transmission of viewing history information to broadcaster decode encrypted EMM messages etc While issuing commands with preset transmission orders such as the commands that require several transmissions and receptions of commands responses ones with PDU numbers and the call in status due to communication related commands the receiver must not issue unnecessary commands for program viewing except for the ECM reception command the PPV status request command the PPV program purchase command the contract confirmation command and the card request command Prepaid card will not be used for the receivers that comply with this document Consequently the Prepayment balance confirmation command should not be issued The standards related to prepaid card will be revised at an appropriate time for the prepaid operation The low speed CA interface described in the following sections in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 should be installed Chapter 4 4 3 CA Interface Reference 2 3 5 Communication control of IC card The contact for inquiries regarding IC card can be found in Appendix B 2 10 Remote control Although the buttons on remote control depend on product planning it is assumed that numeric keypad for password input menu key for PPV purchase and settings cursor control keys enter keys are needed 11 Display on main body o
180. command Remote echo different from the sent host number Disconnection Figure 5 7 Error sequence wrong remote echo 6 Figure 5 8 shows the error sequence timeout at the receiver during waiting for remote echo Refer to the receiver s operation at the time of waiting for remote echo which is shown in Figure 5 8 Connection instruction f T Incomin After sending the Originating call al 8 host number indication command going to Response no communication SO Handshake monitoring state and gt disconnectin Conneoiion Connection i E one si completed whenT1 time has passed Timeout T1 Note Refer to 5 3 6 Host number command for T1 value No communication state _ i ee BE EE KAREE N OE EE OE AE N i PRIER EE ER ET gt Disconnection Figure 5 8 Error sequence timeout at the receiver during waiting for remote echo 6 20 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 7 Figure 5 9 shows the error seguence wrong service signal Refer to receiver s operation at the time of waiting for service signal which is shown in Table 5 9 Receiver Modem ADP n instruction Connection lt completed Access Ges network point Ges others Originating call Response Handshake Host number command Remote echo Wrong service signal Disconnection Collection network Incoming call indication Connection completed Figure 5 9 Error sequenc
181. conditional access system descriptors may be listed in the CAT When described in PMT it specifies the TS packet ID that transmits the ECM When described in PMT and when the parental rate is defined in the data area it determines the parental rate of the relevant program Multiple conditional access system descriptors may be listed in the PMT 5 6 2 Data Structure As described in the Separate Paragraph No 1 of No 12 of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Notification No 37 2003 The transcription from the Separate Paragraph No 1 of No 12 of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Notification No 37 2003 Note Descriptor length Conditional access system identifier Conditional access PID 8 8 16 3 13 8 XN 1 The value of the descriptor tag should be 0x09 which indicates a conditional access system descriptor 2 The descriptor length should be the area in which the number of the subsequent data bytes is written 3 The conditional access system identifier CA_system_id should be the area to be used for identifying the 5 55 _ ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 type of conditional access system and it is specified by the ARIB 4 The conditional access PID should be the area in which the PID of the TS packet that includes the related information is written 5 This descriptor should be transmitted in the descriptor area in the CAT or the area of the descriptor 1 in the PMT the
182. content right protection without customer management which transmits the content safely on the broadcast wave and whose default ES group is not chargeable It is operated as a free scrambled program in the conditional access system which complies with Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 All of the default ES group of such program is not chargeable However the ones other than the default ES group may be chargeable For the free program with content protection the ECM by the common broadcaster identifier for right protection provided in 5 4 3 2 in this volume must be placed in the first loop of the PMT For the free program with content protection described as No 3 in Table 5 4 2 the conditional access system descriptor is placed only in the first loop of the PMT and only one PID which indicates the valid ECM by the common broadcaster identifier for right protection provided in 5 4 3 2 in this volume is placed For the free program with content protection described as No 4 in Table 5 4 2 only one PID which indicates the valid ECM by the common broadcaster identifier for right protection provided in 5 4 3 2 in this volume must be placed in the first loop of the PMT and the conditional access system descriptor is placed in the second loop for the chargeable ES The free program with content protection is operated with the certain broadcaster identifier provided in 5 4 3 2 in this volume In addition the receiver recognizes that the program is the fre
183. cted that an IC card has not been inserted the message to prompt to the IC card insertion is displayed Please refer to 4 18 Error Notification Screen in this volume for the message display The error message display required when the selected program is non scrambled broadcasting and an IC card has not been inserted or when the inserted IC card is invalid is described in the following sections The error message in this case is displayed using the method of displaying automatic display message as mentioned below 4 19 1 1 Conditions for Error Message Display When the IC card is not inserted or when the IC card inserted is invalid When the service_id of the selected program is listed on the CA service descriptor in the CAT The display is executed at the time of power on and channel change 4 19 1 2 Display Method When the IC card is not inserted for the EMM common message acquisition the relevant EMM message should be obtained by using the CA system id of the default message code mentioned below In such service the default message is defined by the corresponding EMM individual message More specifically the receiver issues the EMM individual message reception command to the IC card for the broadcasting identifier of the CA service descriptor and it processes as the message codes listed below is obtained from the IC card The default message codes are as follows Expiration date OxFFFF Fixed phrase message number
184. ctures be superimposed by text not related to video audio and data being broadcasted The types of this service include breaking news service rescheduling notification and time display Temporary service temporary scheduling Service prepared for temporary broadcasting using a channel other than ordinary channels This service is not always provided it is temporarily operated Continuity index 4 bit area incremented for each group of TS packets having an identical PID in order to indicate the continuity of TS packets 7 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 Source Coding 4 1 Video 4 1 1 Standard for input signals lt Standard for video formats gt Follow the standard provided in Chapter 2 Video Input Format in Part 1 of ARIB STD B32 lt Aspect ratio gt Follow the standard provided in 2 4 Video signal parameters in Chapter 2 in Part 1 of ARIB STD B32 Ina case where the aspect ratio different from the normal video source is used for transmission in terms of the side panel letter box and others display of black frames can be avoided by setting the parameters shown in table 4 1 1 to the sequence header The center of the video source shall coincide with the center of transmission signals 1 In a case where video source having the 4 3 aspect ratio is added with side panels basically black and is transmitted with the 16 9 ratio value D shall be 3 4 of value B 2 In a case where vid
185. d above are recommended values and strictness of the display pixel level should not be sought The following operations are desirable for the frame 1 2 3 4 On the receiver side the frame eguivalent to 18 characters double byte characters x 8 lines at most is used On creating data on the sender side the overall layout should be made with appropriate line breaks and space insertions as premises for the maximum of 18x8 lines Therefore on the sender side the display character data with 144 or more of double byte characters should not be in the message code in which the common massage and the individual message are combined The receiver side should optimize the automatic display message frame by the number of line break and the maximum number of characters per line When optimizing the frame by the numbers of characters and lines the meanings of 0100 Left 0010 Center and 0001 Right and 0100 Top 0010 Center and 0001 Bottom in 5 10 6 Recommended Display Position of Automatic Display Message in this volume are as follows Left Automatic display message frame is left aligned in the screen Right Automatic display message frame is right aligned in the screen Top Automatic display message frame is top aligned in the screen Bottom Automatic display message frame is bottom aligned in the screen Center Automatic display message frame is center aligned in the screen 5 No line breaks should be inserted
186. dard and the decision of data broadcaster 1 1 BS basic operation Specification of bi directional communication operation of BS digital consigned broadcasting operators should be based on this operation rules 1 2 BS Level 3 operation In the BS Level 3 operation new functions enhanced in shared receivers with ground wave are used in BS The BS Level 3 operation should be based on the items marked with Level 3 in this document 6 1 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 Applied documents This document defines operations of bi directional communication in the BS digital broadcasting systems that are defined in the following standards 1 ARIB STD B20 2 ARIB STD B21 3 ARIB STD B24 4 ARIB STD B25 TRANSISSION SYSTEM FOR DIGITAL SATELLITE BROADCASTING RECEIVER FOR DIGITAL BROADCASTING DATA CODING AND TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATION FOR DIGITAL BROADCASTING CONDITIONAL ACCESS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FOR DIGITAL BROADCASTING 6 2 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 3 Definition of terms and abbreviation In this standard following definitions and terms are used ARIB ARIB Association of Radio Industries and Business is an organization that creates standards for domestic use of radio wave technologies The organization members are broadcasting business companies telecommunications carriers and manufacturers
187. default ES group and the other ES of 0x00 0x3F tag are controlled by the digital copy control descriptor listed in the same first loop of the PMT The copy control in this case is performed by the digital copy control descriptor When the default ES group is free the digital copy control descriptor can be listed in each ES for the data ES of 0x40 0x7F component tag When this ES is charged by the separate ECM from the default ES group the recordable purchase for each ES can be operated As a result when additional data ES is purchased the recordable purchase operation is carried out The purchase result is accordingly reflected in the control of the output from IEEE1394 See Volume 4 and Volume 8 in this document for the detail 5 19 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 4 11 1 Recordable PPV Purchase and Copy Control Service digital copy control CAS related Analog 1394 output Optical digital type descriptor PPV operation video P audio output copy_ digital _ APS Recordable s control recording control purchase Purchase Ma MPPG TS IEC60958 SCMS i result vision EMI CGMS type control data data operation Digital 01 00 00 No See Vol 4 in this document TV 10 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 10 00 Yes Recordable OFF 10 10 No current copy once purchase output View only No
188. descriptor is not received the default ES is defined with the component tag value of the PMT For the reason above the component tag value of the default ES of the entire event has to be written in the beginning of component group id 0x0 of component group descriptor 5 2 Detailed Operation of MPEG2 Systems 5 2 1 Definition of services Each type of service is defined as follows O Digital TV service This service includes one or more video streams during broadcasting and allows even a receiver without a function handling data broadcasting to receive programs steadily 7 15 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 O Digital audio service This service includes one or more audio streams during broadcasting and allows even a receiver without a function handling data broadcasting to receive programs steadily service other than digital TV service that meets this definition O Data broadcasting service Service that is neither digital TV service nor digital audio service 5 2 2 Synchronization of video audio and subtitles The synchronization of video audio and subtitles shall be controlled at the sending side so that a receiver should work properly because synchronization is performed by a receiver using both or either of the PTS and DTS as the reference 5 2 3 Multiplexing of EPG and data The maximum bit rates to be allocated to EPG and data broadcasting are as below O EPG 1 Mbps max for the total of SI Mean value for o
189. digit and only a manager can change the disabling enabling status If the same password is also used for a parental rate management password defined in the volume 5 of this document a method except EMM to delete the password should be implemented in consideration of a case where a user who is not a member of pay TV uses a bi directional function Implementation method depends on receivers 2 Operation of receiver of which calling function is disabled A receiver of which calling function is disabled operates as follows Acall from CAS must be originated according to demand even when the calling function of a receiver is disabled When a call other than CAS is requested an error indication showing that the receiver cannot make a call is displayed and no call is originated 3 Receiver operation during receiving a call A receiver does not make a call while it is receiving a call 6 4 5 Operation of viewer setting information Level 3 In order to prevent that the viewer setting information is used for a service other than a bi directional data broadcasting service and to prevent personal information leakage the viewer setting information should be operated as follows 6 4 5 1 Protection function of viewer setting information Level 3 1 When a receiver uses a user ID to connect ISP or a network operator for fulltime connection and a password for access certification and operates the viewer setting information a password should be
190. digital APS _ encryption_ type recording control mode 6 control data data Copy free 1 01 Don t Copy free op hee 11 bi care A Copy never 1 2 Copying is prohibited but Macrovision is not applied Therefore copying is 00 possible only by the 01 conventional analog input and record device Copy never 5 Other H than 00 1 Copy never Copying is prohibited but Output in Macrovision is not applied MPEG TS is Therefore copying is 00 prohibited possible only by the 11 conventional analog input and record device Copy never 5 Other than 00 Copy one Copying is limited to one generation 1 3 generation but Macrovision is not applied Therefore copying is 00 possible by the 01 conventional analog record device Copying is prohibited after Other one copy 5 10 than 00 1 Copy one Copying is limited to one generation generation but Output in Macrovision is not applied MPEG TS is Therefore copying is 00 prohibited possible by the 11 conventional analog record device Copying is prohibited after Other one copy 5 than 00 1 Output of MPEG TS via the serial interface for the high speed digital interface is not currently possible 2 3 For more information see the functional restriction for the content protection described in section 8 2 of this document function specified by DTCP is performed function specified by DTCP is performed 8 9 For the high speed digital interface output operat
191. ding system does not support encryption_mode the record device can digitally record the content by handling it as Copy one generation when the content is specified as follows the copy control descriptor copy control type is 01 digital recording control data is 00 and content availability descriptor encryption_mode is 0 that is the content is to be protected The content for which the digital copy control and content availability descriptors do not require protection the content can be digitally recorded in any format If however Appendix B 2 specifies the requirement for the relevant removable record media the requirement must be satisfied 8 18 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 6 2 Digital Recording of the Audio Service 1 To receive the content for the digital audio and emergency audio services for which the digital copy control descriptor specifies protection and digitally record it in the removable record media or to digitally record only the audio for the digital TV emergency video data emergency data and bookmark list data services the record format and content protection system that are authorized by Engineering Committee of BPA according to the accreditation criteria described in Appendix A must be used For details of accreditation contact BPA The authorized record formats and content protection systems are officially announced 2 When the digital copy descriptor digital recording control data is 10
192. dio waves to satellites For BS digital broadcasting it also performs TS synthesis regarding consignment broadcasters transmission line coding modulation conversion into feeder link frequencies site diversity operations and others Event relay Consecutively viewing multiple programs while switching among services Service service Service ID service id Site diversity Operation while switching among multiple uplink stations geographically located apart in order to prevent feeder link from being disconnected due to rainfall Side panel Method by which the both sides of the screen are filled in with black when pictures having the 4 3 aspect ratio are displayed on a screen having the 16 9 aspect ratio Sampling rate Frequency by which sample values are extracted from original signals when original analog audio signals are converted into digital signals Seamless switch Technology that allows a receiver to prevent freezing and muting when switching to a redundant transmission facility at a broadcasting station or switching among television systems System management ID system_management_id This ID is used to distinguish between broadcasting and non broadcasting and to indicate the standard system regarding broadcasting Super frame Unit for energy diffusion or interleaving in terms of BS digital broadcasting transmission signals It consists of eight frames The frame configurati
193. discard A key of common key cryptosystem can be created comparably easily because it is a kind of random number On the other hand a public key cryptosystem needs a certain level of program and calculation volume to create a high quality key Therefore some system configuration may need a key creation center etc An example of key creation method with RSA is described in the attachment of X 509 In addition a key discard method is very important to decide validity of a signature Generally a center should manage a function to monitor status of key update and key discard Key update There is no encryption algorithm that can store security of created keys perpetually Update of keys is always necessary Generally some public key cryptosystems provide around two years of validity period if there is no problem A common key cryptosystem is almost always used for a session key one time key if it is combined with a public key cryptosystem When only a public key cryptosystem is used multiple layers of key management are necessary Use of a master key the most important key should be kept to a bare minimum 1 1 7 Security scalability Nowadays security techniques have been revised along with the future improvement of calculation capacity and the diversification of distribution systems for multimedia data It is recommended to have scalability that can support those new techniques according to need 1 Common key cryptosystem Along w
194. download of software updates for the receiver the power on call in control is not necessary Therefore which operation or download is processed is arbitrarily defined by the receiver Especially for acquiring download contents if a reserved operation reserved recording etc is expected to start during the acquisition do not obtain the contents If it is time for the power on period to obtain the EMM acquisition or if download delivery is scheduled when the reserved operation reserved recordings etc has completed the operation to obtain the EMM or the download contents will be carried out 4 8 Viewing Control for Free and Pay Programs with Content Protection 4 8 1 Viewing Processing The basic operation selects the transport stream of chosen program based on the PSI SI and selects the components that form the program It refers the scrambling control flag and the adaptation field control of the TS packet header as well as provides the ECM to the IC card as it receives conducting the viewing control with the responses Even if components are subject to charges they are not always scrambled broadcasting In the case of such non scrambled broadcasting the program should be provided based on the scramble flag assessment Recognizing Free program with content protection is possible with the broadcaster identifying value of the ECM However in the receiver the broadcaster identifying value which is also for right protection make
195. e CM etc 5 3 2 Operation of Caption and Superimposed characters When the default ES group has a description of valid ECM_PID on the first loop of the PMT more specifically when it is a normal scrambled condition the same ECM_PID as the default ES group must be used if the components of caption and superimposed characters are scrambled Even though the default ES group is in a scrambled condition it is possible to operate non scrambled components of caption and superimposed characters In this case the invalid ECM PID OX1FFF must be listed on the second loop of the PMT for such non scrambled components When the default ES group is not scrambled both the caption and superimposed character components are operated without being scrambled 5 49 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 4 Free Program Pay Program 5 4 1 Definitions of Free Program Pay Program The decision of pay or free program is based on the free CA mode in the SDT or the EIT If free CA mode 0 is listed it is a free program and if free CA_mode 1 is listed it is a pay program The free program is a program whose default ES group is not chargeable and the pay program is a program whose default ES group is chargeable However the ES other than the default ES group in the free program may be chargeable The default ES group is defined based on each service type Example In the case of digital TV service The default ES group the default video ES
196. e ES other than No protection Protection Protection Protection Protection default available 1 available available 2 available TS packet header Default ES 00 00 10 11 10 11 10 11 4 group ES other than 00 10 11 1 10 11 5 10 11 5 10 11 5 default Chargeable Default ES No charge No charge No charge No charge Chargeable group ES other than No charge Chargeable No charge Chargeable Chargeable default ECM transmission Not necessary Necessary Necessary Necessary Necessary EMM transmission Transmission Necessary Transmission Necessary Necessary possible possible EMM 3 message Used broadcaster Default ES Common ID for Common ID for Unique identifier group right protection right protection broadcaster ID Unique Valid ECM is Unique Unique ie other that broadcaster ID placed only in the tak ID Peer ID efault first loop in PMT Note The relevant Free program The relevant Free program event is no with event is no charge with chargeable charge chargeable ES ES 5 52 2 r3 4 xS ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 For the program whose default ES group is free the program included in the definition of free program when the chargeable PPV operation is conducted for the ES other than the default ES group and the default ES group is operated with non scrambled except for the default ES group the operations other than copy possible without restricted conditions can be carried out
197. e the built in message of the receiver p data by To view this program a contract and a registration are necessary The detailed information can be found in the guide channel is displayed The phrase Do you want to switch to the guide channel is arbitrarily defined by the manufacturer unless it is uniformly used to the users in the user mannual ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Figure 4 22 3 Example of Transfer Confirmation Screen of CA Alternative Service 5 The link service information is obtained from the link descriptor in the SDT to transfer the service It lt 6 7 is transferred to the link service based on the original network id transport stream id service id of the link descriptor and 8 Examples of specified processing by data contents gt 6 The viewer s intention of signing a contract in the program of the link service is confirmed The confirmation method of viewer s intention differs among the pay program broadcasters 1 Ifthe viewer has the intention go to the contract processing 7 2 If the viewer does not have the intention go to the CA alternative service completion processing 8D The contract with the viewer is processed The contract processing could be the online processing using data broadcasting etc and the offline processing such as sending contract documents and it differs among the broadcasters It does not return to the link source ser
198. e type is digital audio except for the data ES separately regulated is chargeable it is operated with a single ECM The ECM PID is defined in the first loop of the PMT When the service type is data broadcasting the entry component should be the default ES When the video ES the audio ES or the data ES other than the default ES group is selected and the separate ECM from the default ES group is defined additional purchase operation will be performed In PPV purchase operation do not perform any other ES purchase operation without the purchase operation of the default ES group that excludes data ES After purchasing the default ES group the other ES should be purchased Note that the IC card does not indicate purchase error even if an additional purchase of the other ES is entered before the default ES group is purchased Therefore it should be considered at the time of the settings The PPV fee defined by the ES other than the default ES group obtained from the IC card responses the PPV status request command response and the contract confirmation command response means an additional fee 4 10 6 2 When Default ES Group Is Free Even if the default ES group is free the other ES for example data ES may be chargeable In this case the purchase operation of the ES will be executed if the ES with valid ECM is selected Since the default is free the PPV fee defined by the ES other than the default ES group obtained from the IC ca
199. e wrong service signal 8 Figure 5 10 shows the error sequence timeout at the receiver during waiting for service signal Refer to receiver s operation at the time of waiting for service signal which is shown in Table 5 9 After receiving remote echo going to no communication monitoring state and disconnecting when T1 time has passed after sending the host number Timeout T1 Note Refer to 5 3 6 for T1 value Connection Instruction Connection completed Tl time Originating call Response Handshake Host number command Remote echo No communication state Disconnection Incoming call _ indication Connection lt completed Figure 5 10 Error sequence timeout at the receiver during waiting for service signal 6 21 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 Disconnection seguence Figure 5 11 shows the disconnection sequence activated by a receiver ae a network Access Center Modem ADP and a point Collection network network Disconnection instruction Line disconnection Disconnection indication Figure 5 11 Disconnection sequence activated by receiver 2 Figure 5 12 shows the disconnection sequence activated by a center Disconnection indication Line disconnection Figure 5 12 Disconnection sequence activated by a center 3 Host number command and service signal Table 5 7 shows the formats of host number command and service
200. e 5 56 5 7 ETES GEE RE EG 5 57 5 7 1 Transmitted TS DIESE ED 5 57 5 7 2 Data Structure sss EE EE EE EE EE ens 5 57 I ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 7 3 Transmitted Descriptor and Its Structure t terre ese eek EER EER ee EER ER ee ER ER ee ee RR eek GER ER eR GER ee ees ER ene 5 57 5 7 4 Transmission EE EE 5 58 5 7 5 Update EE 5 58 SR EE eee LT ET DE EE EE ae 5 58 5 8 1 VEE TT ET EE 5 58 5 8 2 ECM Data Structure sees ee see ee ee ee ee ee ee ER Re ER Re ER Re ER Re ER Re ee Ne ee ee ese ee ee ee ee Re ER Re ER Re ER Re ER Re ER Re ee ee 5 58 5 8 3 ST TE 5 58 5 8 4 ECM Application Changes tree eee sees ees ee ee eek SEK GEKEER SERE R ee Koek GER ER ek eee KERR ERK ee eeR GER GER ee Koek ee Reese 5 59 5 8 5 ECM Update Retransmission terte terte eseeeeseeeseteeeeeseesteneeneencneeneeeneeteneneenceneaneeeensaeeeeneens 5 60 ao AE IE OE EE 5 62 S0 EE OE ret etc ea ate nests ne een ata at eee eras 5 63 5 9 1 EMM Transmission Specifications ssssssssessseseeseeeseeesnesssneessneesnseesesessneeneeesnessnessnees 5 63 5 9 2 EMM Message Transmission Specifications eetere et GER RR EE RR sees Roe RR RR Re e RR e RR 5 63 5 9 3 EMM Transmission Frequency s ssssrsssssssesssseseseeseseeseeesseessneessnesssnsesssesssseeneesneeesnessiees 5 64 5 9 4 EMM Transmission Order teer ees ees ees ees see Reeks eek ee eke eek ee eke eek ee eke eek ee ee ee ee ees Gee ees See See See ee 5 65 5 10 Message Code for EMM Messagers s sssssssssssssssse
201. e future BS B Corp is expected to use 0x21 again The same steps shall be taken also when one of the broadcasters belong to the other That is broadcaster_ids shall be secured for all broadcasters t Not to be used for the time being EP ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Note In a case where a former broadcaster has used the receiver NVRAM s discrete broadcaster dedicated field a newly joined broadcaster shall delete the field to use For the procedure refer to Partl Volume 3 BS Digital Broadcasting Data Broadcasting Operation Standards 8 1 5 Identifier values The following values shall be used for identifiers Table 8 1 2 Identifier values Identifier Value Remark Network name ae Two byte character network_name BS Digital ee A Network ID network id 0x0004 Conditional access system ID CA_system_id 0x0005 Data coding method ID data_component_id XML base coding method 0x0007 Subtitle Ticker coding method 0x0008 Downloading coding method 0x0009 System management ID system_management_id 0x0201 8 1 6 Identifier values other than the above An event_id is a unique value assigned in service_id Unless a unique event_id is allocated during timer recording period a recording error may occur Therefore the same value shall not be allocated to the extent that a broadcaster transmits SI relative to another event A series_id is a unique value assigned in a service belo
202. e high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 8 38 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 If the service type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy_control_type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 3 Table B 2 3 shows the definition of CGMS information 2 bit This conforms to the CGMS D bit definition described in the standard information TR C 0011 by the Japanese Industrial Standards Committee Also for the recording position of CGMS information for the D VHS standards see TR C 0011 Table B 2 3 Definition of CGMS information for the D VHS standards CGMS Definition 00 Copy permitted 01 Reserved 10 One generation of copy permitted 11 Copy restricted 8 39 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 3 Requirement for Installing Content Protection for Recordable Media CPRM 1 Table B 2 4 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by CPRM Table B 2 4 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by CPRM
203. e individual services The basic guidelines for allocating service_ids are provided below Concrete numeric values will be determined in accordance with table 8 2 2 in the future 1 2 3 Assumption for presenting the guidelines A receiver s remote control unit contains one touch buttons and generally channel selection is performed with these buttons Channel selection is also possible by directly entering service_ids with the numeric keys and by operating the Up Down buttons The sequence of service_ids is concerned for example when the channel Up Down buttons are used and in terms of the sorting sequence of the default EPG list in display Requirements regarding service IDs 1 It is preferred that service ids are grouped according to each medium television audio data and each broadcaster With respect to this requirement it is possible to define grouping according to each broadcaster and each service using the BIT However users are less confused about service recognition if grouping according to each medium and each broadcaster is presented regarding the service ID allocation method 2 It is preferred that transition to the service of the same broadcaster occurs at the time of media transition for example transition from television service to data service Allocation rules 1 Television broadcasting services are allocated three digit values 100 to 299 2 Audio services are allocated three digit values 300 to
204. e major functions for content protection including encryption decryption and encryption algorithm must not be easily disabled or bypassed by an inexpensive general tool for example driver jumper cable and soldering iron electronic tool and software tool for example EEPROM writer debugger and decompiler 8 6 User Access Bus To output a subject of protection specified in section 7 1 2 of this volume to the user access bus the local encryption described in section 7 2 4 of this volume the protection for the output described in section 6 3 of this volume or equivalent protection must be applied The user access bus that requires protection indicates a digital connection interface bus through which a user can easily extract the signals for example PCI bus IDE bus SCSI bus and PCMCIA interface bus that use a standard connecter with open specification The buses that do not allow easy access from a user such as a memory bus and CPU bus are excluded 8 25 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 7 Restriction of Reuse of the Copy Even if the stored content is copied bit by bit other device cannot use that copy if the content is encrypted by the local encryption specified in section 7 2 4 of this volume If however the following operation is performed multiple copies may be maliciously created the content is copied to other record medium and then moved the copied content is restored to the source medium and then moved There
205. e message code main body including the recommended display position information the automatic display erasure type the automatic display duration time to 3 and the number of automatic display time 5 24 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 13 2 Related Standards Please refer to the sections listed below for the detail Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 3 3 2 5 Message Information EM ECM Chapter 4 4 2 6 Automatic Display Message Chapter 4 4 3 3 Commands Responses Chapter 4 4 6 Display of EMM Message 1 Display of Automatic Display Message Chapter 4 4 7 3 EMM Message Reception Reference 2 3 11 Reception of EMM and EMM message However the reception by power on control should be supported for 3 11 2 Different forms of EMM and EMM message reception in Reference 2 in Part 1 Please refer to the sections listed below in this volume 5 9 2 EMM Message Transmission Specifications 5 10 Message code for EMM Message Volume 4 30 2 2 2 CA Service Descriptor 4 13 3 Display The display function of automatic display message during program viewing in normal mode is mandatory The message display for the temporary display blended with the program video by the user operation using the EPG or the menu is arbitrarily defined by the receiver In this case it is acceptable to move the display of automatic display message for the EPG display etc to be easily seen However the display of automatic display message should be returned
206. e or event that does not correspond to the CA_system_id obtained by the IC card command response However because there is no description of CA contract information descriptor for free program with content protection in the SDT EIT or it is operated with free CA_mode 0 the error display is not necessary when it is considered that making an reservation is possible even if the CA system id of the broadcast wave and that of the IC card do not match 5 48 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 Operational Information 5 1 Conditional Access Broadcasting Itis the broadcasting that uses a conditional access system descriptor In the conditional access broadcasting there are pay program broadcasting that uses EMM message and free program with content protection 5 2 Charge Unit Chargeable ES The charge unit is each valid ECM At least one component corresponds to one valid ECM 5 3 Non Scramble Scramble 5 3 1 Overview The transport scrambling control field in the TS packet header is referred for the decision on the scramble mode of the component on the receiver side The free CA mode should be used only to determine whether it is pay or free program In addition do not use the scramble or non scramble decision to determine whether it is pay or free program Even if the component is chargeable it is not always scrambled The PMT responsiveness on the sender side and the consistency of time segment on the event Exampl
207. e period when the change is started It is 0 normally 1 Frame identification Used to identify the start of a frame For the first packet of a frame it is set to 1 For the rest itis 0 0 Super frame identification Used to identify the start of a super frame For the first packet of a super frame this is set to 1 For the rest it is 0 1 7 0 Transmission mode slot Used to indicate four types of transmission modes 2 7 0 information modulation method intra coding method and the 3 7 0 number of slots allocated to them 4 7 0 This has the same format as TMCC and can be altered 5 7 0 according to each super frame 6 7 0 TS_id TS identification 7 7 0 When a frame is synthesized a relative TS TS number correspondence table is composed 7 23 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 2 TMCC Operation The operation of TMCC shall conform to 2 9 TMCC Information Configuration in Chapter 2 of ARIB STD B20 This subsection presents detailed guidelines for actual operations 6 2 1 Change instruction The first 5 bits of a TMCC are incremented when the TMCC is changed Increment is implemented in a case where all bits are relevant except transmitting station specification bits for transmission control described in 6 4 Site Diversity Operation When the transmission methods or others are switched the TMCC is updated two super frames before the switch timing of the frame configuration and the change i
208. e program with content protection using this broadcaster identifier value 5 4 3 2 Operation The ECM must be transmitted Also in the PMT only one PID which indicates the valid ECM by the common broadcaster identifier for right protection provided in 5 4 3 2 in this volume must be placed in the first loop If the free program with content protection does not include a chargeable ES in the relevant program No 3 shown in Table 5 4 2 the CA contract information descriptors will not be placed in the SDT or in the EIT If a chargeable ES is included No 4 shown in Table 5 4 2 the CA contract information descriptors will be placed in the SDT or in the EIT Even if the free program with content protection does not include a chargeable ES in the relevant program No 3 shown in Table 5 4 2 the transmission of EMM is basically not necessary because no customer management is involved However the transmission is possible for the purpose of updating Kw etc The operation of EMM message is carried out complying with 5 9 in this volume In the free program with content protection a common value is used for the broadcaster identifier in the relevant program operation Because the receiver manages the EMM message and the power on control based 5 51 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 on each broadcaster identifier when the EMM is transmitted the operation should be carefully executed once the agreement among all broadcasters has been made in
209. e shared common key Level 3 Since this level needs legal admissibility it is recommended to use a certificate issuing authority using a public key cryptosystem 6 59 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 2 Operation of TLS1 0 and SSL3 0 Level 3 Refer to TR B14 Volume 6 8 2 TLS1 0 and SSL3 0 rules 8 Congestion avoidance 8 1 Congestion measures Unlike with the conventional telephone communication bi directional data broadcasting services often generate network congestion For example a public opinion research or ticket purchase linking with a program often causes excessive traffic to the specific center in a short period of time If congestion occurs on the network a program cannot be operated correctly e g transmission from viewers cannot be completed and moreover another communication such as an ordinary telephone system may be affected Therefore it is important to prevent congestion 8 2 Congestion measure at broadcast station When creating a bi directional data broadcasting service program it is necessary to take measures to prevent excessive traffic from viewers For more precise it is recommended to estimate traffic based on a viewer rate entry rate transmission time and reception time and perform the following measures combination is available to avoid congestion if necessary 8 2 1 Call delay Use the following procedure functions in application programs delivered via broadcast wave to change t
210. e time of data transfer Data transfer sequence Refer to 5 3 4 Transmission method Asynchronous full duplex Transmission speed Refer to 5 2 3 1 Flow control RS CS MNP class Refer to 5 2 3 2 Transmission conditions of modem 6 17 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 3 3 Connection and disconnection sequence In order to connect a receiver to a center via a collection network the receiver has to connect to the collection network and send a host number command to identify the center 1 Connection sequence Figure 5 3 shows the normal sequence Ea alleion nenon network Mo Modem ADP ADP SE network EN comer and SE Connection _instruction Originating call Incoming call indication esponse i Handshake pe oanecnon Connection _ completed completed Host number command Remote echo Service signal COM Figure 5 3 Normal sequence 2 Figure 5 4 shows the error sequence wrong host number command Connection instruction Incoming After sending ERR INV Originating call call om EE ia waiting for host number _ indication f Response command and then going to no communication EE Handshake EE monitoring state completed completed Timeout T1 lt EE Note Refer to 5 3 6 for T1 Host number command value Remote echo Service signal ERRAINV A means space Figure 5 4 Error sequence wrong host nu
211. eam is output in the IEC60958 conformant format encryption is not applied If the content availability descriptor is not specified encryption mode is handled as 1 8 11 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 Functional Requirement for the Receiver The receiver described in section 6 1 must not have the following functions for handling the content to be protected which is specified by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors a storage function that is not specified in section 6 5 output function that is not specified in section 6 3 and recording function for the removable record media which is not specified in sections 6 6 and 6 7 This however does not apply to the print data specified by the function described in sections 10 7 1 A and B in Volume 3 Part l 6 1 Subject Devices BS digital receiver When a BS digital receiver has a storage function the function must be implemented according to the relevant rules specified in this volume When a BS digital receiver has a recording function for the removable media the function must be implemented according to the relevant rules specified in this volume The recording function for the removable record media includes the recording via other record storage media Section 8 9 3 provides additional explanation 6 2 Functions for Controlling Copying and Availability Copying and availability of the content is controlled by the digital copy control descriptor a
212. ecifications of Conditional Access System for Digital Satellite Broadcasting esse 5 80 A 8 1 Operation of Multiple Conditional Access Systems e eette sees sesiesesieseeseeeteeseenes 5 80 A 8 2 Concept of Compliance with Part 1 of STD B25 Assumption Heese treet ttre 5 81 B Appendixes srsereeeeseecesseseeeseeneseeteneseeneseeeesesnencenensensacensnsecensasensncecenenseneneeseesessesasencaneetacentacencaseceaseseags 5 85 B 1 Number Assignment Management of CA Alternative Message Number ees see see sesse ees see 5 85 B 2 Contact for Inquiries regarding IC Card ss ere eek ERR ERK R Re RR ek REK Re R REK ReE KEER ee KEER ee Koek ee eR ee 5 85 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 This page is intentionally left Blank vyi ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 1 Introduction 1 1 Foreword The Specifications regarding the conditional access system for digital satellite broadcast receiver are stipulated in Part 1 of the Reception Control System Conditional Access System Access Control Method on Digital Broadcasting ARIB STD B25 Part 1 In this volume the required specifications for receivers and their operational specifications are stipulated based on Part of the ARIB STD B25 to complement it Thus please refer to Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 for the items that are not mentioned in this volume 1 2 Purpose This volume describes based on Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 the required specifications for receivers and the operational informati
213. ed Table B 2 13 Definition of APS information for Video Content Protection System APS Definition 00 APS is Off 01 Type 1 of APS is On 10 Type 2 of APS is On 11 Type 3 of APS is On 8 47 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 8 Requirement for Installing MagicGate Type R for Secure Video Recording MG R SVR for EMPR 1 Table B 2 14 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by MG R SVR for EMPR Table B 2 14 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control for MG R SVR for EMPR Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for MG R SVR for EMPR Copy control T encryption _ f recording mode op control data 1 Recordable as Copy Free Copy control not asserted 00 0 Recordable as Copy Free with applying EPN Asserted Protection_required ji 10 Don ecare Recordable as Copy Oiie Generation with updating CCI to No more copies 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy_control_not_asserted 10 Don t care Not recordable 11 017 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable
214. ed on a caller such as a phone number of caller charging is performed it is desirable to get approval of the caller with an application Error process in delay calling When a busy error and a no carrier error occur in delay calling an application should perform recalling process troubleshooting and necessary error indication Since wrong viewer setting related to a receiver s calling operation may cause such a no carrier error and a busy error an error indication and script should be designed in consideration of this possibility Process in massive calls reception service process In the cut through process of a massive calls reception service a switch may handle those calls as cut calls Therefore if the return value 6 Forcibly disconnected and the return value 8 Line was busy are returned to the application side it should perform the process rated as Success of cut call Time specification of timeout in connect When connect is used for calling timeout setting at the application side should be 90000 ms or more in order to guarantee the operation of return value 5 No carrier detected in case no center response is detected Operation in case where a caller ID notification number is added on BML contents When fixed preferred connection cancellation number and carrier ID number settings are available that fixed preferred connection cancellation number and carri
215. ed or invalid non usable IC card is inserted or when the CA system id listed in the PMT of the relevant program does not match the CA system id obtained by the IC card response normal error processing will be executed instead of judging as non contractual 2 If it is already signed contract non scramble and others go to the reception processing 10 or the reception not possible processing 9 in the normal processing The link descriptor placement of SDT is checked 1 Ifthe link descriptor is placed go to the confirmation processing of service transfer intention 4 2 Ifthe link descriptor is not placed go to the reception not possible processing 9 in the normal processing Note The link descriptor of linkage _type 0x03 indicates a CA alternative service The unique transfer confirmation message of broadcaster which is described in the link descriptor hereinafter referred to as transfer confirmation message or the built in message of the receiver is displayed to confirm the viewer s intention and permission to be transferred to the link service The transfer confirmation message is described in the private_data_byte of the link descriptor When there is no description in the private_data_byte of the link descriptor of the CA alternative service the build in message of the receiver To view this program a contract and a registration are necessary The detailed information can be found in the guide channel is d
216. ed shall be 8 and the individual bit rates shall be within the video encoding rate s range defined in 4 1 2 5 4 TS Operation Guidelines This subsection describes the guidelines for seamless switching in terms of redundant system transmission facility switching So that seamless switching is provided the guidelines below should be followed as far as possible when transmission is performed by a sender It is preferable for a recipient to be able to receive according to the guidelines T 18 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 4 1 Guidelines for senders Guideline T1 1 The GOP phase of the redundant system transmission system shall be matched with that of the main line transmission system as far as possible Guideline T1 2 So that the version number is not changed by redundant switching when the content of processing changes further number change shall be made by a sender Guideline T1 3 duplex packet shall not be used Guideline T1 4 System switching shall be performed preferably while audio is being muted 7 19 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 4 2 Guidelines for receivers Guideline R1 1 Ina case where no error is detected on a transmission system and transport error indicatoris not set discontinuity presented by the continuity index continuity counter shall not cause video audio and others to be muted Guideline R1 2 Extra processing shall n
217. ee kke RR ee RR ee ROER teeeteeeteeeteeeeees sees gee Re eR ee 5 13 4 10 4 Control of PPV Program Purchase Limit sees ese koekoek Re RR ee ROER ROER ROER ROER ROER Re RR Gee Re eR eek ee 5 13 4 10 5 PPV Purchase Record and Its Display sere sere ees RR Roe RR ERK ER ROER ROER ROER ROER ROER ROER Re RR Gee Roe eR ee eR ee 5 14 4 10 6 Charges Based on Components sseriesiesiesiesiesieeeieesieesieesiesseesesssessseesseaseenssenniennien 5 14 4 11 Copy Control on Pay Broadcasting terte essississieeiessecsieeen sees neces ee ER e RR RR Rek RR e RR Roe RR eers 5 15 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 11 1 Recording Control Information esse ese EE Ee EES EER EER Ee Ee EE EE Ee EER GE ee EE Ee ee GE ee ee Ee Ee ee ee ee ees see 5 15 4 11 2 Copy Control on Flat Tier Contracts sesse ses esse se ec Ee Ee Ee ee Ee Ee Ee ee EE ee ee ER ee ee Ee Ee ee EE ee ee ee ee see 5 15 4 11 3 Copy Control 0 0 Nod oe Acree 5 16 4 11 4 Copy Control on Recordable PPV sesse esse tc se eset tect Ee Ee Ee EE ee EE ee Gee GE ee ee Ee GR ee sees sets Ee ee ee ee ees ee 5 16 4 12 Transmission of Viewing History Information ese eee 5 21 4 12 1 Function Overview ss rrr see see se ees see EE ee ec Ee cee GE Ee sees Ee Ee ee EE ee ee ER ee EE Ee ee ease eens Ee Re ee EE ee ee ee ee ees ese 5 21 4 12 2 Retry Over Notification Function rr treet etre tet ses es se ttt Ee Ee ee ee ee Ee Re ee EE ee ee eee sees eens Ee Ee ee ee ee ee see 5 21 4 12 3 User Call in Request FUNCtION rere EE EE EE EE EE
218. eeR REK ReeRReeR Re R Re R Re RR e RR ese 7 14 Sii Definition GE ES PS ene EG Ke N Reine ine ge ee E 7 14 5 1 2 Maximum number of ES transmissions per single service ere esse ese ees sees ese esse sere ee 7 14 s1 3 DERE RS oe ede SE Es DE ve es GE GR EE N N Se ee ee GE ee 7 15 52 Detailed Operation of MPEG2 Systems reer srs erst se R Sek KERR eek Rek REK REK REK ReeR REK Re eR Re ERK Re RR 7 15 Sk Denion GE ED EG ee N ee EDE ve GO EDE ie SEN 7 15 22 Synchronization of video audio and subtitles testes eects tees ee ERGE RR ee Reese 7 16 5 2 3 Multiplexing of EPG and data eeeeeeeeeeeeteetreettereteettetttettttttttttttetttttttttttttetttetetetetettteereetetet 7 16 5 2 4 Operation of the PAT and NIT eeeeeeseeeeetettettterttetteettetttettttttttttttttttttttttitttttteitttitttetttt 7 16 5 2 5 Handling the PMT and ES ss ssseseseseeseeseeseeeseeesieesseesseesseesseesieesieesiessieessessseesseeneeesen 7 17 ed AE OES maximi bitrates niee OO A 7 17 53 Multiplexing of TS cress esis KERR ER KERR ERR KERR nnnn nininini nnne 7 18 ESE OE Ee Ed ee Ee N EE 7 18 SOO EE rd IE RE EE EE a 7 18 533 Statistical multiplexing eee eee ROER REK RARR Rae RR eRRReeRReeRReeR REK ReeRReeRReeRReeRReeRReeRReeR Re 7 18 TEE TE EE 7 18 BAN SE le AO RE ER DE OT EE 7 19 S43 Guidelines orreee EA N N EE EE EN 720 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 Transmission Line Encoding and Modulation cevrrrrrrrereree ec et ee te eee ees enen ewes 7 21 6 1 TS Synthesis EE eee ree eee reer
219. eees seas seesseas sees seassessiesniessiesniensiesseensen 5 2 4 Required Specifications of Receivers isis sees eess seas eenssensseas seas GER ROER KERR EER EER eRR EER EER ee Rees 5 4 ARE EE Se EE Beene OR EO EE EE EE ER IE N 5 4 A IEE Taitestpa cea RR AE EL EE EE EA 5 6 KEN V iTe S 5 7 44 LE 5 8 AS Poweron Conio so See EO OT AE Nia et oneb duo 5 8 ET Finen O ERGE eee he Oe uP alent N ee ee 5 8 MES VREES Sn ER GEE Me EE N EG E Gea ate osetia ad Mie ee Ee Carbo 5 9 AG Poweron Callan Conteh ee ME ME EAE A 5 9 AGT Funcion Overview ER AA OE RE 5 9 A63 Belated ES Re srk ER N 5 10 4 7 Operation Priority during Standby sere seeks eek EER R GER Roe RR ee etetett terret Geek ee Roe RR RR Rek RR GER Reese eens 5 10 4 8 Viewing Control for Free and Pay Programs with Content Protection ee ee ees ees ees ees 5 10 4 8 1 Viewing EE 5 10 RA Pehed SA ELE RE tvs ed unk pa ie sn deh a Tee wien Oss ape 5 11 4 9 Pay Program Reservation eeeeee etetett etttreetstereetett teretere ntet etttttrrresesne netet eett reserse netnet 5 11 ACT ENUO OVENI oe AA EE AE EE EE 5 11 4 92 Cancellation of Reserved Program sss RR GEE ROER RR eitt E RR EER KERR RE RR ttet Re Reese ese eens 5 12 ADR Related S Anata est neo wey ott ae evince EE Ee 5 12 4 10 PPV Viewing Processing sss iesiee ies iessiesnessesnessesneenesnesnesniesnesnenniessieaiesniesnien 5 12 RR EE OG EE ER rere tee 5 12 ALTOS Related S EP ER Ee N EE N Ee 5 13 4 10 3 Control of PPV Monthly Purchase Limit esse
220. elated StandardS etes ee EER See ER EER EE ER ee ER EER Ee ER ee ee Re ee ENE Ee ee ER ee eN ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ees 5 33 4 16 Valid lnvalid Non usable IC Card eters ees ee ER ENS ee ER ee ER ER ee ee ee Re ee ee ee Nee eek ee ee Nee ee 5 33 4 17 Display of IC Card Information ss1sseeees esses eeereeieseeneeseeneeneeseennenseseceneneaeeseeneeneeneeneens 5 33 4 17 1 Function Overviews e sees ee ee see ER a ER ee EER ee ee ee RENE ee ee ER ee eN Re ee ee ee ee ee ese eke ee 5 33 4 17 2 Related StandardS testes Ee e ee ee Gee ee Re ee ENE ee ee ER ee eN ee ees ee ee ee ee ee ees 5 34 ETE ETE OE ee 5 34 4 18 1 EE OT EE ee 5 34 4 18 2 Related OE iiie ae aoa a aa irene dei aata E eNe Eaa Eea Eae eti 5 39 4 19 Operation When Valid IC Card Is Not Inserted eters seek EER ER ER ERGER R EER EE RE ERGER ER GEKEER GER ee Roe Reese ees 5 39 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 19 1 Error Message Display When Valid IC Card Is Not Inserted vevevevevenennnenereeenree 5 39 4 19 2 Pre Registered Phase Conditions When IC Card Is Not Inserted on Sender Side 5 40 BGS Haas aac cen Sec EE ELLA EA AE 5 40 4 20 System Test ssssrsssssesssesseeessseesssessssseeseseeseessssesnessnessnsesssesseesssesnsessnscssnseessesseessnesneessnnessnsessenensy 5 40 MOA IC ei AO ER N a Mea EE 5 40 MD DP AC OOI bee ae AE EE N a cea Sten Aes 5 40 AL EDE Transmissions ata a a a e earners AG tae aes 5 40 AO OA Alternative Sevice ae EA RE E 5 41 TESE Function Overview ae A DR De E E A ee 5 41 4
221. ements Requi t equiremen described in Appendix B 2 9 Content protection system or recording Advanced Access Content System AACS format HD DVD Recordable Rewritable HD DVD Video Applied media recording format Recording Poma Applied service TV service and data service Advanced Access Content System License Administrator LLC AACS LA LLC Disney Technology Operations and Licensing Intel GF Inc International Business Machines Corporation Licenser Microsoft Corporation Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America SCA IPLA Holdings Inc Sony Toshiba America Information Systems Inc Warner Bros Entertainment Inc Contact http www aacsla com To be installed according to the requirements Requi t equi remen described in Appendix B 2 10 Content protection system or recording Advanced Access Content System AACS format Blu ray Disc Rewritable Media Blu ray Disc Recordable Media Blu ray Disc Rewritable Format Ver 2 and Ver 3 both versions include miner version number Applied media recording format Applied service TV service and data service Advanced Access Content System License Administrator LLC AACS LA LLC Disney Technology Operations and Licensing UH Intel GF Inc International Business Machines Corporation Licenser Microsoft Corporation Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America SCA IPLA Holdings Inc Sony
222. ent group requires content protection protection Pay program or free program Free Free Free Free Pay ES to be charged x O x O O Free CA_mode 0 0 0 0 1 Content protection Default ES None None Available Available Available group ES other than None Available Available Available Available default 1 2 TS packet header Default ES 00 00 10 11 10 11 10 11 4 group ES other than 00 10 11 1 10 11 5 10 11 5 10 11 5 default Charging Default ES None None None None Chargeable group ES other than None Chargeable None Chargeable Chargeable default ECM transmission None Required Required Required Required EMM transmission Transmittable Required Transmittable Required Required EMM 3 message Broadcaster group Common ID for Common ID for Unique identifier Default ES copyright copyright broadcaster group protection protection group ID Unique Contains ECM Unique Unique ES other than broadcaster valid only in broadcaster broadcaster default group ID the first loop of group ID group ID PMT Remarks This eventis Free program This event is Free program Non with Non with chargeable chargeable chargeable ES chargeable ES rJ 2 3 4 XS ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 For the program whose default ES group is free the program defined as a free program if the component other than the default ES group is handled as PPV and the default ES group is not scrambled the components that are not the default ES gro
223. eo source having the 16 9 aspect ratio is added with black fields at the top and bottom letter box format value C shall be 3 4 of value A Table 4 1 1 Transmission with different aspect ratios Sequence Sequence Sequence Header parameters extension display extension T parameters parameters ype vertical horizontal aspect 1 DEER display display size value size value l ratio_ P oe vertical horizontal A information size C _ size D 1080 1080 io 1 720 480 480 2 480 1 aspect ratio information 2 4 3 display 3 16 9 display 2 progressive sequence 0 interlace system 1 noninterlace system 7 8 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 lt Colorimetry gt Follow the standard provided in 2 1 Video signal in Chapter 2 in Part 1 of ARIB STD B32 lt Encoding area gt Follow the standard provided in 5 2 Desirable encoding areas in Chapter 5 in Part 1 of ARIB STD B32 4 1 2 MPEG2 Video operation details lt Coding system Follow the standards provided in Chapter 3 Video Coding System and Chapter 4 Video Compression Procedure Transmission Procedure and Signal Configuration after Coding in Part 1 of ARIB STD B32 lt Restrictions on coding parameters gt Follow the standard provided in Chapter 5 Restrictions on Coding Parameters in Part 1 of ARIB STD B32 In a case where a display area is specified with sequence display extension frame center hori
224. equired when they are used Table 1 2 Characteristics of key storing area Center Device user Environment of area where a High security can be set Be vulnerable to attack device is settled p aaa ee Tn RE ee ese eed Management on entrance and Strict management is Impossible to manage Me exit _ MT oe EE AG IR EE EE Operator education and Strict management is Impossible to manage management possible Physical resistance Moderate Most important item tamper registrant Possible to supplement by Impossible to supplement by other Po other items tte 6 71 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Chassis structure of device Needing a certain level of Very important Ee RE AI ei ar CONSIderation ese AIR ANETE AEAEE Wire circuit on the board Same as above If a chassis structure is weak consider this item Signal terminal Same as above Same as above LSI structure Same as above Same as above Difficulty level to read software Same as above If a physical resistance level is low a consider this item Difficulty level to analyze Same as above Same as above firmware and program Access restriction to memory Same as above Same as above In addition IFPS PUB 140 1 classifies conditions that need to satisfy the security requirement level into 4 step IFPS PUB 140 1 security requirements for cryptographic modules http www 09 nist gov div897 pubs fip140 1 htm 1 2 Key creation key
225. er Data communication adapter for mobile phone PHS PIAFS Scope of the protocol definition Figure 5 2 Bi directional data broadcasting service system 5 3 1 Protocol conditions Table 5 5 shows protocol conditions Table 5 5 Protocol conditions Item Setting conditions Transmission type Alternate communication by ENQ and EOT Returning Acknowledgment or Negative Acknowledgment for every Deli tificati ES VOED telegraphic message Resend control Resending Negative Acknowledgment and resending on no reply Max transmission text length 2048 byte No communication mg EET Dis No communication monitoring timer monitoring 5 3 2 Transmission conditions Table 5 6 shows transmission conditions of modem at the time of connection and data transfer 6 16 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Table 5 6 Receiver transmission conditions Item Setting condition Remark Data length character 8 bit Transmission length conditions at the time Parity None of connection Stop bit 1 bit Transmission code system JIS C6220 8 unit code Local echo back None Remote echo back is available Receiver Collection network Sending CR only Lee Kedoon Collection network Receiver Sending CR LF Transmission separator CR 0D H code code Line feed code LF 0A H code Input correction code BS 08 H code Transmission LSB MSB bit LSB First conditions at th
226. er ID number must be reproduced in the BML contents and also order sequence of dial numbers must be guaranteed However case of a phone number for which a carrier ID number cannot be added is excluded This function is applicable for receivers that come to market after version 2 2 revision of this document and applied to all receivers that come to market as a new model one year after the revision Indication of user ID and password Level 3 When a calling function is used for connection in BML contents a user ID and a password must not be 6 38 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El shown to a viewer 10 Usage restriction of ISP connection information Level 3 When a calling function is used for connection in BML contents ISP connection information must be used only within that BML contents and not be stored in a receiver persistently 11 Operation of setISPParams Level 3 This parameter operates only in the data broadcasting reception state The arguments of this function have following restrictions The maximum length of character string in this argument is 64 digit 128 byte 1 argument ispname 6 argument nameServer1 Set an empty character string to skip this argument 7 argument nameServer2 Set an empty character string to skip this argument 11 argument status value From non specified state 1 depending on broadcasting operator s operation with this function No restrictio
227. er layers than the physical layer The original style was text communication between a remote host and tele terminal Preferred net A line type that a user selects when multiple line types e g PSTN mobile phone are available for a receiver Reserved confirmation number Numbers issued to manage cancellation change issue inquiry and other operations for one reservation when a user reserves a ticket on the network Congestion When excessive traffic that is over the unit time capacity is concentrated on a telephone switchboard the telephone lines go dead Many people try to call repeatedly until they can get though and congestion gets worse 6 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 System configuration and connection type of bi directional data broadcasting service information This chapter explains communication systems and connection types necessary to realize bi directional services 4 1 System configuration Figure 4 1 shows a conceptual diagram of bi directional data broadcasting service EE Satellite Bi directional data broadcasting service operator Leased line etc Center Center Host ADSL FTTH Level 3 CATV l Figure 4 1 Conceptual diagram of bi directional data broadcasting service Access point 4 2 Facility associated with bi directional data broadcasting service operator A bi directional data broadcasting service operator has a co
228. erations that a center performs when possible Use access rights control to restrict people who can readout or register the viewer information to manage the viewer information of which privacy should be protected 4 Level 3 Functions and operations that a center performs when possible If it is unavoidably necessary to connect to another network such as the Internet in order to enhance a service setup a firewall to prevent leakage of the viewer information 7 1 3 Tamper resistance function It is recommended to equip a function that can detect a tamper in the communication path 7 1 4 Signature function Table 7 4 shows items that should be considered as signature function and security level of each item 6 58 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Table 7 4 Signature function level Security level Major application Reguired module system example feature Level 3 Digital signature Information exchange Public key cryptosystem needing legal certificate issuing authority admissibility Level 2 Substitution of common Common key Common key cryptosystem key cryptosystem cryptosystem independent signature authority Level 1 Simple signature One way function Common key cryptosystem message application method Memo of check number The functions within heavy line frame show a range that basic receivers or standard services should 1 2 3 4 support when possible Level 0 Example Tic
229. erver 6 Improving the design of BML contents avoiding the long time reservation 9 Troubleshooting 9 1 Receiver s action at power off Specification A Receivers should open a DC circuit immediately when power is shut off during communicating 10 Contingency plan 10 1 Functions for emergency situations Specification B If an emergency such as a massive disaster occurs while a bi directional data broadcasting service is provided or planned the following function in Table 10 1 are necessary to secure important communication line for disaster prevention and to transfer viewers to emergency communication Table 10 1 Functions at emergency in a time of disaster Function It is recommended that it can control broadcast wave to abort or stop a bi directional data broadcasting service Broadcast station It is recommended that it can control broadcast wave to disable new communication Itis recommended that it can disable new communication responding to broadcast wave control Receiver 6 63 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 11 Related regulations and rights 11 1 Related regulations Related regulations that should be taken into consideration when providing a bi directional data broadcasting service are shown below 11 1 1 Considerable regulations for emergency response 1 Telecommunications Business Law Article 8 Reservation of important communication line 11
230. es beside the service ids represent button allocation examples that may be referred when incorporating a one touch button function that allows channel selection with a single touch of a button However actual implementation should depend on product planning Note 2 Television broadcasters have not been certified for consignment broadcasting business of radio broadcasting services but the relevant service_ids are shown in square brackets to indicate that other broadcasters cannot use the service_ids in the ranges Note 3 service_ids reconfiguration in July 2011 7 58 The allocation of service id 908 to BS i Incorporated will be temporarily conducted until ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 2 3 broadcaster id list Table 8 2 3 BS digital broadcasting broadcaster id list as of April 1 2007 broadcaster id Consignment Broadcaster 0x01 Japan Broadcasting Corporation 0x02 B S NIPPON CORPORATION 0x03 Asahi Satellite Broadcasting Limited 0x04 BS i Incorporated 0x05 B S Japan Corporation 0x06 Fuji Satellite Broadcasting Inc 0x07 WOWOW INC 0x08 STAR CHANNEL INC 0x09 Not used Note 7 OXOA Not used Note 2 0x0B Not used Note 5 0x0C WORLD INDEPENDENT NETWORKS JAPAN Inc 0x0D Not used Note 3 OXOE WX24 OXOF The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting 0x10 Not used Note 8 0x11 Not used Note 4 0
231. est broadcasting is finished the emergency information descriptor shall be deleted from the PMT at the timing when the TMCC bit becomes 0 1 27 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 4 Site Diversity Operation 6 4 1 Idea about site diversity operation Site diversity refers to the operation method for securing lines through operations from another uplink station when an uplink station cannot secure lines due to heavy rain For BS digital broadcasting the following two uplink stations are used and uplink from other terrestrial stations including mobile ones is not performed unlike present analog satellite broadcasting Main station Tokyo Shibuya Sub station Saitama Shobu During site diversity operation it is difficult to seamlessly match the main and sub stations career frequency and phase and frequency of the modulation signal and phase just before and after switching Therefore besides the implementation of the method for minimizing the differences between the main and sub stations such a function shall be equipped that a receiver is notified of operation beforehand through the method described below It is desirable that a receiver has a function for minimizing the occurrence of disturbance to signals such as freezing and muting ones just before and after site diversity operation 6 4 2 Signal processing just before and after site diversity operation An uplink station cannot perform processing such as the content change of
232. esulting in the failure of the PPV automatic purchase The error message during the retry is not necessary If the automatic purchase operation is ultimately failed some indication is considered necessary and its method is arbitrarily defined by the receiver 79 357 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 3 The error which indicates that the relevant data is not available Code A101 Cause of the error Response of the receiver 4 Other errors Code AIFE Cause of the error Response of the receiver 5 Call in is not possible Code 11FF Cause of the error Response of the receiver No relevant data The relevant data which should correspond to the automatic display message display information acquisition command the call in date and time request command and the power on control information request command do not exist in the card Even if the information does not exist it is not an error in any way because whether the information exists or not differs among the operations of the broadcasting stations or the individual contract conditions Error codes and error messages are not displayed Other errors The error is caused by a rule violation due to the failure of broadcasting station or receiver Error codes and error messages should not be displayed except when such error code was caused by the command in which Ks is returned from the IC card such as the ECM reception command and the PPV program purch
233. etion is displayed after the password deletion is arbitrarily defined by the receiver 4 15 4 Non Restricted Condition If the restriction is temporary cancelled subsequent to password validation after the password and the parental level were set the restricted condition will return when the power is turned off including turning off by a remote control or when the channel is switched if nothing else 4 15 5 Information Display of Viewing Restricted Program The information of restricted program such as the program name etc is displayed on the EPG 5 32 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 15 6 Related Standards Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 4 4 2 3 Program Viewing Chapter 4 4 2 4 Program Reservations Optional Chapter 4 4 2 11 1 Password Settings Chapter 4 4 2 11 2 Parental Level Setting Reference 2 3 17 Password deletion Reference 2 3 18 Parental control 4 16 Valid Invalid Non usable IC Card The valid IC card means an IC card that obtains the responses of ca system id and system management id described in Volume 7 in this document by the initial setting condition command mentioned in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 The invalid IC card means an IC card that does not satisfy the valid IC card condition mentioned above or an IC card whose card type is 00 prepaid card it is not operated When the return codes are AIFF and A102 the card is classified as non usab
234. etransmission The output that leads Internet retransmission which is specified in section 6 4 of this volume indicates the output to Internet and the output that can be output to the device connectable to Internet such as a modem and LAN interface 8 5 Detailed Installation Method According to the Installation Standard for the Content Protection Function The following sections describes the detailed installation methods that satisfies the installation standard for the content protection function and assumes the tolerance level at which a user cannot bypass the protection or manipulate the content using a tool and technology normally accessible by the general user 8 5 1 Functional Structure for the Receiver When the content and control signals to be protected which are described in section 7 1 2 of this volume run through each component in the receiver they must be appropriately protected from malicious extraction and copying regardless of whether the component is an integrated circuit software module or combination of the both Because of this each component of the following functions must be designed and manufactured to be specialized and linked or integrated so that a malicious attempt such as bypassing the protection system and manipulating the content is prevented the content protection function including the output control and copy control and the receiver s MPEG decoder function 8 5 2 Level of Content Protection Th
235. f receiver It is desirable to install LEDs etc in a receiver s main body to notify the status of power on control power on call in control and telephone line use due to calling the center 4 2 User Interface The details of user interface are left to product planning Hence the display screen described in the Procedure of Part 1 4 Receiver Technical Specifications in the ARIB STD B25 is an example for better understanding Automatic display messages will be superimposed The use of numeric keypad on the remote control is generally expected to input passwords etc However 5_6 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 input using a graphic keyboard on the screen is acceptable and this document does not define it particularly 4 3 Memory The necessary NVRAM for conditional access services is as follow 1 2 3 4 It should be 8 KB or more for mail reception This is the required size for storing 10 or more pieces of mail with 800 bytes at most per mail For recycling mail ID it is necessary to store 7 message IDs and reception time per one broadcaster and it should be 32 or more broadcasters For power on control management or power on call in control for each broadcaster 32 records at most additional memory may be required depending on the receiver s design as described in 3 12 2 Specific Examples of Power on Control in Reference 2 in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 However the size and the installin
236. f the message code main body exists the first byte should be recommended display position See 5 10 6 Recommended Display Position of Automatic Display Message in this volume The recommended display position specifies the display position of automatic display message IC card stored message It is not valid for mail IRD stored message and the receiver ignores it The detailed meanings of the recommended display position are provided in 5 10 6 Recommended Display Position of Automatic Display Message in this volume The main body consists of the characters from the second byte to the one before NULL NULL cannot be in the main body The inserter 0x1A is described at the point where the byte sequence specified by the differential information is inserted The several 0x1A inserters can be in the common message However 800 bytes for mail and 400 bytes for automatic display message should not be exceeded after merging with the message code of the individual message The message code of the EMM common message which has the fixed phase number pointed out by the EMM individual message must be the same character code as the message code of the EMM individual message 5 10 3 Differential Information Format of EMM Individual Message for Differential Format Number 0X01 It specifies the character string to be inserted as differential information The main body consists of the characters from the first byte to the one before NULL NULL can
237. f their values image constraint token l retention mode 0 and retention state 111 For details see Volume 4 in Part 1 To use DTCP for the digital TV service emergency video service data service emergency data service and bookmark list data service DTCP descriptor must be inserted To use DTCP to output the digital audio service and emergency audio service to the IP interface DTCP audio descriptor must be inserted 8 13 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 6 1 Output control by the digital copy control descriptor and content availability descriptor Content High speed digital interface Digital control copy ilabili desctibt availability ptor descriptor vs 4 3 us Serial interface IP interface Analog video Digital audio output output digital _ copy recording encryption control _ control ode MPEG_TS IEC60958 MPEG TS type data Ao Not Not CGMS A 00 Soms 1 encrypted Macrovision 1 encrypted encrypted off 4 Copy free 00 CGMS A 00 0 Mode B 1 Not Mode DO 5 Macrovision EMS encrypted off 4 Copy free CGMS A 10 SCMS 01 10 Don t care Mode B 1 Mode B Mode BO 6 Macrovision Copy one off 4 generation CGMS A 11 SCMS 01 Don t care Mode C 1 Mode C Mode C0 Macrovision Copy never APS CGMS A 11 SCMS 11 Don t care Mode A 1 Mode C Mode A0 7 Macrovision Copy never APS f Not Not Not CGMS A 00 scms 00 Don
238. fer to Table 7 4 1 2 Except section 1 13 to 1 18 and section 2 94 Alphanumerical 1 byte code Alphanumerical group specified in ARIB STD B 24 Refer to Table 7 5 The record length of each block of the shared area for all operators in NVRAM is variable length In case of executing readPersistentArray writePersinstentArray specify the field type shown in Table 6 5 to the argument structure Hiragana names and Kanji names Describe a name in the Hiragana name field and Kanji name field In case of performing registration procedure from registration change contents the writing of Hiragana names is required and the writing of Kanji names is optional Input in the Kanji name field is available only when the input of Kanji is possible Insert a full width space between the family name and first name for both names in the Hiragana name field and Kanji name field Kanji address Input in the Kanji address field is available only when the input of Kanji is possible In case of performing registration procedure from registration change contents the writing of Hiragana address is required and the writing of Kanji address is optional Relation between postal codes and addresses Since prefecture names and city government names can be skipped in the address field always check that a postal code has been input before execution Character types of each block of the shared area for all operators Do not use
239. fer to the specified service a pA 6 Intention No to sign a contract Yes Vv Vv Vv 7 Contract processing 8 CA alternative service 9 Reception not 10 Reception completion processing possible processing processing Viewing possible Viewing not possible Viewing not possible Viewing possible Specified processing by data contents Normal processing Figure 4 22 1 Example of CAAlternative Service Process Flow 1 The viewer selects the relevant channel service 2 In the same way as the normal channel selection operation the contract condition is confirmed by the ECM 1 Ifthere is no contract go to the CA alternative service processing 3 and later No contract means that the received program is scrambled broadcasting and the return code from the IC card for the ECM reception command falls into one of those listed in the table below Table 4 22 1 Return Codes for No Contract Return code Detailed status A103 Non contractual No Kw 8901 Non contractual Outside of contract tier 8902 Non contractual Expired tier 8301 Non contractual Outside of contract pay later PPV 8302 Non contractual Expired pay later PPV 8501 Non contractual Outside of contract advance payment PPV 8502 Non contractual Expired advance payment PPV 5 42 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 When IC card is not insert
240. for certain purposes such as updating Kw or notifying the introduction period to the recipient It is the transport_scrambling control field in the TS packet header When the default ES group is scrambled for the operation or when the components of caption and superimposed characters are scrambled for the operation the ECM _ PID is the same as the ECM _ PID of the default ES group Also even if the default ES group is in a scrambled condition the non scrambled operation is possible for the caption and the superimposed character with the component tag value of 0x30 0x3F and the data component of 0x40 0x7F which excludes the default ES group In this case invalid ECM_PID Ox1FFF is placed in the relevant ES in the second loop of the PMT 5 53 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 5 4 3 Possible Combinations of Scramble Non scramble Operations No existence No second loop Default ES group dk Scramble for content Scramble for pay protection program O O O S Non scramble 1 None 1 Common right protection 1 Unique broadcaster Eb 2 None 2 PID 0x 1 FFF 2 PID 0x 1 FFF N O m i N ponent ae 1 Common right protection x amp P 2 None 3 O O O 3 Scramble for pay 1 None 1 Common right protection 1 Unique broadcaster g program 2 Unique 2 Unique broadcaster 2 None kz broadcaster O O O O 1 None 1 Common right protection 1 Unique broadcaster O Ope
241. fore this demodulation system need not be taken into account when consumer use receivers are designed The carrier synchronizing circuit of a receiver must not be designed on an assumption that modulation is not performed Such an idea has been discussed that compared with modulated one fixed value burst not modulated allows more improvement of the limit CN through the circuit configuration that improves the performance of carrier synchronization and such an instance has been reported that differences in several dB occurred on test equipment However this can be considered as a discussion about the excessive performance field in terms of the minimum CN s service BPSK 1 2 for example improvement from 0 dB to 2 dB Moreover the difference is possibly affected also by the carrier synchronization configuration method Therefore if a receiver is designed on an assumption that modulation is not performed at the early period of BS digital broadcasting start it is probable that burst carrier play has problems in a case where modulation is performed in the future The carrier synchronization circuit of a receiver shall not be designed on an assumption that modulation is not performed 7 31 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 Operation 7 1 Operation of Hierarchical Modulation The purpose of hierarchical modulation is to prevent disconnection due to rainfall from occurring earlier than analog broadcasting at the time of transm
242. fore to prevent such malicious attempt appropriate protection must be applied to restrict the reuse of the content 8 8 Example of the Attempt to be Prohibited in Other Information Management The malicious attempt described in section 7 2 3 3 of this volume includes manipulating the copy control information in the digital copy control descriptor digital recording control data or DTCP descriptor as follows changing the status from Copy Never or No More Copies to Copy Freely or Copy One Generation to enable copying changing from Copy One Generation to Copy Freely to enable copying without limitation 8 9 Digital Recording of the Content to the Removable Record Media 8 9 1 Contact for Authorizing the Method Engineering Committee the Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting http www dpa or jp 8 9 2 Limit of the Number of Copies Recordable to the Removable Media The limit of the number of copies specified here does not apply to the storage of the content described in section 6 5 of this volume Recording as a backup is performed in preparation for the restoration of the content in case the record media or the drive is damaged and the backup is not accessible by a user unless for the restoration One example is the RAID system that records data into multiple hard disks to increase data security 8 9 3 Recording Function to the Removable Record Media The receiver with the recording function
243. formation call in control for updating EMM or collecting viewing information For example in the case of EMM power on control the relevant EMM is received while receiving the subscribed service at the first time of subscription After that the subsequent EMM update timing can be determined by the response of the IC card making the power saving design for the time gap until the next EMM reception possible In order to achieve the operation mentioned above the receiver needs timer function calendar function which counts absolute time Please refer to the sections listed below for the detail ARIB STD B25 Part 1 Reference 2 3 1 Power saving Reference 2 3 2 Timer 4 5 Power on Control 4 5 1 Function Overview This is a function to receive EMM from the specified network and transport stream at the specified time during the power on control period specified by the EMM by turning on the circuit power at least for the EMM reception when entering standby mode with sub power off not the AC off but the condition that the power is turned off by a remote control The power on control is set for each broadcaster 32 records at most If those power on control periods overlap the reception control will be sequentially conducted for all broadcasters In addition even if the power on control is interrupted the schedule management for all broadcasters will be evenly carried out in order to avoid that the reception control concentrates into a certain bro
244. from 100 yen to 1 000 yen In addition the function to set it as unlimited no purchase limit should be equipped The step size of the setting amount is arbitrarily defined by the receiver but approximately 100 yen to 500 yen can be used as rough guide for it Besides this step size is not necessary to be a single size For example it can be set as 100 yen when the limit is 1 000 yen or less and as 500 yen when the limit is 1 000 yen or more The settings at the time of factory shipping are arbitrarily defined by the receiver 5 13 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 10 5 PPV Purchase Record and Its Display Please refer to Part 1 2 2 2 22 Recording and Display of Purchased PPV Programs and Part 1 Reference 2 3 20 PPV purchase record and its indication in the ARIB STD B25 This function is a manufacturer option Listing the total amount of fee and purchase amount on the screen of purchase record display is arbitrarily defined by the receiver The time of purchase program is defined as the stating time of the program year the last 2 digits month day hour minute The displays of year and minute are arbitrarily defined by the receiver When installing this function PPV purchase record should be stored in the NVRAM 4 10 6 Charges Based on Component 4 10 6 1 When Default ES Group Is Chargeable When the default ES group a pair of video and audio ES if the service type is digital TV and audio ES if th
245. g WORLD INDEPENDENT NETWORKS VHF broadcasting JAPAN Inc 0 25 slot WORLD INDEPENDENT NETWORKS Data broadcasting JAPAN Inc 0 25 slot 46 B S Japan Corporation HDTV SDTV broadcasting broadcasting 47 48 The Association for Promotion of Digital Data broadcasting Broadcasting Table 8 3 3 13 channel 11 95764 GHz slot allocation list Slot No Consignment Broadcaster Service 1 7 SDTV broadcasting sin B S NIPPON CORPORATION ri DE a broadcasting broadcasting 16 22 SDTV broadcasting 23 30 SDTV broadcasting 31 38 wi HDTV SDTV Fuji Satellite Broadcasting Inc broadeastitig broadcasting 39 44 SDTV broadcasting 45 46 B S NIPPON CORPORATION HDTV SDTV broadcasting broadcasting 47 Fuji Satellite Broadcasting Inc 0 5 slot HDTV SDTV broadcasting broadcasting WX24 0 5 slot Data broadcasting 48 WxX24 Data broadcasting 1 64 Table 8 3 4 15 channel 11 99600 GHz slot allocation list ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Slot No Consignment Broadcaster Service 1 6 STAR CHANNEL INC SDTV broadcasting 7 12 Japan Broadcasting Corporation SDTV broadcasting 13 20 SDTV broadcasting 21 42 Japan Broadcasting Corporation HDTV broadcasting 43 46 Not used 4 slot 47 48 Nippon BS Broadcasting Corporation Data broadcasting 7 65 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Appendix List of the identifiers to be used when BS 9 ch digital broadcasting is started on December 2007 8 2 Identifier Li
246. g SDTV broadcasting 38 44 SDTV broadcasting 45 WOWOW INC HDTV broadcasting SDTV broadcasting 46 B S Japan Corporation HDTV broadcasting SDTV broadcasting 47 WOWOW INC HDTV broadcasting SDTV broadcasting 48 B S Japan Corporation HDTV broadcasting SDTV broadcasting Appendix table 8 3 3 9 channel 11 88092 GHz slot allocation list Slot No Consignment Broadcaster Service 1 18 Nippon BS Broadcasting Corporation HDTV broadcasting 19 33 STAR CHANNEL INC HDTV broadcasting 34 48 World Hi Vision Channel Inc HDTV broadcasting Appendix table 8 3 4 13 channel 11 95764 GHz slot allocation list Slot No Consignment Broadcaster Service 1 7 SDTV broadcasting 8 15 B S NIPPON CORPORATION HDTV broadcasting SDTV broadcasting 16 22 SDTV broadcasting 23 30 SDTV broadcasting 31 38 Fuji Satellite Broadcasting Inc HDTV broadcasting SDTV broadcasting 39 44 SDTV broadcasting 45 46 B S NIPPON CORPORATION HDTV broadcasting SDTV broadcasting 47 48 Fuji Satellite Broadcasting Inc HDTV broadcasting SDTV broadcasting 7 73 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Appendix table 8 3 5 15 channel 11 99600 GHz slot allocation list Slot No Consignment Broadcaster Service 1 9 Japan Broadcasting Corporation SDTV broadcasting 10 20 SDTV broadcasting 21 42 Japan Broadcasting Corporation HDTV broadcasting 43 44 The Association for Promotion of Digital Data broadcasting Broadcasting 45 WORLD INDEPENDENT NETWO
247. g means are arbitrarily defined by the receiver As a manufacturer option function purchase history should be stored in the NVRAM if 4 10 5 PPV Purchase Record and Its Display in this volume is installed The deletion function of personal information related to the conditional access and stored in the NVRAM should be equipped from the prospective of protecting preventing the leakage of personal information used in the CAS in case of transferring or disposing the receiver When password is set it is desirable to erase delete the personal information related to the conditional access after the password is input The related description can be found in 4 13 10 Clear Function of Personal Information in Volume 2 in this document Regarding the functions stipulated in this volume the personal information that should be erased is as follow 1 2 3 PPV related information i PPV monthly purchase limit See 4 10 3 in this volume ii Single PPV program purchase limit See 4 10 4 in this volume iii PPV purchase record See 4 10 5 in this volume EMM Mail See 4 14 in this volume Parental control related information i Parental level See 4 15 2 in this volume 1 Password See 4 15 3 in this volume 5 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 44 Power Saving In digital satellite broadcasting conditional access system power on control and power on call in control are adopted in order to save power on viewing history in
248. ge contents must not provide operation and function to switch the order of names When some names are deleted handle their fields as an empty field Even when any name is registered after that empty field their orders are not moved forward It is recommended to avoid registering the same person twice in each name field If each broadcaster additionally registers data in the eight name fields of the shared area at random it may cause a shortage of number of fields and confusion of management Therefore when a new name is registered a method to prevent double registration is required Examples are shown below 1 Display a list of names up to eight names in the shared area at the first step of the new name registration procedure and make only names that have not been registered in each center selectable Let a viewer select a name to be registered If there is no name that has not been registered in each name field display the direct input field only when an empty name field is available in the shared 6 46 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El area 2 When a name to be registered does not exist in the list let the viewer push the new name registration button and display the input field only when an empty name field is available in the shared area 3 Normal registration sequence follows When the center side registers customers with method other than the registration update contents it is recommended to eguip the f
249. ge sales as well as member stores of the credit company 6 87 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 5 Other payment 2 5 1 Prepaid network type payment Figure 2 4 shows an example of prepaid payment network type Prepaid operator Ss cy ly Saat Collection network Broadcast Access point station Scope of prepaid payment Receiver Public network etc Figure 2 4 Prepaid payment 1 Service outline a The center manages prepaid IDs passwords and value b When a viewer of bi directional program requests a bi directional data service payment the center performs two way authentication of the viewer and host and at the same time asks the viewer to input his her prepaid ID and password c When the viewer inputs the prepaid ID and password the center notifies him her the current remaining value d The center takes fee for the bi directional data broadcasting service from the remaining value that the center is managing When the remaining value becomes zero 0 the center operates a process to void the prepaid ID e The center notifies information about sales to the broadcast station and the prepaid operator f The broadcast station charges fee to the prepaid operator 2 Necessary function for receiver Communication function It is necessary to implement a security function required for prepaid payment network type Prepaid network type card payment does not need the implementation of new
250. gram with content protection is not written For example it is assumed that the EMM for the Kw update has not received yet when the Kw is updated The channel that performs the CA alternative service is identified based on whether there is the description of the link descriptor of linkage_type 0x03 placed in the SDT Only if the link descriptor is listed the CA alternative service is activated To start up the CA alternative service the viewer is asked to confirm whether to be transferred to the link service If the viewer agrees the transfer to the link service will proceed The link service is a Guide channel for promotion purpose and it is assumed to be also used for online contract etc using data broadcasting The function name to explain this function in the user manual should be Guide channel switch function 4 22 2 Basic Operation The process flow of CA alternative service when the link service is the service with supplemental data broadcasting The flow after transferring to the link service 6 7 and 8 is an example 5 41 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 1 Select service channel 2 Contract Already signed contract non scramble and others condition of the se lected service Already signed No contract Others contract non scramble 3 Link descriptor Nog gt is placed Yes 4 Permit service Denied gt transfer _ Permitted v 5 Trans
251. handled when the return code is A103 and it is not the broadcaster identifier intended for the free program with content protection mentioned in Volume 8 Case 1 and the other is handled when the return code is A103 and it is the broadcaster identifier intended for the free program with content protection mentioned in Volume 8 Case 2 1 The error that is considered a protocol violation due to the receiver failure Code SW1 SW2 6700 6800 6A86 6D00 6E00 All of them are nonstandard commands Response of the receiver Error codes and error messages are not displayed 2 The error occurred on PPV automatic purchase with reservation Code 8141 PPV program number does not match Viewing not possible 4040 PPV program number does not match Viewing possible Cause of the error At the time of reserving a PPV automatic purchase the program intended for the reserved purchase does not match with the program actually being broadcast because the previous program was extended etc Viewing not possible and Viewing possible indicate the condition whether the program being broadcast can be viewed or not Response of the receiver The receiver retries the PPV program purchase command until it obtains the response of Purchased Pay later PPV up to the deadline of the reserved purchase acquired by the contract confirmation command If the code is still returned even after the deadline of the reserved purchase it stops the retry r
252. harged or not and must not be used to determine whether it is to be scrambled or not Even if the component is to be charged or protected it is not scrambled in some cases for example when the relation of ES and ECM is changed from the relation described in Volume 5 in Part 1 5 2 Pay Program and Free Program 5 2 1 Definition free CA mode described in SDT or EIT determines whether the content is to be charged or not free CA_mode 0 indicates a free program and free CA mode l indicates a pay program The free program means that the default ES group is not to be charged The pay program means that the default ES group is to be charged Note however that although it is a free program ES other than the default ES group is to be charged in some cases Non charging for the free program means that the program is viewable without customer management Therefore the free program is defined as follows the default ES group is scrambled with the common broadcaster group identifier described in section 5 3 2 for content protection If scrambled with a unique business group identifier the program is not viewable until the corresponding EMM is received In this case the program is defined as a pay program regardless of whether it is to be charged or not The default ES group is defined for each service type Example For the digital TV service Default ES group Default video ES and Default audio ES Table 5 1 Default E
253. harging GW server Collection Center network Public network etc Receiver Scope of the information surrogate collection service B t Figure 2 2 Information surrogate collection service B Service outline a The broadcast station registers information about a data broadcasting program using the information fee surrogate collection service B to charge viewers on the information server connected to the information fee surrogate collection service B network in advance b The receiver calls the access point of the collection network specified by the data broadcasting or other methods c The receiver is connected to the center via the collection network d The center connects to the access point of the information fee surrogate collection service B network After the user authentication process it connectes to the information server and selects a target information a kind of table of contents e To the information center the center inputs automatically a pay information connection ID and a password that are necessary to purchase the selected data broadcasting program information f The center receives the data broadcasting program information data from the information server g The center transfers the data broadcasting program information to the receiver h The information fee charging GW server charges the information fee Necessary function for receiver Communication function The infor
254. hat a user is a regular viewer is used in communication it is necessary to check the connected partner and host at the initial phase of transaction For that purpose the two way authentication function is available There are generally two types of two way authentication function the strong authentication based on a public key cryptosystem and the simple authentication alternatively used when a public key cryptosystem is not available because of some restrictions 1 Level 0 It is recommended that a viewer checks a communication partner is not a false center before he she sends privacy information a credit card number and others to the center host Likewise it is recommended that communication without any protection is used only for sending information that generates no big problem even when it is stolen or tampered 2 Level 1 Time stamp and random numbers in information to be sent to centers are converted by one way function in order to prevent a false viewer from reusing a receiver ID or password Message recovery method Figure 1 9 shows how to authenticate a communication partner with the message recovery method When this procedure is performed in the reverse direction two way authentication is possible 6 79 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Match Communication partner authentication OK Not match Tampered data or transmission error Common key Common key cryptosystem Common key cryptosystem Card ID
255. he call hour for every receiver 1 Random number generation random Timer specification setInterval Bi directional communication function connect sendTextData etc Ye Delay call Level 3 connect sendTextData etc BASIC connectPPP connectPPP WithISPParams transmitTextDataOverIP etc TCP IP sending function and receiver s automatic call triggered by such a function Even when traffic is concentrated to delay calling of each receiver for a certain period can reduce the traffic density Figure 8 1 shows traffic image at the time of delaying calling 6 60 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Traffic When traffic is concentrated Delaying calling data over the capacity cannot be received Delaving calling When concentrated data traffic is over the capaci Traffic pacity capacity A EETA EE N AE Reception time Figure 8 1 Traffic image at the time of delaying calling Also when local contents that continue to be accessible after a main program finishes are provided the calling process can be performed after the end of the program unless another service is selected 8 2 2 Call restriction In order to indicate which receiver is approved to communicate via broadcast wave application program level consider restriction of the last number of receiver ID or others The last number restriction in the conventional phone system depends on common sense of viewers
256. he content cannot be output currently as partial TS to the serial interface of the high speed digital interface 8 3 Storage of the Content 8 3 1 Copy Control Information in the Record Media The copy control information in the record media specified in section 6 5 1 of this volume indicates the information used to control copying of the content stored in the record media Although an individual system can be used to manage the copy control information it must be able to identify at least the following two statuses Copy free and No more copies If retention function is implemented the system must be able to identify the three statuses additionally including the status Retention 8 3 2 Rendering the Content Unusable When the retention function is used the retained content must be monitored at least one minute unit and rendered unusable generally within a minute after the retention period specified by the allowable time of temporal accumulation elapsed When the permitted retention period is one and a half hour the content received stored at 1 00 must be rendered unusable by 2 31 and the content received stored at 1 01 must be rendered unusable by 2 32 When the move function is used the content must be monitored at least one minute unit and the source content must be rendered unusable generally within a minute after copying RA ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 4 Functional Restriction Regarding Internet R
257. he key created from the information specific to the receiver 7 2 5 Control Signals for the Conditional Access Broadcasting System ECM EMM and IC card interface signal must not be output to the user access bus other than the interface specified in Part 1 of ARIB STD B25 without encryption or viewed If however the signal does not effect on decrypting the broadcasting signal such as the EMM message the above specification does not apply 8 22 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 Additional Explanation 8 1 Protected Free Program 8 1 1 Implementation of the Protected Free Program Information for the content right protection is contained in the digital copy control descriptor or other forms and transmitted as PSI SI information Based on the information in the descriptor copy control is applied when the receiver outputs and records the content In normal situation some protection must be applied also to the broadcasting signals to prevent them from ignoring content protection for the secure transmission For the pay program as the conditional access technology manages customers CAS securely transmits the content by distributing information and scrambling the broadcast Also for the protected free program to make the content protection function in effect it is determined to scramble the program for the secure transmission via the broadcasting signals In case of the free program the purpose of scrambling is to securely transmit the pr
258. he transitional from scrambled broadcasting to non scrambled broadcasting etc However the ES related to ECM_PID 0x1FFF will not be scrambled 5 8 6 2 ECM Suspension 1 Detection of ECM suspension The receiver is able to detect ECM suspension when the ECM is not received within a specified time because each ECM will be re transmitted when it has a description in the PMT under the condition mentioned in 5 8 5 2 Update Retransmission Frequencies in this volume Within 2 seconds 2 Receiver operation at the time of ECM suspension The receiver that detected the ECM suspension during program selection will conduct with or without an 5 62 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 IC card the operation in which the transport scrambling control flag of the TS packet header that constitutes the broadcasting program is referred 5 8 6 3 ECM and Seamless Transmission During the period between prior to the PMT update and after the update which indicates the seamless switch the transport scrambling control flag of the entire ES is operated as non scrambled The seamless switch should follow the procedure mentioned in 5 8 4 3 Change of Relation between ECM and ES that Transmits Broadcasting Program Elements However the case in which t6 is shorter than the transition time required for the seamless procedure is assumed If the transition time of the seamless procedure is longer than t6 the scrambling will be started once the necessary transi
259. hen the type of automatic 5 63 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 display erasure is 0x02 the message and the message frame should not be displayed Emergency response In this case the receiver does not display the message The receiver refers to the version number of the target EMM message section and it should prepare for the update of the EMM common message contents or the display erasure during the message display The receiver does not refer to the version number of the EMM individual message section The transmission order of the EMM individual message is based on 5 9 4 EMM Transmission Order in this volume 5 9 3 EMM Transmission Frequency 5 9 3 1 Transmission Frequency of EMM Section and EMM Individual Message Section The transmission frequency of the EMM section and the EMM individual message section in the TS packet level are determined for each program TS and special TS The basic concept is based on Volume 4 The basic concept based on Volume 4 mentioned here means that the EMM transmission frequency is provided by the EMM section transmission density in accordance with the PSI SI operation provisions rather than by the spacing between the EMM sections 1 In the case of the program TS When the EMM section and the EMM message section are transmitted the TS packet of the relevant PID is transmitted in the range of 1 28kB 100 by 32 milliseconds The TS packet that transmits the EMM section and the EMM
260. hich multiple suits of audio are simultaneously broadcasted within a single service as related contents for details refer to 7 4 in this document Because one low hierarchy can be prepared per service duplicative reference may occur like multiple suits of audio are handled In a case where the main low hierarchy component is referred to by the sub one duplicative reference from multiple high hierarchy components is resulted At that time return to the original high hierarchy component is not guaranteed for some receivers like multiple suits of audio In a case where hierarchy operation is performed with MVTV low hierarchy components are written in no component_group the reference relationship of the hierarchy transmission descriptor is consulted instead 7 36 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 The concrete examples are shown in table 7 1 4 Three suits of high hierarchy video audio designated with Main Subl Sub2 refer to low hierarchy video audio designated with Main L and the low hierarchy components belong to no component group In this case significant rainfall attenuation causes the main component of the low hierarchy to be selected no matter whether the main or sub component is being watched When the rainfall attenuation is recovered it depends on receivers whether the original sub or main component is restored or only the main component is restored Table 7 1 4 Hierarchy allocation examples with MVTV O writte
261. high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 8 40 2 3 4 53 6 KT 8 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 If the service type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy_control_type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable For the definition of CGMS and EPN see Table B 2 5 According to the specification of the recording device select Copy One Generation or EPN See CPRM Specification DVD book Revision 0 96 or later issued by the licenser APSTB in RDI Packs inherits the value of APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor or is set to 00 APSTB in RDI Packs is set to 00 APSTB in RDI Packs gt inherits the value of APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor Table B 2 5 Definition of CGMS and EPN information for CPRM DCI CCI CGMS EPN Verification Definition Data verified 00 Copy freely 11 0 No more copies 11 1 No No more copies il l Yes Protected using CPRM but copy control restrictions not asserted 9 In EPN the logical setting is reverse of the encryption mode of the content availability descriptor 10 See CPRM Specificatio
262. his case the high speed digital interface output is encrypted according to Table 6 1 If the combination of the settings is other than the above the output protection bit must be ignored When the content availability descriptor is placed and the digital copy control descriptor Copy control type is 01 the setting of the output protection bit must be applied to the EPN bit of DTCP descriptor to output partial TS to the high speed digital interface 6 4 Functional Restriction Regarding Internet Retransmission The receiver must not have a function that allows outputting the following contents to the output that can lead retransmission on Internet the content for which the digital copy control descriptor digital recording control data limits copying and the content that is specified as a subject of protection by the content availability descriptor encryption_mode The output to the output specified in section 6 3 however is allowed Section 8 4 provides additional explanation on the output that can lead retransmission on Internet To prevent Internet retransmission via the user access bus and record media the content in the user access bus and record media must be managed according to the installation standard specified in Chapter 7 6 5 Storage of the Content 6 5 1 Storage of the Content When the digital copy descriptor digital recording control data is 00 so that the content is Copy free the content can be stored without limit
263. ho have a bank account etc A user makes payment via his her savings account 2 1 3 Other payment 1 Prepaid A user pays fee within the value price or value information managed by a center and subtracts it from the remaining value 2 Log collection As well as charging such as PPV fee for using a data broadcasting service is recorded and the total fee is settled up later in a lump 3 Home banking With this service a user can operate the direct deposit and the inquiry for the balances at home 6 82 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 2 2 Comparison of charging systems Table 2 1 shows comparison of charging methods Table 2 1 Comparison of charging methods Method User cost Applicable contents Major applicable charging area ea ation level Network surrogate Small Other than sales of 10 yen to 300 yen low price 1 yen accounting goods to 10 000 yen high price Credit Small Sales of goods and Several thousands of yen to more contents than several tens of thousands of yen Debit Small Sales of goods and Several thousands of yen to several A contents tens of thousands of yen Prepaid Small Sales of goods and Several hundreds of yen to several yas contents thousands of yen Log collection Small Stream type contents Several hundreds of yen to several thousands of yen Home banking Medium Inquiry for the balances A and direct deposit 2 3 Network payment In
264. ication function but provides minimum protocol overhead and connectionless communication suitable for services needing high transmission efficiency uimsbf unsigned integer most significant bit first 6 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El UTC UTC Universal Time Coordinated is the international time standard defined according to international agreements V 22bis A modulation method for full duplex modem for telephone up to 2400bps defined by ITU T V 34 A modulation method for full duplex modem for telephone up to 33 6kbps defined by ITU T V 42bis A data compression method and error correction method for communication between modems defined by ITU T X 28 A communication conversion procedure to connect a non packet mode receiver loading a modem with the packet switching network Access point A communication equipment receiving a call from a receiver Echo back Characters returned by a modem or communication partner to a sender in order to confirm that sent characters are correct or that operation Card ID Numbers or codes uniquely assigned to a card equipped on a receiver Cut through call In the massive calls reception service of network service a part of calls from a receiver is connected to a center that has been specified in advance Cut call In the massive calls reception service of network service a communication from a receiver is terminated at the sender s swi
265. ier described in section 5 3 2 for copyright protection is always specified in the first loop of PMT For the protected free program No 3 in Table 5 2 the conditional access descriptor is located only in the first loop of PMT and one PID is assigned indicating that the ECM with the common broadcaster group identifier described in section 5 3 2 for copyright protection is valid For the protected free program No 4 in Table 5 2 one PID is assigned in the first loop of PMT indicating that the ECM with the common broadcaster group identifier described in section 5 3 2 for copyright protection is valid and in the second loop the conditional access descriptor is located for the ESs to be charged The protected free program is handled with the common broadcaster group identifier described in section 5 3 2 Based on the value of the broadcaster group identifier the receiver recognizes that the content is a protected free program The protected free program is also described in section 8 1 5 3 2 Operation ECM is always transmitted Also in the first loop of PMT one PID is assigned indicating that ECM with the common broadcaster identifier described in section 5 3 2 for copyright protection is valid If the content is a protected free program without chargeable ES No 3 in Table 5 2 the CA contract information descriptor is not located in both SDT and EIT If the content includes chargeable ES No 4 in Table 5 2 the CA contract i
266. igital recording control data Therefore it does not always correspond to the meanings indicated by the value of APS control data which is the control information of analog recording Table 5 13 1 Recording Control Response of IC Card digital recording control data Recording control response of the IC card 00 Recordable 0x01 10 Recordable 0x01 11 Not recordable 0x00 For recordable PPV the response for the program attribute should be recordable 0x10 only by the purchaser Additionally the purchase result responds whether recordable or not recordable based on the purchase operation mo ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 14 CA Alternative Service 5 14 1 Operation Unit The CA alternative service is operated on a service basis The operation based on each component unit will not be carried out The link source service which is subject to the CA alternative service should be a scrambled broadcasting service pay service and free program with content protection 5 14 2 Link Service The link service requires a non scrambled operation because it always needs to be available for viewing regardless of contract no contract with the pay broadcaster When the CA alternative service linked to data broadcasting is operated the data component placement for the link service should be a mandatory and the data contents for the CA alternative service must be transmitted However the link service may
267. iled Installation Method According to the Installation Standard for the Content Protection FUNCTION esse sesse se se ee ee ee EE ER EE EE EE EE ee te Ee ee ee en GR ER ER EER EE ee Ee Ee ee ee ee Ee Ee ee eens esas ease ee ee 8 25 8 5 1 Functional Structure for the Receiver sesse se se se se EE e tee Ee Ee ee ee ee ee GR GR ER ee EE ee Ee ee ee ee ee 8 25 8 5 2 Level of Content Protection rr re ese EE Ee ee Ee Ee ER ee EE EE EE EE EE ee Ee Ee ee ee ee GR GR ER ee EE Ee ee ee ee ee ee 8 25 8 6 User Access EE ER EE EE EE 8 25 8 7 Restriction of Reuse of the Copy ee 8 26 8 8 Example of the Attempt to be Prohibited in Other Information Management ees 8 26 8 9 Digital Recording of the Content to the Removable Record Media ee Ee ee ee 8 26 8 9 1 Contact for Authorizing the Method esse se ec se tr EE EE EE EE EE EE Ee Ee Re ee ER ER ER EE EE EE ee Ee ee ee ee ee ee se ee 8 26 8 9 2 Limit of the Number of Copies Recordable to the Removable Media ee ee 8 26 8 9 3 Recording Function to the Removable Record Media ee eter rere et EE eens este eee ER EE es se 8 26 8 10 Security Of the Wireless LAN ese se ee ee ee EE EE EE EE EE Ee Ee Ee ER ER ER EE GEE EE ee esse ee ee ee ER ER ee Ee Ee ee ee ee ea ee ee ee se ee 8 27 9 Allowable Period for Implementation on the Receiver sesse EE Ee Ee ete tet EE EE EE ete nett ee ee ee ee ee ee es ee 8 28 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Appendix A Accreditation Criteria for the Content Protection System in the Record
268. ing ARIB STD B10 Service Information for Digital Broadcasting System ARIB STD B21 Receiver for Digital Broadcasting ARIB STD B24 Data Coding and Transmission Specification for Digital Broadcasting ARIB STD B32 Video Coding Audio Coding and Multiplexing Specifications for Digital Broadcasting 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 3 Definitions of Terminologies The terminologies used in the standards are defined as below 3 1 A mode presented by a multi channel stereo system having three front channels and one rear channel The front channels include L R and C center and the rear channel is composed of a monaural sound channel 3 2 A mode presented by a multi channel stereo system having three front channels and two rear channels The front channels include L R and C center and the rear channels are composed of stereo sound channels 5 1 channel Multi channel stereo system designed by incorporating Low Frequency Enhancement to a 3 2 multi channel stereo system Also sometimes expressed as 3 2 LFE 8PSK 8 phase shift keying This method relates 8 values to be transmitted to 8 phases For BS digital broadcasting trellis coding 8PSK TC8PSK combined with the error correcting system is used ADTS Audio Data Transport Stream BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying This modulation method relates binary values 0 1 to be transmitted to phase 0 and phase Tm BPSK 1 2 Transmission system in
269. ion Mode A 11 Encrypted output Copy never Mode B 10 Encrypted output Copy one generation Mode C 01 Encrypted output No more copies Not encrypted 00 Not encrypted Copy free Table 6 2 2 Definition of the high speed digital interface output IP Interface Output mode E EMI Definition Mode AO 1100 Encrypted output Copy never Mode BO 1000 Encrypted output Copy one generation Format non cognizant recording permitted Mode B1 1010 Encrypted output Copy one generation Format non cognizant recording only Mode CO 0100 Encrypted output No more copies Mode DO 0010 Encrypted output Copy free with EPN asserted Not encrypted 0000 Not encrypted Copy free Table 6 3 Definition of CGMS A CGMS A Definition 11 Copy never 10 Copy one generation 01 Not defined 00 Copy free 8 15 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 3 3 Output Control by the Output Protection Bit When the digital copy control and content availability descriptors are placed the high speed digital interface output follows Table 6 1 to handle the content according to the information in the output protection bit of the content availability descriptor and the information in the digital copy control descriptor The output protection bit becomes in effect when in the digital copy control descriptor copy_control_type is set to O1 and digital recording control data is set to 00 In t
270. ion data conversion etc Network surrogate accounting An accounting system by which a carrier charges a user with information fee on account of an information provider Vernam cipher An encryption method with which a sender transfers an exclusive OR of a random number sequence that the sender and a receiver commonly have and a message as a cipher code and the receiver decrypts it by operating an exclusive OR of the same random number sequence and the message When true random numbers are used this is the safe encryption method in terms of information theory Hash function message digest A mathematical function to map a large area in some cases vast area to a small area To realize a function of good quality unidirectional characteristic and collision free feature must be provided simultaneously Value Information about money and price used in the prepaid system 6 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Parental rate Age restriction for a certain service or program Recommended minimum age as viewer Prepaid ID An identifier for each user corresponding to a prepaid card when the person uses a network type of prepaid account Basic procedure Code Acommunication procedure of data transfer control procedure developed Independent Mode for communication between a basic host and a terminal A communication procedure to minimize errors in data transmission is included Host An acces
271. ion 7 1 2 of this document as a subject of protection can be output only in the cases specified in section 6 3 of this document By encrypting the content using the local encryption specified in section 7 2 4 of this document the content can be output in the compressed digital signal format to the user access bus to be protected For details of the user access bus see section 8 6 of this document 7 2 3 Storing the Content If the content specified in section 7 1 2 of this document as a subject of protection is encrypted by the local encryption described in section 7 2 4 of this document according to the functional requirement for the receiver described in Chapter 6 of this document the content can be stored in the record media 7 2 3 1 Restriction of Reuse of the Copy Reuse of the copied content must not be allowed even if the data is copied from the record media on a bit by bit basis For details of the restriction of reusing the copy see section 8 7 of this document 7 2 3 2 Requirement of Time Management for the Temporary Storage The time management system used to manage time frame for the temporary storage must have appropriate time accuracy and prevent user access 7 2 3 3 Other Information Management To record the following information use encryption or equivalent method to prevent changes by a user information about the restriction of copying and use which is described in the digital copy control descriptor or the co
272. ion for No more copies for the audio source For the high speed digital interface output operation for Copy one generation for the audio source ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 Applied to the composite and component video output This is also applied when outputting the received video signals by converting the format The Macrovision control applies to the 4801 composite and component video signals 5 For details of analog video output see sections 6 3 and 6 5 2 of this document 6 Ifthe content availability descriptor is not specified encryption mode is handled as 1 Table 5 6 Operation of the descriptor for the data service emergency data service and bookmark list data service Operation of Operation of the digital copy the content Digital copy Analog copy control 3 control descriptor availability control descriptor copy_ digital APS _ encryption_ control recording control mode 6 type control data data Copy free 5 i 0 01 00 pa care Copy free 1 Copy free F 11 00 P 1 care Copy never 1 Copying is prohibited but Macrovision is not applied Therefore copying is possible only 00 by the conventional analog input 01 1 and record device Copy never 4 Other ul than 00 Copy never Copying is prohibited but Output in Macrovision is not applied MPEG TS is Therefore copying is possible only 00 prohibited by the conventional analog i
273. ion of emergency information descriptors ees ees eer ere ere ee ee 7 26 6 3 4 Multiplexing timing and writing period of emergency information descriptors ese 7 27 6 3 5 Signal operation for emergency warning test broadcasting EE ry 7 27 6 4 Site Diversity Operation Ee 7 28 6 4 1 Idea about site diversity operation Ee 7 28 6 4 2 Signal processing just before and after site diversity operation treer ees sesse ere ere ese 7 28 6 4 3 TMCC Operation ee 7 28 6 4 4 Actual operation example ee 7 30 6 5 Phase reference Burst res see Ee EE EE EE EER GR EE EE Ee EE Ee Ee EE ee EE Ee ee GR ee ee Ee Ee ee EE ee Re ee ee ee ee Ee Ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 30 7 Operation EE 7 32 7 1 Operation Of Hierarchical ModulatiOn ese se ses esse ee se se se see ee ee ee Ee ee ee Ee ee GR ee ee ee ee GR ee ee ee ee se ee ee 7 32 7 11 Definition of hierarchical modulatiOn ese see ses EE EE EE EER EE EE EE Ee ee ER Ee ee Ee Ee Ee ER EE ee ee ee ee ee ees ese 7 32 7 1 2 Content transmitted through the low hierarchy EE rere rere eee eee eee eee eee reer eee rere reer rere Tree ee eres 7 32 7 1 3 TS configuration at the time of hierarchical modulation ese se see ee EE EE Ee EER EE Ee ee ER ee ee ee ese 7 34 7 1 4 Handling the hierarchy transmission descriptor eee eee eee eee eee eee reer eee eee eee eee eee ee errr rere rere errr rere eee eres 7 34 7 1 5 Duplicative reference of the low hierarchy ee 7 35 7 1 6 Hierarchical modulation configuration examples Ee 7 37 7 2 Switching the Vide
274. ion of silence shall be determined by broadcasters with future improvements of the encode and decode functions into consideration 7 12 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 42 4 Ranges of audio coding rates The ranges of audio coding rates shall be as below for the time being Standard stereo 144 kbps or less High quality stereot 192 kbps 256 kbps Multi channel stereo 384 kbps or less 4 2 5 High quality service The audio quality shall conform to mode 1 in Chapter 2 Audio Quality Indication in Appendix of Part 2 of ARIB STD B32 High quality services shall be identified with quality indication fields present in the audio component descriptor in the EIT The services shall not depend on coding rates t Follow the operation guideline appended to Part 2 of ARIB STD B32 and the result of future investigation of ARIB 7 13 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 Multiplexing 5 1 Multiplexing inside a Service 5 1 1 Definition of ES The stream types of ES are defined in table 5 1 1 For operational details of the component tags for data broadcasting refer to 5 1 2 3 in Part 1 Volume 3 BS Digital Broadcasting Data Broadcasting Operation Regulations Table 5 1 1 Stream types of ES Stream type Stream type Component tag value Data encoding method identifier descriptor Video 0x02 0x00 OXOF Absent Audio OXOF 0x10 OF Absent Subtitle Superimposed 0x06 0x30 0x37 subtitles Present always texts 0x38
275. ion processing of the IC card Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 4 4 5 Communications Functions Reference 2 3 6 Phone Modem or similar device and basic communications Installing at least one of the following the phone modem the data communication adapter for cellular phone and the data communication adapter for PHS should be mandatory only if the receiver equips data broadcasting interactive service function In general the phone modem is installed as mandatory It is desirable to specify the adapters for cellular phone and PHS as manufacturer options However the phone modem should be optional in mobile receivers for mobile objects such as cars or small and lightweight portable TVs If the adapter for cellular phone or the adapter for PHS is equipped it is preferable to also install the retry over notification function mentioned in 4 12 2 and the user call in request function mentioned in 4 12 3 5 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 in this volume 2 The portable TV is defined as a display integrated receiver operated by DC power source AC adapter etc with the monitor size not larger than 14 inches 9 IC card and low speed CA interface The IC card and low speed CA interface are mounted in a receiver and they communicate with the control unit of the receiver As a core CAS processing of the receiver they decode encrypted EMM as they receive it control contract data de
276. ion software research Simple two way authentication O Level 1 O Level 1 Information protection Tamper resistance O Level 3 O Level 3 O Simple signature Note 1 Note 2 service class Note 3 Support when possible O Level 1 The outline and security level of each security function is described in the following sections It is recommended that basic receivers to be used for bi directional services support the standard The functions within heavy line frame in Table 7 1 show a range that basic receivers should 7 1 1 Simple two way authentication function Table 7 2 shows items that should be considered as simple two way authentication between viewer and center which are classified into three levels 6 55 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 7 2 Two way authentication level Security level Applied service Reguired module Level 2 Strong authentication Internet service Both Public key cryptosystem PKCS hash function Level 1 Protected simple Purchase of comparably Common key authentication low price product cryptosystem process time stamp Level 0 Non protected simple Survey needing no Receiver Receiver ID authentication identification etc The functions within heavy line frame show a range that basic receivers or standard services should support when possible When an applic
277. ions While viewing satellite broadcasting on the TV screen the recording of satellite counter program can be processed with one IC card The same thing can be processed with one IC card in any simultaneous two screen display of satellite broadcasting channels As a result if the ECM update interval is 2000 ms or more any two scrambled services in different TS can be processed with one IC card In this volume when n pieces of ECM exist in the PMT the interval was stipulated to be nx2000 ms or more even if several ECMs are operated in a certain service 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 A 4 Recordable PPV Purchase and Copy Protection The recording control should be managed in the CAS in the case of recordable PPV purchase Fundamentally the copy control which focuses generational information should not be rewritten in the tuner but obviously the control that corresponds to the charge form is necessary for the purchaser and non purchaser in the recordable purchase operation Thus the strict operation against the recording by non purchaser in other words the operation to prohibit the recording was stipulated In addition the digital copy descriptor listed in the first loop of the PMT refers to the component tag of 0x00 0x3F in the operation as mentioned in Volume 4 in this document Therefore the PPV recordable purchase operation is also limited in order to prevent any viewer confusion due to the copy control change when the copy
278. ip a card reader 6 86 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 2 4 1 Pay by credit card Figure 2 3 shows how to pay by credit card Network type Credit card Receiver Public Collection network Center credit card company network etc payment Modem etc Access point center Scope of credit payment Figure 2 3 Pay by credit card 1 Service outline a Data that is necessary for pay by credit card such as credit card number credit card company name should be registered on the center in advance b When a viewer of bi directional program requests payment the center performs two way authentication of the viewer and host c The center asks for information about the viewer s credit according to the payment amount to the credit card company via the network type credit card payment center d Later the credit card company invoices the viewer and the fee is charged on the viewer s account 2 Necessary function for receiver Communication function It is necessary to implement a security function required for pay by credit card Pay by credit card does not need the implementation of new protocol 3 Necessary function for center Credit card number management function Function to previously manage information that is necessary for payment by credit card according to need Function to support network type credit card payment center Credit enquiry reception of enquiry result etc Sales management function Function to mana
279. is operation should not be allowed due to the organization of the operation pattern The parental rate can be set only for the conditional access broadcasting broadcasting by a pay broadcaster The parental rate indicates the minimum age that the viewer suggests using 8 bit field It can be specified until 20 years old using the definition of broadcaster in the ARIB STD B 10 5 54 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 5 5 1 Age Restriction Rate Age restriction rate Definition 0x00 Undefined No assignation 0x01 to 0x11 The minimum age rating 3 0x12 to OxFF Broadcaster assignation Not operated in the immediate future The parental rate is set on a program basis It should not be defined on a component basis The following two locations must have descriptions for the parental settings a The first one byte of the private_data_byte area of the conditional access system descriptor placed in the PMT b The rating field of the parental rate descriptor placed in the EIT Note 1 Note 1 Pay attention to the following points for the EIT placement The same parental rate descriptors should be placed in all of EIT p f actual EIT p f other EIT schedule actual and EIT schedule_ other of the relevant programs 5 6 Conditional Access System Descriptor 5 6 1 Function When described in CAT it specifies the TS packet ID that transmits the EMM Multiple
280. is status does not return in the ECM reception command and the contract confirmation command response 4 11 2 Copy Control on Flat Tier Contracts No recordable program purchase is operated for flat tier contracts Therefore the record control information obtained by the IC card response is either recordable or non recordable When the program to be viewed or reserved by the response of the IC card is under the flat tier contracts and the PPV is not for recordable purchase the recording control information from the IC card will be ignored and the control information listed on the digital copy control descriptor and the content availability descriptor will be followed 5 15 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 11 3 Copy Control on PPV The commands responses from the IC card before PPV purchase are the responses for the program attributes On the other hand the contract confirmation command response and the ECM reception command response after PPV purchase are the response for the fee results These are different from the PPV status request command response which still returns program attributes after PPV purchase This should be considered when the receivers are designed When a purchased PPV program is switched to another channel and switched back to the purchased PPV program again the corresponding copy control by the recording information of the ECM reception command response the digital copy control descri
281. ision broadcaster 10 190 199 490 499 790 799 Television broadcaster 11 200 209 500 509 800 809 Television broadcaster 12 210 219 510 519 810 819 Television broadcaster 13 220 229 520 529 820 829 Television broadcaster 14 230 239 530 539 830 839 Television broadcaster 15 240 249 540 549 840 849 Television broadcaster 16 250 259 550 559 850 859 Television broadcaster 17 260 269 560 569 860 869 Television broadcaster 18 270 279 570 579 870 879 Television broadcaster 19 280 289 580 589 880 889 Television broadcaster 20 290 299 590 599 890 899 Data broadcaster 1 900 909 Data broadcaster 2 910 919 Data broadcaster 3 920 929 Data broadcaster 4 930 939 Data broadcaster 5 940 949 Data broadcaster 6 950 959 Data broadcaster 7 960 969 Data broadcaster 8 970 979 Data broadcaster 9 980 989 Data broadcaster 10 990 999 Data broadcaster 11 000 009 Data broadcaster 12 010 019 Data broadcaster 13 020 029 Data broadcaster 14 030 039 Data broadcaster 15 040 049 Data broadcaster 16 050 059 Data broadcaster 17 060 069 Data broadcaster 18 070 079 Data broadcaster 19 080 089 Data broadcaster 20 090 099 7 54 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 1 3 Allocation of information provider IDs information provider id Information provider IDst information_provider_id used in the ERT and refe
282. isplayed 1 Ifthe viewer permits the transfer to the link service go to the service transfer processing 5 2 If the viewer denies the transfer to the link service go to the reception not possible processing 9 in the normal processing Note When the option to escape such screen transfer refusal is provided the normal non contractual processing will be performed When the option to escape such screen transfer refusal is not provided it is possible to remain on such screen Escaping such screen is done by the viewer operation of channel selection 3 When several transfer confirmation message numbers hereinafter referred to as message number in the SDT of the TS being received are operated due to the specifications of CA alternative service on the sender side at least one or more of the message main body is sent with the TS but the same message main body can be omitted In this case the display should be carried out by referring to the display of the main body of that message number As an exceptional processing when the message body is not defined in the same TS the built in message of the receiver is displayed 5 43 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 SDT service loop LINK descriptor 0x03type Private_data area The first 8 bit Display the same message as the message main essage main body 1 ETARE body 1 of 100 ch defined in the same TS essage main bod Display the built in message of the
283. ission only with trellis 8PSK so that the service can be continued as far as possible The hierarchical modulation shall be operated as below 7 1 1 Definition of hierarchical modulation 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hierarchical modulation is defined as the method for improving the service time ratio at low CN by using different modulation methods for the components in a single service For hierarchical modulation only services through two types of modulation methods inter hierarchy are subjected in the TS Such a combination of modulation methods is recommended that presents as much difference in CN as possible to the extent that the decrease of coding efficiency is small High hierarchy refers to the hierarchy in which information transmitted with TC8PSK flows Low hierarchy refers to the hierarchy in which using one of the other modulation methods presenting low frequency use efficiency information receivable even with low CN flows In a case where the same type of components are present in different hierarchies e g high hierarchy video and low hierarchy video their respective ESs are referred with hierarchical transmission descriptors so that switching is performed according to reception status In a case where different modulation methods are used according to each TS or service thus multiple modulation methods are used within a single carrier the term hierarchical modulation shall not be used to refer to 7
284. it is necessary to consider that they may have different proprietary rights A card ID should be written into the card when it is issued The ID number does not have to be a secret but must not be tampered 1 1 3 Data integrity Basic function A common key cryptosystem is used Message Authentication Code MAC can be used alternatively Refer to JIS X 5055 ISO IEC9797 for more detail The purpose is not cipher communication but delivery of message to a receiver without any interpolation or error Transmission of the message body and encryption of the whole message with the CBC mode are performed The IV register value after completion of the message encryption is transmitted as MAC A receiver also performs similar calculation If there is any interpolation or transmission error on the line that problem can be detected because value of MAC is different Figure 1 3 shows how to use Message Authentication Code 6 67 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Match No error p Not match Tampered data or Message Authentication Code MAC transmission error Common key Common key cryptosystem cryptosystem C ommon e CBC mode CBC mode key Plaintext Figure 1 3 Data integrity using MAC In addition simpler method CRC is also available However CRC cannot detect tampered data Reference 1 JIS X 5055 Security techniques Data integrity mechanism using a cryptographic check function employing a block ci
285. itable 1 Recording of digital audio service and emergency audio service is not allowed 2 Table B 2 1 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by Content Protection System for Blu ray Disc Rewritable Table B 2 1 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by Content Protection System for Blu ray Disc Rewritable Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for CPS for BD RE Copy control _ T encryption _ recording mode type control data 1 Recordable as Copy Free Copy Control Not Asserted 00 0 Recordable as Copy Free with applying Encryption Plus Non Assertion EPN i a 10 Dow boars Recordable as Copy One Generation with updating CCI to No More Copy 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy Control Not Asserted 10 Don t care Not recordable 11 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 1 Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy Control Not Asserted 1 This combination is not defined by TR B15 If howe
286. ital Receivers Fascicle 4 Operational Guidelines for Data Broadcasting to BS Broadband CS Combined Digital Receivers tees see ER ee ee ee ee ee ee eek ER ee ee ER ER ER ee ee ee ee ee REK SR eR ee ee REK ER ee ee ee ee ee ek ee ee ee ees es Fascicle 4 Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for PSUVSI re Fascicle 4 Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines and Specifications for Conditional Access System CAS Receivers reses ee ER ER ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ees Fascicle 4 Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Bi directional Communication EE RT RE OE EE EE RE EE OE EG Fascicle 4 Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Transmission Fascicle 4 Guidelines for Contents Protection to BS Broadband CS Combined Digital Receivers ee Fascicle 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 This page is intentionally left blank Part 1 Operational Guidelines for BS Digital Broadcasting Volume 5 Specifications of Digital Satellite Broadcast Conditional Access System CAS Receiver and Operational Stipulations ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Contents je ESE GE ER E ED 5 1 EE EE ET AE EE EE EE ED 5 1 1 2 PUrpose vere essessessees eens eessesesesssessseesseesseesseesseessessieesieesiecsieesieessscaseessecssecsseesssessecsseesarsiarsiessiss 5 1 KENS EE 5 1 2 Applicable ET EE 5 2 3 Terminology and Abbreviations 1 1 sstestesiess ieee ieee teeeteeeteeet
287. ited prohibited 11 00 No See Vol 4 in this document 11 00 No See Vol 4 in this document No descriptor No See Vol 4 in this document 1 Analog video output on radio programs is applied to video output of additional data video ES 2 It is possible to operate with APS 00 only if the service type is radio or data and the copy_control_type is 11 This is intended for the programs for copy control on audio Thus macrovision control does not apply to the video ES as an additional data To apply the macrovision to the video ES in these service types the operation should be always carried out only with digital_recording_control_data 10 and APS 00 5 20 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 12 Transmission of Viewing History Information 4 12 1 Function Overview This is a function to transmit viewing history information of PPV program to the viewing information collection center When call in requests are issued from the IC card to sent viewing history information there are three types of call in the regular call in by periodical communication control the forced call in by forced call in control of EMM and the overflowing call in by overflow exceeding a certain amount of view history information storage area in the IC card These call ins are processed by the power on call in control described in 4 6 Power on Call in Control in this volume When a call in is failed for some reason in the call in control mentio
288. ith the improvement of calculation capacity the conventional 64 bit common key cryptosystems are being replaced with 128 bit common key cryptosystems Recently a cipher algorithm that can prove a security level how safe has been developed 6 72 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 2 Public key cryptosystem Along with the improvement of calculation capacity the bit lengths of public key cryptosystems are being expanded Recently cipher algorithms that can prove a security level and public key cryptosystems on the elliptic function have been developed In the future it will be necessary to replace the current algorithms with those new algorithms if they will be mature enough or if a stronger cryptosystem is required Table 1 3 Current movement of algorithm of public key cryptosystem Public key cryptosystem Digital signature Grounds for safety Algorithm Actual performance Algorithm Actual performance announcement announcement Similar to RSAES EPOC PKCS 1 Ver 2 RSASSA PKCS1 v1 De facto standard factorization into July 1998 5 prime factors Fiat Shamir Prevailing as zero not proofed signature knowledge interactive signature ESIGN Its main feature is high speed Similar to EPOC Eurocrypto 98 factorization into With hash prime factors proofed Discrete Logarithm Diffie Hellman Effective as key DSA NIST Problem key distribution distribution ElGamal Crypto 84 Shnorr 7 Cr
289. ithout hierarchical modulation conducted is a service for which components to be referred to are transmitted only through the high hierarchy and the PMT does not include a hierarchy transmission descriptor 7 33 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 1 3 TS configuration at the time of hierarchical modulation 1 2 3 Signals of the individual hierarchies are transmitted with a single TS and a single service_id Therefore ESs shown in table 7 1 1 flow in the TS One ES and one section shall not be transmitted beyond one hierarchy The hierarchical relationships of components of the same type are defined by the hierarchy transmission descriptor written in the PMT This descriptor shall be written in the loops of the individual streams having hierarchical relationships regarding the PMT Table 7 1 1 Contents to be flowed through the high hierarchy and low hierarchy High hierarchy Low hierarchy High hierarchy Low hierarchy video video Low hierarchy audio may be substituted by High hierarchy high hierarchy audio audio Low hierarchy data subtitles and superimposed characters Data included SI PSI PCR ECM ina case when CAS is present 7 1 4 Handling the hierarchy transmission descriptor 1 2 3 4 The hierarchy transmission descriptor shall be interpreted as below If the PMT includes multiple components a receiver checks the hierarchy transmission descriptor If a
290. ity descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for SAFIA copy_control_ T encryption _ ie recording mode a control data 1 Recordable as Copy Free not encrypted 00 Recordable applying Encryption Plus Non Assertion 0 EPN with encrypting the content as Copy control not asserted 01 10 Dont care Recordable as Copy One Generation with encrypting the content and updating CCI to No more copy 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free not encrypted 10 Don t care Not recordable 1 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 a Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free not encrypted 1 This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for the high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 2 If the service type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy_control_type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 3 The content is recorded
291. iver function The receiver originates a call according to the phase I and II processes If an outside line capture number is set up it is added too In addition a host number is sent if necessary 6 35 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Broadcast Center station Receiver Viewer Viewer setting information j Outside line capture number 1 184 186 2 122 3 00XY 4 Postal code preferred net dial type Bi directional application phone number related information indication Calling instruction with a remote control device etc One calling destination phone number is selected from phone number Phone number selection process related information based on the receiver s condition 28 Add a proper number to the calling de ien process of destination phone number based on the Phase II special number and description written in 6 4 1 and 6 4 2 carrier ID number 184 186 2 122 3 00X Y 4 Add an outside line capture number 1 Phase IT Calling Calling process Originate a call Send a host number if necessary Application process e Receiver process Phone number Figure 6 3 Calling process outline 6 36 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 6 3 Operation of broadcast station Specification A 6 3 1 Conditions to send phone number Conditions to send a phone number in a bi directional data broadcasting service are as follows 1 A broadcast stati
292. ket reservation service Some receivers may have only restricted memory method or output method even if they can receive reservation confirmation notes at the time of reservation Therefore it is recommended that centers have function to issue at least reservation confirmation numbers to deal with a problem in procedures However reservation confirmation numbers depend on complete reliability of centers Level 1 Example On line shopping When providing an on line shopping service needing exchanging money and product including digital contents it is necessary to create evidence of the trade for both parties in order to avoid a trouble For that purpose digital signature is an ideal method however a digital signature function cannot be used without implementation of the public key cryptosystem Therefore it is recommended to use Message Authentication Code MAC that can be used for a system implementing only a common key cryptosystem However although this method can prove that a signature has not been created by a third party it has no effect on runaround of a signature creator at the center side because a signature receiver also can create the same message Level 2 In order to prevent falseness at a center it is effective to link a message authentication code of the reliable independent authority and a message and to add a message authentication code of the center However a receiver and the independent authority must continue to keep th
293. l has such a characteristic that 1 and 0 appear randomly and is used for elergy diffusion of digital signals for example M sequence is often used PSI Program Specific Information This is information needed for selecting arbitrary programs and is composed of four tables PAT PMT NIT and CAT It has been defined with the MPEG system standards and the postal service ministerial ordinance PTS Presentation Time Stamp This represents information that controls output for play QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying This modulation method relates four values 00 01 10 11 to be transmitted to phases 0 1 2 n n and 3 4 n of carriers QPSK 1 2 Transmission system in which transmission line coding is performed with half efficiency convolution codes with respect to QPSK For QPSK convolution codes with the following efficiency are also available 2 3 3 4 5 6 and 7 8 7 3 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 reserved Undefined This indicates possible definition with the ISO standards for future expansion in terms of the definition of coding bit streams 1 is set for all bits not defined with the ARIB standards reserved future use Undefined This indicates possible definition with the ARIB standards for future expansion in terms of the definition of coding bit streams 1 is set for all undefined bits SDT Service Description Table This includes channel related information such as channel names and broad
294. l message is encrypted the receiver sends the message code area to the attached IC card by using the EMM individual message reception command response to obtain the response message code If the length of the message code area is longer than the message partition length obtained by the initial setting condition command it will be divided based on the message partition length and sent to the IC card in sequence In the last command only the remained portion is sent The contents of response message code area are as follows Table 4 14 1 Response Message Code Area of Mail Items in the message code area Description Number of bit Reserved Backup 16 Reserved Backup 16 fixed_message_ID Fixed phrase message number 16 extra message format version Differential format number 8 extra message length Differential information length 16 extra_message_code Differential information N stuffing Stuffing M Stuffing will not be sent 0 byte for the IRD stored message DIE ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 The obtained response message code is used once connected if it is divided for sending The length of the valid differential information is the one indicated in the differential information length For mail fixed phrases may exist or may not exist The fixed phrase message number is 0 If the fixed phrases exist the receiver first receives the corresponding EMM common message from the fixed phrase message number Next it combines
295. le card in this document even if it is a valid IC card in order to distinguish from an invalid card If the IC card is invalid or non usable when the program being received is scramble broadcasting the error message described in 4 18 Error Notification Screen in this volume is displayed When the program being received is non scramble and the CA service descriptor listed in the CAT has the description of service_id for the selected program the operation mentioned in 4 19 Operation When Valid IC Card Is Not Inserted is performed if the IC card is invalid If the card is non usable the error message described in 4 18 Error Notification Screen in this volume is displayed 4 17 Display of IC Card Information 4 17 1 Function Overview This is a function to display the IC card information by the user operation such as the menu when the inquiries for subscription application or for various conditional access services are made to customer centers etc Based on the user operation the card identifier the card ID and the group ID are displayed The standardized names for each of them should be also the card identifier the card ID and the group ID Although the user interface is arbitrarily defined by the receiver it should make an arrangement to clarify the correspondence between each display number and each standardized name When several group IDs exist they are described from the smallest value of the ID identifier in sequence The maximum n
296. le of ECM A 3 1 Retransmission Cycle The ECM retransmission cycle is described in 5 8 5 2 Update Retransmission Cycle in this volume and the maximum allowed value is mentioned in 5 8 6 2 ECM Suspension in this volume Specifically it is stated as follow 100 ms lt ECM retransmission cycle lt 2 seconds Because the ECM retransmission cycle defines the time until the contents are displayed when the channel is selected the shorter one is desirable Therefore the following applies in the service type of digital TV service ECM retransmission cycle Approximately 100ms Meanwhile if the service type is digital TV service the ECM occupancy band for the all signal band is small enough to be ignored However considering that the entire band is small in the digital audio service and the data service it is recommended that the receiver be designed with the assumption of the ECM retransmission cycle of approximately 100 ms to 1000 ms range for these services A 3 2 Update Cycle The ECM update cycle is mentioned in 5 8 5 ECM Update Retransmission in this volume The timing that corresponds to the IC card processing ability is assumed to be the receiver specification as premises for the following items The maximum of 800 ms for one ECM processing is assumed The update interval of different ECMs is 1000 ms or more The update cycle was also revised along with the revision of this document version 1 0 with the following assumpt
297. ls and separates various multiplexed data SI data ECM and EMM etc Decode unit for video and audio It decodes video and audio and outputs them to a monitor Display unit The display unit equips the user interface which is a screen presentation mechanism to display menus and lists settings for PPV purchase limit and its purchase operation PPV purchase confirmation settings for parental control and its unlock password input IC card information automatic display messages mail IC card test phone line connection test and IC card response errors etc for users D Among the PPV service functions the ones other than phone modem and setting deleting of PIN number should not be operated Hereafter this will apply to PPV service functions The related description can be found in the commentary Key input unit It processes key inputs from a remote control Control unit It controls an entire receiver Especially in the CAS it performs IC card communication processing of various data separated from broadcasting signals descrambler control telephone modem control communication processing with the viewing information collection center time count display processing control and key input processing Phone modem The phone modem is connected to the viewing information collection center with public lines etc to process telephone communications It does not perform the IRD data transmission that uses encryption decrypt
298. mail with the oldest sending start time N 4 M 30 and L 14 5 12 2 Example of Send Operation Typical examples are illustrated below 1 Sending example 1 The same message ID Message ID 104 Sending period Message ID 104 Sending period 1l 30 days or more Figure 5 12 1 Message ID Sending Example 1 5 69 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 Sending example 2 The most common example Message ID 100 Sending period 2 weeks Message ID 101 Sending period 2 weeks Message ID 103 Sending period 2 weeks Message ID 104 Sending period 2 weeks Message ID 105 Sending period 2 weeks Message ID 106 Sending period 2 weeks Message ID 107 Sending period 2 weeks t a b c The messages mail that can be sent in any of a b and c area are 4 pieces or less Figure 5 12 2 Message ID Sending Example 2 3 Sending example 3 Possible increase of message ID Message ID 100 Message ID 103 Message ID 104 Figure 5 12 3 Message ID Sending Example 3 If the message mail is sent using both the group ID and the card ID a flat increase of the message ID cannot be secured Whether the message mail is old or new cannot be determined by the message ID 4 Sending Example 4 Sending period 1 Message ID 100 Message ID 101 Message ID 103 Message ID 104 Message ID 108 d Figure 5 12 4 Message ID Sending Example 4 For example the message ID 100
299. mation fee surrogate collection service B does not need the implementation of new protocol 6 85 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 3 Necessary function for center Program information delivery function Function to deliver information about a data broadcasting program received from the information server to the receiver Security function SSL3 0 or higher 4 Flow to start the information fee surrogate collection service B A program project document is examined After an ethical review organization completes investigation a contract of the information fee surrogate collection service B is set up An ID for using the SSL protocol should be acquired separately An ID for using the SSL protocol is necessary to perform secure communication via SSL protocol A reliable third party issues the IDs 2 4 Pay by card In this payment system a credit card or debit card is used to pay fee for a bi directional data broadcasting service It is necessary to handle the payment in the similar way as in actual stores and secure safety of the payment Table 2 2 shows features of pay by card Table 2 2 Feature of pay by card Credit card Debit card Payment method Pay later Immediate payment Identification Name card number Account number expiration date password Maximum rental spending According to issuer Deposit balance Dedicated card reader writer Not fundamental Fundamental Issue A receiver has to equ
300. mber command 6 18 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 3 Figure 5 5 shows the error seguence timeout at the center during waiting for host number Timeout T1 Note Refer to 5 3 6 for T1 value command aA Co network Mo Modem ADP JADP Co others vs Caen network Center point Connection instruction TE gt kya Incoming Originating call call indication Response Handshake _ Connection Connection Disconnecting after the _ completed Soms defined time of the no communication monitoring timer has No communication state gt passed Disconnection Figure 5 5 Error sequence timeout at the center during waiting for host number command 4 Figure 5 6 shows the error sequence center s reject to receive a call Connection instruction S Originating call Incoming call indication _ Response R Handshake Connection Connection completed completed Host number command Remote echo Disconnection Figure 5 6 Error sequence center s reject to receive a call 6 19 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 Figure 5 7 shows the error seguence wrong remote echo Es EES network eer Es ER Moder ADP ane EER point a Center Connection instruction i Originating call _ Incoming EE AR N 5 call indication EE Response Handshake Connection E ES Connection completed completed gt Host number
301. message section is not transmitted exceeding 320k bits per any given second by the same PID In the 320k bits mentioned above the data amount of one EMM section and the EMM message section is considered to be 4kB 2 In the case of special TS See A 5 Special TS in this volume for the special TS When the EMM section and the EMM message section are transmitted the TS packet of the relevant PID is transmitted in the range of 5 2kB 100 by 32 milliseconds The TS packet that transmits the EMM section and the EMM message section is not transmitted exceeding 1 3M bits per any given second by the same PID In the 1 3M bits mentioned above the data amount of one EMM section and the EMM message section is considered to be 4kB 5 9 3 2 Transmission Frequency of EMM Common Message Section The transmission frequency of the EMM common message section that has certain fixed phrase number Table ID Extension should be one section per 200 milliseconds at most 5 64 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 9 4 EMM Transmission Order In the EMM and the EMM individual message several pieces of information are packed in one section to be transmitted In order to facilitate the filtering processing in the receiver the placement order of the EMM packed in the same section is limited by the operational control mentioned below This applies to the EMM individual message as well 1 The first EMM should be the EMM with the smallest card ID in that sectio
302. mit information through this field Therefore in 4 4 5 Front end signal processing in Chapter 4 of ARIB STD B21 Receiver for Digital Broadcasting the following statement is provided With respect to information transmission using phase reference burst signals ARIB STD B20 stipulates that it is possible but will be left s a task for the future In the design and manufacture of the DIRD this stipulation must be considered Even when the information transmission is to be conducted in the future it is 7 30 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 not necessary for the DIRD to conduct the decoding For this reason the following standards shall be followed for phase reference burst 1 2 Even if the phase reference burst is modulated a consumer use receiver need not have a function for receving the information The present departmental regulations have not provided a clear statement about the modulation of phase reference burst therefore information transmission through this field shall not be performed as of 2000 If information transmission through this field becomes possible in the future information to be transmitted shall be housekeeping inter station information and others for example information corresponding to network control signals such as number transmission signals and net Q signals included in terrestrial broadcasting that are used exclusively by uplink stations audience need not view the information There
303. mits the elements of the broadcasting program On the other hand when it is listed in the second loop the ECM is applied only to the relevant ES If the conditional access system descriptors are listed in the first and the second loops of the PMT at the same time the ECM listed in the second loop has priority to be applied When OXx1FFF is used as the ECM_PID conditional access PID it will be indicated that the relevant ES is not scrambled and the TS packet of PID 0x1FFF will not be actually transmitted 5 58 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 8 4 ECM Application Change 5 8 4 1 Start of Scrambling The broadcast signal changes as mentioned below when non scrambled broadcasting or the ES that transmits the broadcasting program elements switches to scrambled broadcasting or the ES that transmits the broadcasting program elements 1 2 3 4 The relevant ES is transmitted in a non scrambled condition The ECM is transmitted tl second after the relevant ES is transmitted in a non scrambled condition the relation between the ECM and the relevant ES group is listed and transmitted in the first or the second loop of the PMT PMT update After t2 second the scrambling of the relevant ES group starts After t3 second the first ECM update begins tl 1 t2 the number of ECM x 2 0 lt t3 For the ECM update the sections listed below in this volume are followed Update Retransmission Cycles ECM Update and Scram
304. mmunication line as a line connecting the operator and a center such as a leased line according to need A line type is determined in consideration of service content data traffic reliability and other aspects according to an agreement between two parties 6 8 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 3 Facility associated with host As a receiving line a host in the center has some of the lines such as PSTN PSTN for mobile phone ISDN for PHS mobile phone network for direct mobile phone network reception ADSL FTTH and CATV according to need The number of lines in the access point which is a connection point to the host is determined in consideration of service content and data traffic Also a communication line to the bi directional data broadcasting service operator is equipped if necessary 4 4 Receiver s function for line connection A receiver has a function to connect PSTN PHS network and mobile phone network ISDN Level 3 ADSL Level 3 FTTH Level 3 and CATV Level 3 and communicate with a center 4 5 Connection type 4 5 1 Direct connection 1 Using a public network to connect a center and a receiver directly Strength If a proper protocol is selected implementation of a receiver will be compact Limitation A center must acquire an access point Figure 4 2 shows the connection type Receiver Center 5 Public An network etc Figure 4 2 Direct connection
305. ms other than transmission line errors need not be taken into account and any special processing such as judgment through majority decision is not needed 1 Ina case where the analysis of the TMCC s basic information reveals that the number of slots shown in the TMCC s basic information differs from the allocated one although the number of incoming slots is correct all packets of the allocated slots are transmitted with TC8PSK TMCC s basic information refers 7 21 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 to information that is sent by a consignment broadcaster and that is used to generate a TMCC by an uplink station In this case the tolerance to rain is deteriorated because signals to be sent through the low layer is sent with TC8PSK but usually normal reception is possible 2 In a case where the number of incoming packets does not meet the regulation packets beyond the number of the allocated slots are discarded if the number is below the appropriate one null packets are transmitted for the shortage Therefore reception is not permitted in either case 3 Ina case where data that is supposed to be dummy is not a null packet in terms of the TMCC s basic information the data is processed as a null packet and the original packet is not transmitted In this case reception is not permitted 4 Ina case where TSs to be transmitted do not arrive due to line disconnection or any other reason all the allocated slots are treated as T
306. n PMT EIT Hierarchy transmission component group descriptor PID guality level reference PID 0 1 2 Video Main 501 1 509 O Subl 502 1 509 O Sub2 503 1 509 O Main L 509 0 501 Audio Main 601 1 609 O Subl 602 1 609 O Sub2 603 1 609 O Main L 609 0 601 7 1 6 Hierarchical modulation configuration examples Table 7 1 5 shows the hierarchical modulation configuration examples possible with respect to the number of slots currently allocated Table 7 1 5 Hierarchical modulation configuration examples Total number of slots High hierarchy Low hierarchy 14 TC8PSK 12 slots QPSK 1 2 2 slots effective 1 slot TC8PSK 10 slots BPSK 1 2 4 slots effective 1 slot 22 TC8PSK 20 slots QPSK 1 2 2 slots effective 1 slot TC8PSK 18 slots BPSK 1 2 4 slots effective 1 slot 24 TC8PSK 22 slots QPSK 1 2 2 slots effective 1 slot TC8PSK 20 slots QPSK 1 2 4 slots effective 2 slots TC8PSK 20 slots BPSK 1 2 4 slots effective 1 slot The number of slots written first includes that of dummy slots 7 37 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 2 Switching the Video Format 7 2 1 Video format switching operation 1 There are cases where mixed operation of TV transmission HDTV 1ch or SDTV 3ch are performed within a single TS based on time division so the video format needs to be switched accordingly 2 Normal SDTV
307. n 2 The second EMM should be the EMM with the largest card ID in that section 3 The third or later EMMS are sorted in the card ID order in ascending order then stored If n pieces of EMM are in one section and they are in the order from the smallest card IC such as EMM_1 EMM 2 EMM n they will be placed in the order shown below First Second Third Fourth Last Ss Within the same section EER Figure 5 9 1 EMM Transmission Order in One Section The receiver can find out whether the EMM sent to the receiver is included in that section or not by checking only the first two EMMs If another EMM inclusion in the later part is possible the receiver checks the IDs in order from the first and it is able to determine that the EMM sent to it is not included at the point where the ID becomes larger than the ID for itself At this point the receiver is able to discard the entire section and it does not need to keep comparing until the last EMM in the section 5 10 Message Code for EMM Message 5 10 1 Format Number The format number is defined as 0x01 The following section defines the message code format for the format number 0x01 When the format number other than the format defined by the ARIB or by this volume is received the receiver discards the message code and ignores the reception itself 5 65 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 10 2 Message Code Main Body Format of EMM Common Message for Format Number 0X01 I
308. n March 31 2006 048h 049h Note 9 This logo ID had been allocated to Digital Cast International Ltd business discontinued on March 31 2006 Note 10 This logo ID had been allocated to Nippon BS Broadcasting Corporation when it had been a data broadcaster 7 72 8 3 List of Slot Allocation for Each Broadcaster Appendix tables 8 3 1 to 8 3 5 conclude slot allocation for individual broadcasters and services stated in the ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 consignment broadcasting business certificate according to each repeater of the broadcasting satellites Actual allocation is scheduled to be conducted on December 1 2007 and afterward Appendix table 8 3 1 1 channel 11 72748 GHz slot allocation list Slot No Consignment Broadcaster Service 1 8 l SDTV broadcasting ET oo Satellite Broadcasting HDTV broadcasting SDTV biade 16 24 SDTV broadcasting 25 32 SDTV broadcasting 33 40 BS i Incorporated HDTV broadcasting SDTV broadcasting 41 48 SDTV broadcasting Appendix table 8 3 2 3 channel 11 76584 GHz slot allocation list Slot No Consignment Broadcaster Service 1 8 SDTV broadcasting 9 15 WOWOW INC HDTV broadcasting SDTV broadcasting 16 22 SDTV broadcasting 23 30 SDTV broadcasting 31 37 B S Japan Corporation HDTV broadcastin
309. n 14 inches The identification support of multiple CAS operations is applied to the receiver sold after September 24 2006 Such PPV functions should be optional from September 2007 and they should not be substantially operated Consequently the test environment for the PPV function verification will disappear and this point needs to be considered The reason why they are optional is that the receiver may have problem once these functions are removed Thus whether the function is removed is left to the manufacturer design of the receiver 5 79 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 A 7 Card ID Display The purpose of the card IC display function is to confirm the card ID at the customer center when the viewer inguires about the EMM reception such as the pay broadcasting or the service using automatic display message Since this is an inguiry regarding the EMM reception the customer center of the broadcast station often takes care rather than the receiver manufacturer and the customer center needs to respond to the receivers of different companies Nevertheless there are cases that cannot be responded over the phone by confirming the card directly such as the case in which the viewer does not know where the card is located or does not want to remove it because he she fears causing a mechanical failure The user interface of the card ID display function as a receiver function is left to the product planning of the manufacturer However bec
310. n DVD book Revision 0 96 or later issued by the licenser 8 41 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 4 Requirement for Installing MagicGate Type R for Secure Video Recording MG R SVR for Memory Stick PRO 1 Table B 2 6 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by MG R SVR for Memory Stick PRO Table B 2 6 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control for MG R SVR for Memory Stick PRO Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for MG R SVR for Memory Stick PRO Copy control _ encryption _ k recording_ mode op control data 1 Recordable as Copy Free Copy control not asserted 00 0 Recordable as Copy Free with applying EPN Asserted Protection required 10 Don t care Recordable as Copy One Generation with updating CCI to No more copies 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy_control_not_asserted 10 Don t care Not recordable 11 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy control not
311. n TUT cee EG 6 91 4 1 1 TOE EE EE EE EE es 6 91 4 1 2 Usage sample service target receiver only seers terete Geek ER ee teste ee ee ee ee ee ee ee seke 6 91 4 1 3 Usage sample service target both of receiver and ordinary phone Heese ees ere ere ee sees 6 92 4 2 Common national phone number SCLVICE rere eet EG 6 93 4 2 1 Reverse charging of the line at access point EE 6 93 4 2 2 Caller charging of the line at access point Ee 6 93 Appendix 5 Transmission method and connection conditions of the fixed preferred connection cancellation number 122 information EE rere errr errr errr er reer reer eee rere rere errr ere 6 94 5 1 Transmission method ee ree ee eee seers eee ee errr 6 94 5 2 Connection conditions EE ee 6 94 5 3 Start period of preferred connection service ee 6 95 jv ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 1 Introduction This document BS Digital Broadcasting Bi directional Communication Operation Rules is applied to communication related to bi directional data broadcasting service in the BS digital broadcasting Receivers supporting bi directional services have to implement functions described in the Specification A of this document The Specification B is optional Rules for sending a viewing history related to the limited receiving method should be based on ARIB STD B25 and not covered in this document The rules in this document may be changed or a new rule may be added according to the change of data broadcasting stan
312. n avoidance at center server Level 3 EE 6 62 9 Troubleshooting EE eee eee ee Tee eee eee eee ee reer eee rere rere eer ere rere ee eee eee eee rere rere errr e eee Teer ee errr errr ee eer eee eereeee eerie er iee 6 63 9 1 Receiver s action at power off Specification Al MT EE ER N 6 63 10 Contingency plan ee 6 63 10 1 Functions for emergency situations Specification EER EE EE EE EE EE EG 6 63 11 Related regulations and rights Ee 6 64 11 1 Related regulations EE eee eee eee SSeS eee eee rere rere eee ee rere eee ere eee reer reer ereeere rere rrr e Tree eee eee rere reer ereeesr rey 6 64 11 1 1 Considerable regulations for emergency responsE EE EE RE Ee ee EER ee tte eset ees ee eet ee 6 64 11 1 2 Considerable regulations concerning congestion of communication network 6 64 Appendix 1 Supplementary explanation about security ee 6 65 1 1 Security FUNCTIONS EE eeeeeeeeeeees 6 65 1 1 1 Data encryption ee 6 65 1 1 2 Other modules for security ee 6 66 1 1 3 Data integrity Ee 6 67 1 1 4 Partner authentication eer esse eee Ee EER EE ec Ee Ee EE ee Ee GR ee GR ee ee Ee Re Ee ee Ee sees Ee EE ee Ee ee ee snes eres ees ee 6 69 1 1 5 Signature ee 6 70 1 1 6 Key management Ee ee ee 6 71 1 1 7 Security scalability ee 6 72 1 2 Security application ee 6 74 1 2 1 Protection of Viewer information sesse ses esse ee se ee ee ee ee ee Ee ee ee EE ee Ee Ee ER ee GR ee ee Ee Ee ee ee ee ee se ee see 6 74 1 2 2 Protection of copyright Oe 6 75 1 2 3 Consideration
313. n is defined 12 Operation of getISPParams Level 3 This parameter operates only in the data broadcasting reception state This function has following restrictions Contents must not send acquired information elements to a center in view of personal information protection Return value array 4 If it is skipped return an empty character string Return value array 5 If it is skipped return an empty character string Return value array 9 If a receiver sets a parameter return status 2 Table 6 4 shows the definition of carrier ID information that is acquired with the return value array 10 Table 6 4 Definition of return value array 10 getISPParams Definition Non setting state or set when deleted by a receiver s function Value Hexadecimal notation 1 byte 2 byte 1 byte Showing that it is set by a receiver s function 1 byte 2 byte 1 byte Other than above 1 byte 2 byte 1 byte When set by an operator who has original_network_id and broadcaster_id shown in the left column Note X means don t care 6 39 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 13 Disconnection of PPP connection line established by auto connection function Level 3 When the disconnection function disconnectPPP is used to disconnect a PPP connection line established by a receiver s auto connection function from BML content
314. n system or recording Content Protection System for Blu ray Disc format Rewritable Ver 1 0 CPS for BD RE Applied media recording format Blu ray Disc Rewritable Format Applied service TV service and data service 1 Royal Philips Electronics Licenser Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd Sony Corporation Contact http www blu raydisc info Requirement To be installed according to the requirements described in Appendix B 2 1 Content protection system or recording D VHS format Applied media recording format D VHS cassette Applied service TV service and data service 2 Licenser Victor Company of Japan Limited Contact JVC VHS Standard Center To be installed according to the requirements Ri t ai Ge described in Appendix B 2 2 8 31 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 As Approved item Description Content protection system or recording Content Protection for Recordable Media CPRM format DVD RAM DVD R and DVD RW Applied media recording format Wideo Recording Formai Applied service TV service and data service 4C Entity LLC 3 Intel Corporation International Business Machines Licenser Corporation TOSHIBA corporation Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd Contact http www 4centity com Requirement To be installed according to the requirements described in Appendix B 2 3 Content protection system or recording format MagicGate Type R for Secure Video i Recording MG R SV
315. nd content availability descriptor For details of copy control information on the stored content see section 6 5 6 3 Output Control 6 3 1 Functional Requirement for Output To the analog video output the copy control system specified in Volume 2 in Part of this document must be applied To the digital audio output the copy control specified in Table 6 1 must be applied When a Bluetooth interface is used to output digital audio connection authentication encryption communication A2DP Advanced Audio Distribution Profile and SCMS T must be implemented and output to a device that does not support those functions must not be allowed The analog audio output is allowed without limitation except when the digital audio output is prohibited in Table 6 1 The high speed digital interface output must be protected according to DTCP The IP interface output must follow DTCP Volume 1 Revision 1 4 and DTCP Volume 1 Supplement E Mapping DTCP to IP Revision 1 1 The communication system must be a unicast system The number of streams that can be output simultaneously is at most eight for each receiver except for the playback after the content is stored Output is allowed only when the destination IP address for the transmission 8 12 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 packet resides within the same subnet for the receiver s IP address The RGB analog video can be output according to Volume 2 in Part 1 When the HD content
316. nd it is encrypted and transmitted by a table called EMM which has an individual identifier for each recipient The EMM that has an individual identifier for each recipient is decoded by an encryption key which is unique to each recipient in the receiver A table called CAT has a conditional access system descriptor This descriptor specifies the CA_system_id which indicates specific conditional access system and the PID which transmits the EMM A table called PMT also has a conditional access system descriptor This descriptor specifies the relation between the CA_system_id which indicates specific conditional access system and the ES PID which should be descrambled with ECM The conditional access system is based on the fundamental structure mentioned above System that Complies with Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 summarizes more concretely the conditional access system described in the ministerial ordinance However the encryption method for the related information is not specified in it and it does not represent an individual conditional access system Thus it is an aggregate of conditional access systems The ARIB standards will be revised along with the change of the times and it is necessary to reorganize what constitutes Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 In this volume the parts that will never change despite of the revision of Part 1 of the STD B25 in the future are assumed as follow a b c The
317. nd operations that a receiver performs when possible Confirm a connection partner in advance to avoid connecting to a false center refer to 7 1 1 2 Encrypt the viewer information of which privacy should be protected before sending Functions and operations that a center performs when possible The viewer information of which privacy should be protected must be available for only a person who has to operate that information 3 Level 2 Functions and operations that a center performs when possible Use access rights control to restrict people who can readout or register the viewer information to manage the viewer information of which privacy should be protected 4 Level 3 Functions and operations that a center performs when possible If it is unavoidably necessary to connect to another network such as the Internet in order to enhance a service setup a firewall to prevent leakage of the viewer information 1 2 2 Protection of copyright Table 1 5 shows items that should be considered for protecting copyright classified into four levels Table 1 5 Protection level of copyright Security level Major application Required module system example feature Level 3 Super distribution Free distribution Dedicated device dedicated management management center Level 2 Copy protection Prevention of recording in Copy protection digital receiver watermarking Level 1 Eavesdrop resistant Simple copy protection Receiver Tamper
318. ne and contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code IC card replacement The IC card needs to be replaced Please contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code Other errors This IC card cannot be used Please contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code Invalid IC card when scrambled broadcasting is received See 4 16 Valid Invalid Non usable IC Card in this volume for valid invalid and non usable IC Cards This IC card cannot be used Please insert the correct IC card Code ECOI For the code in the example 11 the error code mentioned above is displayed instead of the card return code When CA system id is not consistent See 4 24 in this volume for the judgment of CA_system_id consistency The program cannot be viewed with this IC card Please contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code EC02 For the code in the example 12 the error code mentioned above is displayed instead of the card return code 5 38 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 18 2 Related Standards Please refer to Part 1 Chapter 4 4 2 5 Error Notification Screen of the ARIB STD B25 Please refer to Volume 2 for the standardized error message 4 19 Operation When Valid IC Card Is Not Inserted 4 19 1 Error Message Display When Valid IC Card Is Not Inserted When the selected program is scrambled broadcasting and the receiver has dete
319. ne second For details refer to 11 2 in Part 1 Volume 4 BS Digital Broadcasting PSI SI Operation Regulations O Data broadcasting Refer to 7 2 2 7 2 3 Part 1 Volume 3 BS Digital Broadcasting Data Broadcasting Operation Regulations 5 2 4 Operation of the PAT and NIT 1 The order of services written in the PAT does not have any meaning and does not affect the operation of a receiver Normally services are written in the order of service_id 2 The order of TSs and services written in the NIT does not have any meaning and does not affect the operation of a receiver Normally services are written in the order of service_id or transport_stream_id 3 The same NIT is needed for all TSs in the network Therefore an NIT to be distributed shall be generated through the collection and compile of service information of individual stations 4 It is preferable that NIT data is updated for all TSs at almost the same time with managed version numbers 7 16 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 2 5 Handling the PMT and ES 1 2 3 In a case where ESs for video and audio are absent in steady status the PMT shall not include description about the ESs However this does not apply when in transition status such as seamless switching Normally the maximum number of ESs for subtitles and superimposed texts shall be one Basically information on these ESs shall be added to or deleted from the PMT when subtitles and su
320. ned above and Retry over notification is set in the IC card user call in can be issued by user call in request command by the user operation 4 12 2 Retry Over Notification Function When a call in is failed because the line is busy the receiver returns Call in failure to the IC card by Call connection status notifying command If the call connection could not be established after several call in attempts the IC card will set Retry over notification as an instruction of the IC card If Retry over notification of the IC card instruction is set the receiver notifies that the communication failed when the power is on when a PPV is purchased or when the user operates the menus etc 4 12 3 User Call in Request Function When Retry over notification of IC card instruction is set the receiver can call up the viewing history information center by issuing a user call in request command to the IC card by the user operation It is assumed that the user call in request function is operated when the user operation activates this function on the menu etc when the power is on or when a PPV program is purchased 4 12 4 Notification Function of Viewing History Information Upload Date and Time This function is expected to be used when the receiver is not connected to phone line all the time It is to prevent call in failure by displaying the viewing history upload date and time at the top of the screen
321. nformation descriptor is located in SDT or EIT In case of the protected free program without chargeable ES No 3 in Table 5 2 it is possible to transmit EMM to update Kw although EMM is not normally transmitted because the program does not require customer management To handle the EMM message see Volume 5 of this document To transmit the components other than the default ES group without scrambling specify ECM PID Ox1FFF in the second loop of PMT To charge ESs other than the default ES group use a unique broadcaster group identifier rather than the common broadcaster group identifier described in section 5 3 2 for copyright protection To broadcast the protected free program use the following broadcaster group identifier Broadcaster group identifier CA_broadcaster_group_id Ox1E RO ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 4 Operation Rules for Content Protection 5 4 1 Transmission Operation Rules If copy control type in the digital copy control descriptor is 01 follow the rules described in Table 5 3 Table 5 3 Operation Rules for Content Protection Generation control using the digital copy control information Output Service type f Copy free Copy one Cooner protection py generation Pay per view Charges viewing fee for a single program or Available Available Available Ee specific program series Moos Pay program Available Available Unavailable ae Flat tier 2 Protected free p
322. nging to the same media type in the same broadcaster In order to prevent false recognition of the series the same value shall not be allocated to another series for 100 days at least Other identifiers can be allocated by individual consignment broadcasters on their own decisions 7 56 8 2 Identifier List The tables below list the unique values of the identifiers to be allocated inside the BS digital broadcasting ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 network 8 2 1 TS id list Table 8 2 1 BS digital broadcasting TS id list as of April 1 2007 TS id Repeater Consignment Broadcaster 0x4010 Ich Asahi Satellite Broadcasting Limited 0x4011 Ich BS i Incorporated 0x4030 3ch WOWOW INC 0x4030 3ch WORLD INDEPENDENT NETWORKS JAPAN Inc 0x4031 3ch B S Japan Corporation 0x4031 3ch The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting 0x40d0 13ch B S NIPPON CORPORATION 0x40d1 13ch Fuji Satellite Broadcasting Inc 0x40d1 13ch WX24 0x40f0 15ch STAR CHANNEL INC 0x40f1 15ch Japan Broadcasting Corporation Simul channel 0x40f2 15ch Japan Broadcasting Corporation 0x40f3 15ch Nippon BS Broadcasting Corporation 7 57 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 2 2 service id list Table 8 2 2 BS digital broadcasting service id list as of April 1 2007 Consignment Broadcaster Television Radio Data ___ Allocatableid Alloc
323. nner reer nner rrerrerrrerrrrrrn 6 1 1 1 BEDE EE EG 6 1 1 2 BS Level 3 TT HOE EE EE EG 6 1 2 GIE ETE EE EE ety 6 2 3 Definition of terms and abbreviation see ees sees cert Re ee eke ee ene ee ER ee ER ee Ee ee ER Bee ee ER Re ee ee bee ee ee ee ee 6 3 4 System configuration and connection type of bi directional data broadcasting service information 6 8 4 1 ETE TE EG 6 8 4 2 Facility associated with bi directional data broadcasting service operator ivevevenenenenenees 6 8 43 Facility associated with hOSt tees esse ee eek eee eee teeteenneeeeeeeeeeeenceneseeeneaseeeeneaseenenteeseeenaney 6 9 44 Receiver s function for line Connection rr ree ee ee ER ee ER ee eee ee ee ee ee ee SR eens Re ER Re ee Re ee ee ee Ne ee ee 6 9 4 5 Connection type Heere ER eke EER REEKSE EER GER Ke R ee KEER GER ee R GEKEER GER ER ee KeeR ERK ERK ee ee R ee R ee R ee Rae R ee REK ee Roe RR ee ee Reese 6 9 4 5 1 Direct connection ese ees Ee ee RS ER SE ER SE ER ee ER ee ER ee ER ee ER ee ER ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ees ee ee ees 6 9 4 5 2 Network service vcccrcerccceeeeteceeeeteeceeeeneeceeseaeeeenseaeeeeesnaeecessnceeeesaceeeesacesenssaceseessaeesenscatereeseaeer es 6 10 4 53 Down radio wave and uplink 1 1stereereteeteretteeseteeeieseneeteeenenteencneneeeneneneenenneseeseenseceneees 6 11 4 5 4 Internet connection Level 3 veers tee eee reeieeeeeeneneeeneeneneneeneanesenensaeaeeneeenees 6 11 5 Communication protocol Ek etree EER ER EE KERR ERGE
324. not be specified as differential information 5 10 4 Example of Differential Information Use The example of the format number 0x01 is shown below 1 Message main body EMM common message Thank you for your subscription The BS special package is available for viewing for Mr Ms 0x1A from today 2 Differential information EMM individual message Tanaka 3 Generated message Thank you for your subscription The BS special package is available for viewing for Mr Ms Tanaka from today 5 66 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 10 5 Character Code The character and control codes that can be used for the format number 0x01 are as follows 1 2 The character codes and the control codes defined in 4 Character String Encoding in Volume 4 The inserter Ox1A 5 10 6 Recommended Display Position of Automatic Display Message The guideline for the display position and frames etc for automatic display message is described The first byte of the message code main body in the EMM common message section should be Recommended display position and it is defined as follow The upper 4 bits should be the recommended display position of horizontal direction 0100 Left 0010 Center and 0001 Right and the lower 4 bits should be the recommended display position of vertical direction 0100 Top 0010 Center and 0001 Bottom The message should be a local dialog of the receiver The bytes mentione
325. nput 11 1 and record device Copy never 4 Other than 00 Copy one Copying is limited to one generation 2 generation but Macrovision is not applied Therefore copying is 00 1 possible by the conventional analog 01 record device Copying is prohibited after one Other copy 4 10 than 00 Copy one Copying is limited to one generation generation but Macrovision is not Output in applied Therefore copying is 00 1 MPEG TS is possible by the conventional analog 11 prohibited record device Copying is prohibited after one Other copy 4 than 00 8 10 rT x2 3 4 SD 6 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 For the high speed digital interface output operation for Copy never for the source function specified by DTCP is performed When however only the audio stream is output in the IEC60958 conformant format operation for No more copies is performed For the high speed digital interface output operation for Copy one generation for the source function specified by DTCP is performed Applied to the composite and component video output This is also applied when outputting the received video signals by converting the format The Macrovision control applies to the 4801 composite and component video signals For details of analog video output see sections 6 3 and 6 5 2 of this document For the high speed digital interface output encryption is applied according to DTCP When however only the audio str
326. ns that PPV purchase command will not be accepted after the deadline time and more specifically the offset time from the beginning of the program is listed For example if the program is not available for viewing due to raining etc at the program s starting time it can be discovered at the time of setting the reservation that the program cannot be purchased since the deadline of reserved purchase passes after the program starts On program reservation when the CA contract information descriptor does not exist in SDT and EIT and free CA mode is 0 it is considered that the reservation can be made without any condition Free program However even in this case IC card insertion is also required when the program is received because the program may be a free program with content protection Therefore displaying the messages to advise valid IC card insertion at the time of free program reservation is desirable when IC card is not inserted or the IC card is not valid When the CA contract information descriptor does not exist and free CA mode is 1 the reservation cannot be made The CA contract information descriptors define the contract confirmation information of the entire service in the SDT and they define that of each program in the EIT When these descriptors are defined in both the SDT and the EIT the definition in the EIT has priority 5 11 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 9 2 Cancellation of Reserved Program Once a
327. nsequence when a viewer purchases certain ES with view only option even the main program cannot be recorded if the receiver outputs the partial TS only on a program by program basis Thus the transmission should be operated in accordance with this point ii Receiver processing After choosing a program when the PPV purchase is operated for the default ES group the PPV purchase operation of recordable purchase should be conducted based on the content of the digital copy control descriptor and the IC card response The content of the digital copy control descriptor should be rewritten only when the program was purchased for view only and not for recording See Volume 4 and Volume 8 in this document for the detail When the ES of 0x00 0x3F component tag excluding default ES group is charged for each ES by the separate ECM additional purchase operation will be carried out as the ES is selected The IC card response of the separate ECM at this time is Recordable The receiver processes the recording control of 0x00 0x3F component tag in accordance with the purchase result of the default ES group in order to achieve the control of either recordable purchase or view only purchase for the ES that is subject of the digital copy control descriptor listed in the first loop of the PMT In other words when the default ES group is purchased for view only the ES purchased additionally should be view only in the purchase operation result as well
328. nstruction is incremented accordingly Also when the frame configuration does not change like start control bit operation the change instruction is incremented at the same time as TMCC is updated 6 2 2 Transmission mode slot information The setting of the transmission mode shall conform to ARIB STD B20 In a case where a transmission method other than TC8PSK has been selected the number including that of dummy slots shall be written in the field for the number of slots 6 2 3 Relative TS slot information This instructs allocation of the 48 slots based on the relative TS numbers With respect to the same modulation method arrangement is performed so that slots are put together at the front and arranged in the ascending order of the numbers In a case where a transmission method other than TC8PSK has been allocated the relevant relative TS numbers including those of dummy slots are displayed 6 2 4 Relative TS TS id correspondence table For relative TSs not allocated OxFFFF shall be written Therefore OxFFFF shall not be used as TS id The change in the number of slots allocated to stream break free TS id and relative TS numbers is not assumed at the present stage If these changes occur by any chance the consistency of the TMCC information and the actual change of TS_id or PCR is not guaranteed 6 2 5 Transmission reception control information The bit operation of the start control signal shall conform to the description in 6
329. ntent availability descriptor and information about the restriction for the use of the copy created from the said information Section 8 8 of this document describes examples of the user attempts to be prevented because they may change information 7 2 4 Local encryption To output the content specified in section 7 1 2 of this document as a subject of protection to the user access bus specified in section 7 2 2 of this document or a subject of storing in the storing media specified in section 7 2 3 of this document the local encryption must be used to encrypt the content to be protected For the local encryption the appropriate management must be performed so that no user can access the encryption algorithm and encryption key 8 21 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 2 4 1 Level of the Local Encryption Local encryption must use the encryption key with the 56 bit long or more which is at a level of the symmetric key cryptography or higher and sufficiently secure the encryption algorithm for example DES 7 2 4 2 Management of the Key The key used to encrypt the content must not be output from the receiver output to the user access bus or stored in the record media as it is In addition if the record media is connected to other receiver or the devices or copied to a record medium on other device playback of the content must be restricted by utilizing the secure key management such as using a unique key for the receiver or t
330. nter according to the service content e The information fee surrogate collection service A system collectes information fee that has been set in advance Necessary function for receiver Communication function The information fee surrogate collection service A does not need the implemnetaion of new protocol Necessary function for center Program information delivery function A function to deliver information about a program related to data broadcasting and necessary information for the information fee surrogate collection service A information such as a program outline notified previously before providing of information Items to be considered for operation A dedicated line for providing information should be set up at the access point of the collection network PHS phones and mobile phones cannot use this service Flow to start the information fee surrogate collection service A A program project document is examined After an ethical review organization completes investigation a contract of the information fee surrogate collection service A is set up 2 3 2 Information fee surrogate collection service B Figure 2 2 shows an example of information surrogate collection service B 6 84 1 2 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Broadcast station Program contents Program Information information Servei HH Program information Information surrogate collection service B network Information fee c
331. nts of different hierarchies correspond each other due to absence of an English low hierarchy component but hierarchization of English components is not resulted 7 35 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 In this case the low hierarchy presents Japanese components by adding a descriptor also to the English component of the high hierarchy and setting 401 as the reference value but it depends on receivers whether the English component is restored Therefore broadcasters must recognize the following when operating hierarchical modulation of multiple suites of audio The type of language may be changed at the time of restoration in a case where avoiding audio intercept is intended To avoid switch to a different language prepare a service corresponding to the low hierarchy or do not perform hierarchy operation Table 7 1 3 Handling audio components without the low hierarchy High hierarchy Reference value Low hierarchy Reference value High to low Low to high ES PID of descriptor ES PID of descriptor Japanese 301 401 301 gt 401 401 301 Japanese 401 301 401 gt 301 401 302 401 OF English 302 401 302 No descriptor 302 gt x x 302 2 In a case where any procedure is taken for example the original ADTS is memorized by a receiver Duplicative reference regarding multi view TV Multi view TV refers to application by w
332. o Content Protection System VCPS 1 Table B 2 10 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by VCPS Table B 2 10 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control for VCPS Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control copy_control digital encryption EYES PY_ E recording ae type control data 1 Recordable as Copy Free 7 00 0 Recordable as EPNE1 4 6 01 10 Dent ears Recordable a Copy One Generation with updating CGMS to The associated AV Sectors may not be copied gt 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free 7 s 10 Don t care Not recordable 11 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 dd Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free 7 1 This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for the high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 2 If the servi
333. o Format esse sesse se se see ee EE ee ee GE ee ee Ee Ee ee ee ee ee GR ee EE Ee ee Ee Ee Re ee EE ee ee ees ee ee ees 7 38 72 1 Video format switching operation Ee 7 38 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 72 2 HDTV operation with three service IDS ese etre eet et Ee EER ec EER Ee eee EE Ee ee eee ee Ee Ee Re ee Ee ee ee see 7 38 7 2 3 Operation at the sender side regarding video format switching terre see ee ees sesse er ere ere 7 38 7 3 Temporary Scheduling ee 7 3 8 7 3 1 Service 01 5 6 6 Meee occ 7 38 7 32 Reguirements on temporary TEE EE EG 7 39 73 3 Temporary services and normal services eers ee ekke ee ekke RR ee RR ee Re ER ee RE RE Re Re ER ee Roe ee 7 39 734 Operation ofa temporary TEE EE EE EE ecco 7 39 73 5 Implementation of event relay through a temporary service cvvvevevevenennnnneereneres 7 41 7 4 MUIti VIiCW MNRE EE EE OE RE EG 7 42 7 4 1 Service OVELVICW AE EE ER EO EE EE IG 7 42 7 4 2 Reguirements for VLARTETTE EE EE EE EE EE 7 42 7 4 3 MVTV operation method EE EE EE EG 7 42 7 4 4 Operation and coexistence of multiple service IDS eer esse se Ee Ee EE EE EE Ee EE EE EE ee ee ee ee ee ee ese 7 44 7 5 Event Relay ee 7 44 7 6 Handling Broadcasting TIETE EE ER OR EE ET 7 46 1 7 Clock Operation Ee 7 48 7 7 1 Absolute delay lee EE EE EE EG 7 48 7 12 Event issue start end etc al EE EG 7 48 7 7 3 Time ticker and time tone Ee ese ees EER EE EE EE EE EE EE EE Ee EER ER ee ER Ee Re ee GR Ee ee Ee Ee Re ee EE ee ee ee ee ee ee ees
334. o the purchase result are as follow 1 When a program was purchased with recording The digital recording control data of the digital copy control descriptor should be kept and processed with 10 After the purchase is complete the macrovision control of the analog video output of the receiver should be off The parameters of the output to CGMS A or high speed digital interface use the descriptions on the 5 16 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 digital copy control descriptor and the content availability descriptor as they are 2 When a program was purchased for view only The digital recording control data of the digital copy control descriptor should be rewritten to 11 and then processed When a program was purchased for view only the digital recording control data is processed with 11 following the process mentioned above and the APS_control data is processed with other than 00 More specifically the macrovision control of the analog video output of the receiver should be on For the parameters of the output to CGMS A or high speed digital interface the digital recording control data will be rewritten to 11 and the APS control data uses the descriptions on the digital copy control descriptor as they are When a program is purchased for view only it is the same as the copy prohibited content As a result it can be stored temporally until the time regulated in temporally storage
335. o the requirements described in Appendix B 2 6 Content protection system or recording Video Content Protection System VCPS 4 format Applied media recording format DVD RW DVD RW Video Format DVD R and DVD R Dual Layer DVD R Video Format Applied service TV service and data service 7 Royal Philips Electronics Licenser Hewlett Packard Contact http www licensing philips com Requirement To be installed according to the requirements described in Appendix B 2 7 Content protection system or recording MagicGate Type R for Secure Video Recording format MG R SVR for EMPR gt Applied media recording format EMER Wypedenc EMER DPS N EMPR Video File Format Applied service TV service and data service 8 Licenser Sony Corporation Piet Intellectual Property Strate gy Intellectual Property Center Sony Corporation Reguirement To be installed according to the reguirements described in Appendix B 2 8 9 Content protection system or recording Security Architecture for Intelligent Attachment format device SAFIA Applied media recording format iVDR Hard Disk Drive TV Recording Specification Applied service TV service audio service and data service SANYO Electric Co Ltd Sharp Corporation ee Pioneer Corporation Hitachi Ltd Contact http www safia lb com 8 33 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Method No Approved item Description To be installed according to the requir
336. ocation slot positions A conversion table allows reference to actual TS ids Ist class 2nd class start signal Distinction for emergency warning broadcasting For the Ist class the special measures law for large earthquakes and the Basic Law on Natural Disasters are followed and for the 2nd class the weather business law is followed Region code Code that indicates the relevant region allocated in an emergency information descriptor at the time of emergency warning broadcasting ARIB STD B10 appendix D Low hierarchy Hierarchy for which a modulation system that is hardly affected by interference multi value low is used when multiple modulation systems are used for transmission For BS digital broadcasting a modulation system other than TC8PSK is used for transmission The transmission efficiency is lowered but reception is possible even with low CN Transmission mode Distinction in terms of difference in the modulation system and error correction system Statistical multiplexing System by which picture quality is efficiently improved even within a restricted band by adjusting the bit rate according to the mutual coding difficulty when multiple suits of video are sent to one transmission channel Sub station Uplink station that is monitored and controlled by a main station This has a function for processing TS signals combined by a main station Superimposed characters Service that makes pi
337. ock cipher algorithm 5 JIS X 5056 3 Security techniques Entity authentication mechanism Part 3 Authentication mechanism using a public key algorithm 6 ISO IEC 9798 3 Information technology Security techniques Entity authentication mechanisms Part 3 Entity authentication using a public key algorithm 1 1 4 Partner authentication Basic function A common key cryptosystem is used message recovery method Figure 1 5 shows the simple partner authentication method using a common key cryptosystem Match No error Not match Tampered data or transmission error Common Common key key cryptosystem Common key cryptosystem It is not always necessary to send them ID random numbers time stamp Figure 1 5 Simple partner authentication method using a common key cryptosystem In a common key cryptosystem when a sender and a verifier have shared a common key in advance the common key is used to encrypt a message at the sender side and to decrypt the message at the receiver side Then if the message makes sense that sender can be identified In case of two way authentication a verifier performs a simple calculation such as addition of 1 to the random numbers that a sender creates according to a prior agreement of both parties encrypts that data again and returns it to confirm the sender as a simpler method it is also possible to identify a partner by using the caller ID notification functi
338. oes not apply to broadcasters who had set more number of logo IDs before the establishment of the rule When finishing broadcasting services broadcasters shall replace used logo files with transparent ones so that the logos are not displayed even if selectable with a receiver In a case where new broadcasters use logo files that had been used by former broadcasters and have been kept in the range allocated to the new broadcasters the files shall be replaced Appendix table 8 2 4 shows the logo ID and service_id allocation scheduled in December 1 2007 and afterward Appendix table 8 2 4 BS digital broadcasting logo ID list Z o Logo service id Remark Broadcaster ID 000h 101 NHK 00lh 102 002h 103 104 105 003h 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 004h 005h 006h 007h 008h 009h_ 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 B S Japan 11 00Ah 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 Note 1 12 00Bh 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 13 00Ch 14 00Dh 15JOOEh 16 00Fh 17 010h 18 011h CON OM PEL rR NO O 7 69 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 19 012h 150 151 154 155 156 157 158 159 450 45 1 452 453 454 457 458 459 20 013h 152 21 014h 153 22 015h 455 23 016h 456 Note 1 Note 1 24 017h 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 25 018h
339. of the characters and the bytes that can be described in the transfer confirmation message should be within 80 characters and 160 bytes excluding the 8 bits for the message number In addition to the previous description the maximum number of character should be 24 double byte characters per line and the number of display line should be 6 lines or less including line breaks due to the 5 72 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 assumption of display frame etc in the receiver The character and control codes that can be used for the transfer confirmation message should be the codes defined in 4 Character String Encoding in Volume 4 in this document If the same message number is used for multiple service id s in the same TS the transmission of message contents can be omitted by limiting the private data byte to 8 bits of the message number The message main body of the message number described in the same TS must be transmitted with that TS The types of the transfer confirmation message sent simultaneously on digital satellite broadcasting should be 20 types or less and the message number for CA alternative service should be between 21 and 40 0x15 0x28 as a guideline for the RAM cache in the receiver The description related to the number assignment management of the message number for CA alternative can be found in Appendix B 1 When the built in message of the receiver is displayed no description exists in the private data byte area
340. ogram via the broadcasting signals to the receiver that satisfies the content protection requirement specified by this volume rather than to perform customer management to limit the viewer For the BS digital broadcasting as the products were released recently the compatibility to the existing BS digital broadcasting receivers is taken into consideration and it is determined to utilize the scrambled free program function described in Part 1 of ARIB STD B25 without performing customer management 8 1 2 Exceptional Operation before Implementation To start operation of the protected free program the relevant Kw must be distributed to the IC card that came with the receiver shipped before implementation In a certain period of time before the operation EMM is distributed for this purpose To smoothly handle the checking and inquiry in the market whether the relevant Kw is written to the card it is assumed that test broadcasting is transmitted for a fixed period of time to check the writing of Kw This test broadcasting might be operated differently in the following points from the definition of the protected free program 1 When the default ES group is not scrambled and ES other than the default ES group is scrambled with the common broadcaster group identifier for right protection Different from the definition of the protected free program the second loop of PMT contains ECM 2 When in the default ES group either video or audio is not
341. on at the time of site diversity The values of N and M are as below N 16 M 0 If TMCC change that precedes the switch of the transmission method and others occurs during the start period of start control bit 4 this operation is reflected as it is 7 29 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 4 4 Actual operation example When uplink disconnection due to rainfall attenuation is expected switching shall be performed regardless of the contents of programs As for switching back from a sub station to a main station the following operation shall be considered picture freezing and audio muting period is determined and provided among broadcasters who share the same repeater so that a failure on a receiver is not detected by switching back during this period Figure 6 4 2 shows how the signals would be just before and after switching This example represents a case of switch from a main station to a sub station carrier Change instruction bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 Receiver operation indefinite period Figure 6 4 2 Site diversity operation overview 6 5 Phase reference Burst For BS transmission line encoding four symbol phase reference burst signals are inserted in the unit of 207 symbols in the signal parts except synchronization and TMCC aiming steady reception with low CN According to the present departmental regulations this symbol is a BPSK signal diffused by the ninth PN signal it is technically possible to trans
342. on can be altered by this unit Slot Unit for selection regarding TS and modulation systems This represents an absolute allocation position in a combined TS frame TS and the modulation system are defined by slot locations It is composed of 204 bytes that include MPEG signal TS packets 188 bytes and Reed Solomon 16 bytes Direct channel selection One of the channel selection methods with a receiver By this method the numeric buttons on the remote control unit are used to directly specify a service ID and select a service Down mix coefficient When the down mix conversion from multi channel stereo signals into 2 channel stereo signals is performed to allow watching and listening this coefficient is used to obtain 2 channel stereo components from individual multi channel stereo components through calculation Dummy slot Slot for allocating null packets to be inserted according to the frequency use efficiency determined by the modulation system in order to even out the base band processing speed and PCR when a modulation system other than TC8PSK is used Data coding system ID data_component_id This identifies a data transmission system Default maximum bit rate Value automatically used when a bit rate value is not specified by a digital copy control descriptor Dual mono Audio mode for operating two monaural audio lines within a single ADTS Transport stream TS Transport ID TS id N
343. on or others that a network service provides according to the security requirement 6 69 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Reference 1 JIS X 5056 3 Security technigues Entity authentication mechanisms Part 2 Authentication mechanism using symmetric cryptosystem algorithms 2 ISO IEC 9798 3 Information technology Security techniques Entity authentication mechanisms Part 2 Entity authentication using symmetric encipherment algorithms Advanced function A public key cryptosystem is used Ask to provide a certificate X 509 that a certificate issuing authority issues for a public key cryptosystem and verify it with the public key cryptosystem to authenticate a communication partner Figure 1 6 shows the partner authentication method using a public key cryptosystem i Match No error Verification Not match Tampered data or transmission error Signature hash hash Plaintext Signer Verifier Figure 1 6 Partner authentication using a public key cryptosystem As a simpler method a simple authentication described in X 509 which uses the hash function as a one way function is also applicable Reference 1 X 509 directory Framework of authentication 1 1 5 Signature Basic information A common key cryptosystem is used Add Message Authentication Code mentioned in the data to be signed alternatively Advanced function The message digest function and a public key cryptosystem are used Figure
344. on scrambled broadcasting reception Mail Mandatory Automatic display message during Mandatory storing and replaying in the receiver with storage function 5 Data encryption of interactive IRD data transmission Do not install service 6 CA alternative service Message display listed in the link Optional descriptor and link operation of the possible linkage based on the service type 7 Free program with content Normal viewing Mandatory protection Program reservation Optional Error display Mandatory When the receiver equips the program reservation function the reservation function for pay broadcasting should be also equipped in principle The IRD data transmission which uses the encryption decryption processing of the IC card should not be operated The modem is mandatory if the data broadcasting interactive service function is equipped However it should be optional in mobile receivers for mobile objects such as cars or small and lightweight portable TVs NO and a function that can display properly the non compliant message for the non supported broadcasting contents should be installed in the receiver In addition the fact that the receiver is noncompliant should be explained by various methods such as describing in the user manual or the catalog Note The portable TV is defined as a display integrated receiver operated by DC power source AC adapter etc with the monitor size not larger tha
345. on should send only a fundamental phone number on the air Do not add a carrier ID number e g 00XY However a phone number for reverse charging that starts from OOXY e g OOXY SC is excluded Do not add a special number 122 that cancels a fixed preferred connection forcibly Do not add a special number 186 that let a caller phone number be notified forcibly without approval of a viewer When a special number 186 is added and sent over a reliable procedure should be performed to get the approval of viewer For example display a confirmation message before broadcasting a program and ask for a user s approval action on the BML contents or let an receiver add the number 186 2 Operation of network specification identification A broadcast station must turn ON this flag for a phone number for which a caller ID notification number and carrier ID number can be added It must turn OFF this flag when a number addition function of a receiver must be disabled temporarily Table 6 3 shows the flag operation in the current phone number system This function is applicable for receivers that come to market after version 2 2 revision of this document and applied to all receivers that come to market as a new model one year after the revision 3 When a phone number is described in contents and detection of SDT second dial tone is required in the phone number use a pause to rate as SDT detection In pause time of di
346. on that should be considered when installing the CAS functions in digital satellite broadcasting receivers 1 3 Scope This specification document applies to the receiver specifications and the transmission operation provisions for the Conditional Access System CAS method which complies with Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Applicable Documents Telecommunications Technology Council Advisory Report No 17 Telecommunications Technology Council Advisory Report No 74 Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Ordinance No 26 2003 Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Notification No 36 2003 Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Notification No 37 2003 Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Notification No 40 2003 ARIB STD B10 Service Information for Digital Broadcasting System ARIB STD B20 Transmission System for Digital Satellite Broadcasting ARIB STD B21 Receiver for Digital Broadcasting 10 ARIB STD B25 Conditional Access System Specifications for Digital Broadcasting Part 1 11 ARIB STD B24 Data Coding and Transmission Specification for Digital Broadcasting 3 Terminology and Abbreviations Table 3 1 Explanation of Terminology and Abbreviations ARIB Association of Radio Industries and Business Association of Radio Industries and Business Broadcaster
347. on update contents should have a screen function that shows multiple names in the shared area to viewers and prompt them to link those names and information registered in the back channel one by one It is recommended that an ID for reservation shown to a registrant at the time of registration via the Internet and password that the registrant input are used for reservation of registration information at the center side 6 47 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 4 Recommended receiver function 6 4 1 Information managed by receiver Specification A A receiver stores communication related information that shows the receiver s hardware state and the viewer setting information set by a viewer 1 Communication related information 1 2 Security class Showing a security level that a receiver has Class 0 No security function is installed Class 1 Security function with CAS module is installed Line type Showing available line types among lines that a receiver has Multiple line types can be specified e g PSTN mobile phone line PHS line Physical layer protocol Showing available physical layer protocols for every line type that a receiver has Multiple protocols can be specified e g V 22bis MNP4 PSTN 32kKPIAFS PHS PDC mobile phone Data link and transfer protocol Showing data link establishment and data transfer protocols between a receiver and a center collection networks which a receiver has
348. onal Access System ID CA system id which identifies a Conditional Access System High guality stereo Stereo broadcasting with audio guality that is eguivalent to B mode of the standard television of the current satellite broadcasting High hierarchy Hierarchy for which a modulation system that is easily affected by interference multi value high is used when multiple modulation systems are used for transmission For BS digital broadcasting TC8PSK is used for transmission Subtitle Service that makes TV broadcasting pictures be superimposed by related text Main station Uplink station that performs TS synthesis and is capable of monitoring and controlling a sub station from a remote location Reduced video One type of video format for reducing the amount of information for the low hierarchy through hierarchical modulation The lines are thinned so that reduced pictures are displayed on a screen Arbitrary CN Limit reception CN ratio that allows a receiver to demodulate signals steadily 7 6 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Information provider ID Information that identifies information providers used in ERT and reference descriptors Still picture One type of video format for reducing the amount of information for the low hierarchy through hierarchical modulation This is presented by transmitting only I pictures periodically Relative TS number Number for identifying up to eight TS all
349. onding copy control for AACS HD DVD Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for AACS HD DVD Copy control T encryption _ K recording mode yp control data 1 Recordable as Copy Free with specifying Primitive CCI as Copy freely 00 Recordable applying Encryption Plus Non Assertion 0 EPN with encrypting the content and updating Primitive CCT to Protection Using AACS but copy control restrictions not asserted without redistribution 4 ol Recordable as Copy One Generation with encrypting the py rypting 10 Don t care content and updating Primitive CCI to No more copies 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable ec y s wae 3 00 D ntcare Recordable as Copy Fise with specifying Primitive CCI as Copy freely 1 10 Don t care Not recordable 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 ot Don t care Don t care Not recordable a ma ar er 3 No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free with specifying Primitive CCI as Copy freely This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for the high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict cop
350. ontent Protection for Recordable Media CPRM SD Video 1 Table B 2 8 shows the recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control specified by CPRM SD Video Table B 2 8 Digital recording control by the digital copy control and content availability descriptors and the corresponding copy control for CPRM SD Video Content Digital copy descriptor availability descriptor Availability of digital recording and the copy control digital for CPRM SD Video Copy control _ om encryption _ recording_ iode type control data 1 Recordable as Copy Free Not encrypted 00 Recordable applying Encryption Plus Non Assertion EPN 0 pplying ryp sd with encrypting the content as EPN asserted 3 ei 10 Dortea Recordable as Copy One Generation with pie the content and updating CCI to Copy is never permitted 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Not encrypted 10 Don t care Not recordable 11 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 Al Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Not encrypted 1 This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the ou
351. opy control field for the CPS Unit Usage File and Embedded CCI CCl Definition in the CPS Unit Definition in the Embedded CCI Usage File 00 Copy Control Not Asserted Copy Control Not Asserted 01 No More Copy No More Copy 10 Reserved Copy One Generation 11 Reserved Reserved Table B 2 23 EPN control field for the CPS Unit Usage File and Embedded CCl EPN Definition 0 EPN asserted 1 EPN unasserted Table B 2 24 APS control field for the CPS Unit Usage File and Embedded CCI EE 7 AES io ne Se PG or ie Definition Unit Usage File Embedded CCI control descriptor 00 000 00 APS off 01 001 01 Type 1 of APS1 is ON 10 010 10 Type 2 of APS1 is ON 11 011 11 Type 3 of APS1 is ON 8 55 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 This page is intentionally left blank 8 56 OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL SATELLITE BROADCASTING ARIB TECHNICAL REPORT ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Fascicle 3 September 26 2007 This Document is based on ARIB technical report of Operational Guidelines for Digital Satellite Broadcasting in Japanese edition and translated into English in December 2007 Published by Association of Radio Industries and Businesses Nittochi Bldg 11F 1 4 1 Kasumigaseki Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0013 Japan TEL 81 3 5510 8590 FAX 81 3 3592 1103 Printed in Japan All rights reserved
352. or Plaintext Encryption Decryption Figure 1 1 Vernam cipher common cryptosystem Linear feedback shift register output is used as a random number generator of Vernam cipher Key progression rt Register value at each digit hi Function changing register value Figure 1 2 Simple cipher device with linear feedback shift register 1 1 2 Other modules for security 1 2 3 Message digest hash function This is a mathematical function that maps a large in some cases very large area into a small area In order to acquire a good hash function one way function and collision free must be established simultaneously Message authentication code A message certifier can be created with a common key cryptosystem Generally it is Initial Vector value initial value acquired as a result of calculation by the CBC mode of common cryptosystem encryption mode A short message can be supported by padding Pseudo random number There are cases where pseudo random numbers are necessary and where accurate random numbers are necessary For the random numbers defined in this document pseudo random numbers seem to be sufficient When completely identical data streams are sent with a common key cryptosystem if the key and the initial value are same the results are perfectly same even tough they are encrypted If this characteristic 6 66 4 5 6 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El is misused
353. or recordable PPV purchase operation is described in the first loop of PMT When only the secondary audio 2 is operated as the recordable PPV purchase with separate ECM Primary Secondary Primary Secondary Data 3 audio audio 2 f Second i Data 4 video Data 5 audio w Main program PS Additional data The copy control descriptor is operated in the first loop in the PMT with CGMS 10 and APS 00 Figure A 4 1 Example of Recordable PPV Purchase and Copy Protection A 5 Special TS A 5 1 Overview Presuming the case of future IC card replacement the operation by the independent TS for EMM delivery is stipulated This is listed in the commentary section in consideration of the receiver design because the TS operation is not planned in the immediate future Please arrange the receiver design to allow the EMM reception with the EMM transmission repetition for the special TS mentioned in 5 9 3 EMM Transmission Repetition in this volume for the TS assumed below A 5 2 Special TS This special TS is different from the normal TS for the program operated during the power standby mode and it is expected to conduct the EMM delivery efficiently Therefore instead of the entire SI of all channels the necessary items indicated in Table A 5 1 are transmitted In other words the EIT and the SDT are not sent for the EPG of all channels and it is mainly aimed for the EMM acquisition to be sent in a shorter EMM transmission interval than the p
354. ory of the operational specifications of the conditional access system which is the role of this document Therefore in this case the formulation of new specifications should be responsible for the already circulated receivers by the time to be continuously used as much as possible without any problem Case 2 In this case multiple conditional access systems will exist Therefore this document standardizes it so that it does not cause any malfunction of the receiver Additional new specifications must be created for this case as the system becomes available Case 3 In this case multiple conditional access systems will exist as well as the case 2 and this document standardizes it so that it does not cause any malfunction of the receiver In this document considerations were taken so that new specifications would not be required when the system became 5 83 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 available To prepare for this case a specific number for CA system id is not indicated in this document Case 4 This case indicates that the content protection system of digital satellite broadcasting will be operated in the same way as the content protection on terrestrial digital television broadcasting or broadband CS digital broadcasting There are no specific technical concerns For the revision of operational provisions for the digital satellite broadcasting conditional access system the above descriptions are the basic concepts to
355. ot be performed following the change of the version number if the content of decoding processing does not change Guideline R1 3 Even if the PTS difference of audio PES packets fluctuates about 0 to 2 times just before and after switching muting processing shall be avoided as far as possible Minimize the problem through play clock pitch control skip repeat processing and others Guideline R1 4 Such an incomplete section that interrupts or starts halfway shall be discarded and a complete section received next shall be used 7 20 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 Transmission Line Encoding and Modulation 6 1 TS Synthesis TS signal synthesis processing shall be performed according to the following rules by uplink stations that synthesize modulate and uplink TS signals coming from consignment broadcasters 6 1 1 TS frame composition 1 For TS frame composition shall be performed according to each slot 2 Input ports shall be determined in the order of the licensed slot numbers and relative TS numbers 0 to 7 shall be assigned One relative TS number shall be allocated to one TS id 3 For the synthesis of multiple TSs that share the same repeater TSs shall be put together and arranged in the order of the slot numbers defined in the license with respect to the same modulation method 4 In a case where a single TS is shared by more than one business company a relative TS number determined
356. ot match Tampered data or transmission error Common key cryptosystem Common key cryptosystem Common key Common key Card ID pseudo random numbers time stamp Figure 7 1 Communication partner authentication with the message recovery method In a common key cryptosystem when a sender and a receiver verifier share a common key in advance the sender uses that common key to encrypt message Then the receiver decrypts the message and if that message is correct the sender can be confirmed 3 Level 2 In this level a series of cryptosystem commonly used in the Internet which is knows as the public key cryptosystem PKCS is used Required module in addition to Level 1 Public key cryptosystem function one way function certificate feature Required authority Certificate management authority CA which issues refers changes updates and discard a certificate 7 1 2 Information protection Table 7 3 shows information items that should be protected and security level of each item Table 7 3 Protection level of information Security level Handled viewer Required module system information network services Management of Customer management information access rights information function Level 1 Management of Personal name and Both Common cryptosystem information encryption address etc Level 0 No consideration Person s approval The functions within heavy line frame show a range th
357. other than Copy free is output the resolution must be limited up to 520 000 pixels per frame Until the end of 2005 however the temporary measure applies so that this restriction is not required for the HD content that is specified as Copy one generation or No more copies Note that when the RGB output is implemented the digital output for HDCP is recommended as it enables content protection The Copy free content can be output to the digital video output and digital video audio output When the digital copy control and content availability descriptors specify that a video or an audio is to be protected protection technology must be appropriately applied according to HDCP to output the content to the digital vireo output or the digital audio output Until the end of 2005 however the temporary measure applies so that the HD content other than Copy free can be output to the digital video output only if the resolution is limited up to 520 000 pixels per frame 6 3 2 Output Control by the Digital Copy Control Descriptor and Content Availability Descriptor Table 6 1 shows the requirement for the output to each terminal according to the digital copy control descriptors copy control type and digital recording control data and the content availability descriptor encryption_mode The content availability descriptors image constraint token retention mode and retention_state are handled as follows regardless o
358. ovider Partner authentication Using security function to authenticate a communication partner when it is necessary to confirm that partner Massive calls reception service Service that receives a vast amount of calls in a short time by using the function of a telephone switchboard Reverse charging Charging system where a called party pays communication charge Carrier Type I telecommunications carriers and Type II telecommunications carriers that provide telecommunication services Carrier ID number Identification number specified to each carrier included in telephone numbers e g OOXY Transmission mode Classification based on modulation method and error correction method Special number Short digit number starting from 1 in telephone number 1 XY number Call Making a phone call Call outgoing restriction A receiver side sets a limit on receivers that can call in order to avoid congestion at the access point Call delay A receiver delays a call for a given period in order to avoid congestion at the access point Plaintext Data before encryption Identification A method to confirm that a person has a right to access a receiver or an IC card Password phrase or PIN is used No control sequence TTY procedure No control sequence the simplest communication method is communication without defined procedures for resending or other operations on the upp
359. pect AO prog Pray pray 2 information sequence vertical _ horizontal _ size_value size_value 1 2 size size 1 240 360 240 352 3 1 2 480 720 3 240 360 240 352 2 1 4 480 720 1 aspect ratio information 2 4 3 display 3 16 9 display 2 progressive sequence 0 interlace system 1 noninterlace system Table 4 1 3 Receiver display image Type Encoder input image 4 3 monitor 16 9 monitor o O O O 16 9 L o m E o O IOI O 4 3 O oO For 2 and 4 it is assumed that in windows a receiver displays actual pictures having half size horizontal and vertical of the entire screen display 7 10 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Still pictures For the formats of still pictures regarding low hierarchy services adopt the formats and restrictions shown in table 4 1 4 those are included in table 3 4 Restrictions on assumed still picture coding parameters in 3 4 Video coding system in Chapter 3 of Appendix of ARIB STD B20 Table 4 1 4 Coding parameters for still pictures Restrictions on Restrictions on Seguence Header sequence Oth extension t vertical size horizontal aspect ratio frame rate progressive HE _value _size_value _ information _code _ sequence 1080 1440 1920 3 4 0 MP HL 3 7 1 MP H14L 480 720 2 3 4 0 MP
360. perimposed texts are started and ended but such a fixed operation also shall be possible that the PMT always include description about ES information When in multiview display subtitles and superimposed texts shall be available also on sub screens therefore three ESs maximum respectively Only one ES shall be subjected to fixed operation for subtitles and superimposed texts respectively subtitle ES of component_tag 0x30 in the PMT and ticker ES of component_tag x38 These always belong to component_group_id 0 For the correspondence of the ES and PMT of data broadcasting other than subtitles and superimposed texts refer to Chapter 5 Data Transmission method Operation in Part 1 Volume 3 BS Digital Broadcasting Data Broadcasting Operation Regulations 5 2 6 Default maximum bit rate Digital recording equipment may record only part of service partial TS included in TS In that case the maximum bit rate value is needed to secure the band for interface IEEE1394 and to calculate recording time In a case where the maximum bit rate of the service to be transmitted is over or below the following values significantly or is not defined the value is transmitted by a sender using the digital copy control descriptor Table 5 4 1 shows the default maximum bit rate for each component for data sum of the components related to additional data and table 5 4 2 shows the default maximum bit rate for each service For the descrip
361. pher algorithm 2 ISO IEC9797 Information technology Security techniques Data integrity mechanism using a cryptographic check function employing a block cipher algorithm Advanced function A public key cryptosystem and the message digest are used Data to be sent is processed with the message digest and then a signature is attached The message digest also called hash function JIS X 5057 ISO IEC 10118 is used to create a certain length of digest of a given length of data The data length of signature has a higher limit When attaching a signature to long data effectively create a digest of the data in preprocess and attach the signature to that digest data JIS X 5056 3 ISO IEC 9798 3 Figure 1 4 shows how to use a public key cryptosystem and the hash function i Match No error Verification Not match Tampered data or transmission error Signature Plaintext Signer Verifier Figure 1 4 Data integrity using a public key cryptosystem and hash function 6 68 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Reference 1 JIS X 5057 1 Security techniques Hash function Part 1 General statement 2 ISO IEC 10118 1 Information technology Security techniques Hash functions 3 JIS X 5057 2 Security techniques Hash function Part 2 Hush function using n bit block encryption algorithm 4 ISO IEC 10118 2 Information technology Security techniques Hash functions using n bit bl
362. phone number When number Reverse charging number dialing this number phone number Number for network service communication can be established 1 If there is no special note below a fundamental phone number is described as phone number Outside li Reds Special number Carrier ID number Fundamental capture number phone number Figure 6 2 Phone number that is necessary to originate a call 6 2 Phone number selection process flow A bi directional data broadcasting application hereafter abbreviated as application and a receiver perform following phases sequentially based on multiple phone numbers to select a proper phone number add a proper special number and carrier ID number and originate a call Figure 6 3 shows the process outline For a type that needs no dial up connection ADSL Level 3 FTTH Level 3 CATV Level 3 process from the phase I to the phase III are not performed Phase I Host phone number selection application function The application reads out communication related information stored in a receiver and selects one proper phone number from security classes and phone numbers that are necessary for application execution Phase IT Addition of special number and carrier ID number receiver function The receiver adds a proper special number and carrier ID number according to viewer setting information to the one phone number selected in the phase I Phase III Calling rece
363. ple TS packets the minimum T1 and the minimum T2 will be applied for each packet 5 8 5 4 ECM Update and Scrambling Key Change 2 The ECM update and the scrambling key change when two ECMs are applied are shown in the next figure Even if multiple ECMs are applied the scrambling key will be updated in the order of the procedure described in the previous section The update cycle of a single ECM is determined by the number of the ECM that exists in the PMT 5 61 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Update of ECM 1 Update of ECM 1 Update of ECM 2 ECM transmission Change of scrambling key Tl T1 TS packet group to which ECM1 is applied Change of scrambling ke TS packet group BRS to which ECM2 is applied Change of scrambling key 1600 ms lt T1 0 lt T2 T1 T2 gt 2000 ms T3 gt the number of ECM x 2000 ms Figure 5 8 2 ECM Update and Scrambling Key Change When Two ECMs Are Applied 5 8 6 Others 5 8 6 1 ECM and Scrambling If the conditional access system descriptor is not listed in the first or the second loop of the PMT it indicates that the transmission of the entire ES group that transmits the broadcasting program elements is not scrambled On the contrary even if the conditional access system descriptor is listed in the first or the second loop of the PMT the operation in which all the components that construct the service are not scrambled can be carried out Considerations of t
364. ple signature One way function Common key cryptosystem message application method Level 0 No consideration Memo of check number No need 1 Level 0 Example Ticket reservation service Some receivers have only restricted memory method or output 6 80 2 3 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El method even if they can receive reservation confirmation notes at the time of reservation Therefore it is recommended that centers have function to issue at least reservation confirmation numbers to deal with a problem in procedures However reservation confirmation numbers depend on complete reliability of centers Level 1 Example On line shopping When providing an on line shopping service needing exchanging money and product including digital contents it is necessary to create evidence of the trade for both parties in order to avoid a trouble For that purpose digital signature is an ideal method however a digital signature function cannot be used without implementation of the public key cryptosystem In this case Message Authentication Code MAC that can be used for a system implementing only a common key cryptosystem is available However although this method can prove that a signature has not been created by a third party it has no effect on runaround of a signature creator at the center side because a signature receiver also can create the same message This is a different point from a signature using a public key cryptosys
365. prepare for the new formulation of the content protection system in the future 5 84 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B Appendix B 1 Number Assignment Management of CA Alternative Message Number The message numbers for the CA alternative on digital satellite broadcasting are 20 types and they are between 21 and 40 0x15 0x28 The number of assignment should be the maximum of 2 types per broadcaster in principle The numbers should be assigned in ascending order without any duplication The receiver processing is carried out based on 4 22 in this volume The list of the message number assignment for CA alternative on digital satellite broadcasting is shown in Table B 1 1 Ifnew assignment is created it will be added to Table B 1 1 Table B 1 1 List of Message Number Assignment for CA Alternative Broadcaster name Message number for CA alternative WOWOW Inc 0x15 B 2 Contact for Inquiries regarding IC Card 1 CA system id 0x0005 Management company BS Conditional Access Systems Co Ltd Telephone 0570 000 250 URL http www b cas co jp 5 85 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 This page is intentionally left blank 5 86 Volume 6 BS Digital Broadcasting Bi directional Communication Operation Rules ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Contents EE TE RERREEEEEPRRe renee rrrrr nner nner nner nrerrnrrrr rrr rrr nr errr rrr rer nner rrr r nner nner rerr nner reer rere nner nner reer
366. pressed digital signal format and control signal to be protected A 2 Accreditation Criteria for the Digital Recording of the Audio Services 1 2 3 4 Basic requirement for copy control Appropriate copy control must be performed according to the copy control information specified by the digital copy control descriptors Inheriting copy control information The copy control information mentioned above must be inherited after recording and must be in effect when the content is played Protection for recording The content specified by the digital copy control descriptor as a subject of protection must be appropriately protected and recorded with the copy control information It is recommended that recording uses encryption technology If however content protection is required by the contract of the licenser this does not apply Protection for playing The content specified by the digital copy control descriptor as a subject of protection must be protected also when it is played 8 29 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 5 Restriction of the Internet retransmission The content specified by the digital copy control descriptor as a subject of protection must not be output without protection to a terminal used for Internet retransmission 6 Installation standard The function must be installed in a way that prevents an attempt to bypass or disable the content protection system or allow malicious extraction manipulation
367. program is reserved it can be still cancelled if the program has not started yet before issuing the PPV purchase command but it cannot be cancelled after the purchase If for some reasons the reserved program does not start playing even after the deadline of reserved purchase the reservation can be automatically cancelled It is desirable to install the means to provide the history of user s operations and the automatic cancellation mentioned above by the user operation when the reserved program is cancelled 4 9 3 Related Standards Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 4 4 2 4 Program Reservations Optional Reference 2 3 16 Program reservation 4 10 PPV Viewing Processing 4 10 1 Function Overview When the IC card instructs other than the preview period or the preview is terminated to switch to the program purchase by the user operation etc the user interface for purchasing will be displayed At this time it is desirable to show clearly the viewing fee obtained by the CA contract information descriptors listed in the EIT or the SDT the PPV status request command from the IC card and the PPV viewing fee obtained by the contract confirmation command When the program is not recordable at the time of purchase a message to explain should be displayed and processed with copy control When the program is recordable only by the purchaser at the time of purchase please refer to 4
368. ptor and the content availability descriptor should be performed The message which indicates that the program is not recordable should be displayed on the purchase screen if copying the program is prohibited Except for recordable PPV the control information listed on the digital copy control descriptor and the content availability descriptor has priority over the recording information from the IC card See 4 11 4 Copy Control for Recordable PPV in this volume for the operational specifications for recordable PPV During the period in which preview is allowed by the IC card response the macrovision control of video output of the receiver should be off and the control of CGMS A IEC60958 and DTCP method is managed by the values listed on the digital copy control descriptor and the content availability descriptor 4 11 4 Copy Control on Recordable PPV 4 11 4 1 Basic Concept The choices of purchase with recording or purchase for view only without recording should be available for the recordable PPV purchase operated by the description of the digital copy control descriptor and the IC card response At the purchase of recordable programs the recording control operation for the recordable purchase is different from that for the view only purchase For the PPV program operated by the PPV status request command response the contract confirmation command response and the ECM reception command response the basic receiver operations corresponding t
369. r TS and media of a broadcaster EPG transmission It is desirable that EIT p f actual and other are transmitted For a temporary service EIT schedule is not transmitted EPG dispaly This depends on product planning However in a case where EPG signals are transmitted it is desirable that the EPG is displayed during broadcasting 10 End of a temporary service A temporary service shall be ended by deleting its service_id from the PAT Deleting the service_id of the temporary service from the PAT restores the service_id of a normal service of the same TS or the same media type within a broadcaster including the temporary service At the end the status before the service start is restored through rate restoration operation 11 Allocation of a temporary service_id Selection operation shall be considered for allocation 12 Unit for implementation A temporary service shall be implemented with a single event Multiple events temporally sequenced 7 40 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 shall not be implemented as a temporary service This is because event relay stops due to deletion from the PAT 13 Recording Scheduled recording of a temporary service cannot be performed except when recording is continued through event relay 14 Implementation example of temporary scheduling Figure 7 3 1 shows the service transition that occurs when temporary scheduling is performed PAT change PAT change event A event B
370. r customer registration change specified by each broadcaster in the contents Broadcasters should prepare the documentation for customer registration change that satisfy this operation rules and provide them to contents production companies 2 Conditions allowing writing overwriting The writable BML contents defined in the item 1 above can write overwrite in each block when following conditions are available If those conditions are not available writing is prohibited When information was updated by instruction of viewer from registration change contents documentation defined in the item 1 When a center s customer DB information is updated by the Internet or others except BML and also by instruction of viewer at the back channel side of each broadcaster and when the target customer DB information is reserved in some way or other from the BML registration change contents documentation and registered or updated by instruction of viewer Other than when information is updated by the viewer the registration change contents must not overwrite fields in the shared area for all operators Prohibition to change and update without viewer operation For example if Kanji could be reserved at the back channel side after a line was connected a receiver shared area for all operators in NVRAM is not rewritten It is recommended to clearly show viewers that written private information is used to improve the usability such as
371. r hand if it is assigned to be not displayed the least significant bit is 1 the automatic display message display information acquisition command will not be issued to the IC card and the massage display is not carried out When the recorded program is replayed the EMM common message recorded at the time of recording the data broadcasting signal is basically displayed as mentioned above However the latest message can be displayed in the receiver that is also equipped with real time reception function If the EMM and the EMM individual message are included in the replay signal they will be ignored 4 14 Mail Display 4 14 1 Basic Operation This is a mandatory function for the CAS The mail consists of the EMM individual message IRD stored message and the EMM common message in the same way as the automatic display message does The mail is different from the automatic display message It is a message stored in the receiver not in the IC card The EMM individual message may be encrypted or may not be encrypted If the EMM individual message is encrypted it will be decoded in the IC card and stored eventually in the receiver The distinction of mail and automatic display message in EMM messages is made by referring to the message control for the non encrypted header of the message main body in the EMM individual message section If this is IRD storage 0x02 it is the message which corresponds to mail When the EMM individua
372. r on Call in Control 4 6 1 Function Overview When a call in date is obtained from the IC card for PPV viewing history collection the receiver accepts a call in reguest from the IC card on the call in date and it communicates with the viewing history information collection center If the receiver is in standby mode with sub power off it turns on enough power for the necessary circuit to communicate with the viewing history information collection center in addition to the IC card 5 9 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 6 2 Related Standards Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 4 4 5 1 Receiver Operation During Viewing Information Collection Communications Reference 2 3 8 Power on call in control 4 7 Operation Priority during Standby When various operations during standby overlap their priority orders are as follows 1 Reserved operations program reservation etc made by users have the highest priority 2 The priority of EMM reception control and download is arbitrarily defined by the receiver However among the EMM reception controls the EMM reception control by NIT has priority over the power on control In addition the EMM reception control has priority in the case of downloading common data for all receivers 3 Except for downloading software updates for the receiver parallel processing with other operations should be conducted in the power on call in control During the
373. r the channel status specified by IEC60958 and category code see Volume 4 in Part of this document Do not manipulate the resolution limiting bit image constraint token in the content availability 8 7 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 descriptor Always set it as image constraint token l For details see Volume 4 in Part 1 of this document The temporal accumulation control bit retention mode and allowable time of temporal accumulation retention_state are fixed and must be always set as follows retention_mode 0 and retention_state 111 For details see Volume 4 in Part 1 of this document Table 5 4 Operation of the descriptor for the digital TV service and emergency video service Operation of Operation of the digital copy control the content Did copy descriptor availability Serial Analog copy control 3 descriptor Copy control digital _ APS _ encryption _ type recording control mode 6 control data data Copy free 5 0 Copy free 00 Don t care Copy free 1 Copying is prohibited but Macrovision is not applied Therefore copying is 1 00 Copy never 1 possible only by the 11 conventional analog input and record device 01 Copy never 4 a ea 1 Copying is limited to one generation but Macrovision is not applied Therefore 1 EE 00 Copy one copying is possible by the oe 10 generation 2 conventional analog record device Copying is p
374. ractual without Kw A103 Example 3 case 1 and 2 Note 3 5 Non contractual outside 8901 8501 8301 Example 4 contract 6 Non contractual expired 8902 8502 8302 Example 5 7 Non contractual restricted 8903 8503 8303 Example 6 viewing 8 Notification screen of purchase 8108 Example 7 not permitted out of purchase period 9 Notification screen of purchase 8109 Example 8 not permitted due to data capacity full 10 Notification of communication 9103 9104 9105 9106 failure 11 IC card replacement 6400 6581 Example 9 12 Other errors A104 A105 A106 A107 Example 10 13 Notification of invalid IC card Example 11 insertion 14 CA system id inconsistency Example 12 5 34 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Please refer to 4 19 Operation When Valid IC Card Is Not Inserted in this volume for the error message display when an IC card is not inserted The handling of the error codes that are not mentioned in the table The following error codes not mentioned in the table are the errors due to the failure of receiver or broadcasting station and due to the codes that occur even in normal operation ones that should not be treated as errors Because they have nothing to do with the viewer operation the error messages for them are not displayed There are 2 types of display for the error message display depending on the broadcaster identifier One of them is
375. ram and taking preventive steps in cooperation with carriers 8 3 Congestion measure carrier It is recommended to consider the following points concerning decentralization of access points and the number of lines 8 3 1 Decentralization of access points Consider setting up access points based on the popularization of receivers in each area in order to avoid congestion cased by concentration of traffic to a specific switch 8 3 2 Number of lines at access point Consider how may lines are necessary to support calls from receivers for each access point in order to avoid congestion It is also necessary to conduct a review of the number of lines according to the change of the number of available receivers 8 4 Receiver function Specification A Receivers should have a function to generate random numbers that are necessary to delay call Recalling should be performed twice or less per three minutes 8 5 Congestion avoidance at center server Level 3 Delay in response of a center server is caused by insufficient performance of the server or devices on the route It is recommended to take following measures to avoid congestion 6 62 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 1 Increasing the capacity of server 2 Sharing the load on server 3 Incorporating a cash server 4 Incorporating a TLS or SSL accelerator when TLS or SSL is used 5 Incorporating a BML contents delivery server distributing to a mirror s
376. ransmission frequency is based on Volume 4 in this document 5 7 5 Update Frequency When the PID that transmits the EMM is changed or when the service of automatic display message is changed the CAT will be also updated The case mentioned here in which the automatic display message service is changed means whether the service itself is conducted or not In the normal operation the update frequency should be no more than one time per day 5 8 ECM 5 8 1 ECM Identification When the conditional access system descriptor is listed in the first or the second loop of the PMT the PID of the TS packet in which the ECM is transmitted is specified If the conditional access PID of the conditional access system descriptor is Ox1 FFF the relevant ECM will not be transmitted 5 8 2 ECM Data Structure 5 8 2 1 Section Format It is transmitted by the extended section format described in the Supplemental Table No 1 and No 3 of the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Notification No 37 2003 Only 0x82 is used for the table identifier and 0x83 will not be used In addition Table identifier extension will not be used 5 8 2 2 ECM Main Body Please refer to 3 2 3 ECM in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 for the data structure of the ECM main body in the ECM section 5 8 3 ECM Application When the conditional access system descriptor is listed in the first loop of the PMT the relevant ECM is applied to all ES that trans
377. rated with 0 When the automatic display message function is not used for the received and stored program in the receiver with storage function the lowest bit of the delay time is operated with 1 ETA ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 A Commentary Supplementary Explanation of This Volume A 1 EMM Reception and Update The power on control and the power on call in control are operated in order to achieve a power saving design in this conditional access system as already described in this volume In this system the receiver needs to manage the EMM reception or the call in date of viewing history information by its internal timer and it is desirable to notify the user to maintain this function In other words it is preferable to notify the user of the following items in the user manual etc in order to save energy during the standby mode except for the EMM reception mode as well as to ensure the reception of the EMM reception control during the standby mode The power saving mode is selected during the receiver is standing by When receiving the conditional access service it is recommended to turn off the power using a remote control for the reception control of individual information EMM except for an emergency or long term absence etc such as a travel A 2 History of EMM Message Format Creation Since the EMM message format is not provided in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 it was standardized in this volume as a supplement The history is
378. ration gets the momentum to be introduced in the future for the scrambled broadcasting operation with content protection etc At this point it is very important to clarify the relation among the content protection system conditional access system the system that complies with Part 1 of the ARIB STD B 25 and the CA_system_id which is an operational parameter if the momentum mentioned above is generated Thus the concept stipulated in this document is described below Content Protection System Because the content is meaningless if not shown to the viewer it is always handled as plaintext in the receiver Thus the means to protect such plain content by itself do not exist and the receiver is expected to consistently function to protect it The content protection system is a system to achieve such receiver function contractually by using technical means instead of employing legal means Therefore it is not restrained by the frame of the conditional access system 5 81 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Conditional Access System The basic forms of the conditional access system on digital broadcasting in Japan are regulated by the ministerial ordinance The basic elements are listed below a b c d e Contents are scrambled by an encryption method called MULTI2 at the TS level The key to descramble is encrypted and transmitted by a table called ECM The key to decode the encryption of ECM is called a work key a
379. ration possible x Operation not possible Operation restricted The contents of the conditional access system descriptors placed in the first loop 1 and the second loop 2 in the PMT are explained 1 None 2 PID 0x1FFF 3 Common right protection 4 Unique broadcaster The conditional access system descriptor is not placed The conditional access system descriptor is placed and invalid ECM is pointed out The ECM stream does not exist The conditional access system descriptor is placed and the ECM of the common broadcaster identifier for right protection is pointed out The conditional access system descriptor is placed and the ECM of the broadcaster identifier which is unique for each pay broadcaster is pointed out 6 Except for the default ES group the non scrambled operation should be possible for the caption and the 7 5 5 Parental Rate Settings superimposed characters with the component tag of 0x30 0x3F and the data component of 0x40 0x7F which excludes the default ES group Basically placing the ECM by the common broadcaster identifier for right protection in the first loop of the PMT is a general principle Therefore when the default ES group is not scrambled and it executes the copy control by scrambling for content protection the digital copy control descriptor in the first loop of the PMT operates the generational copy control with Copy possible without restriction Th
380. rd responses the PPV status request command response and the contract confirmation command response means the purchase fee for the corresponding ES 5 14 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 11 Copy Control on Pay Broadcasting 4 11 1 Recording Control Information Please refer to Volume 2 and Volume 8 for the copy control method Please refer to Volume 4 and Volume 8 for the copy control information on PSI SI Please refer to Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 for the IC card response The recording control information obtained by the IC card response is as follow The commands that provide the recording control information are the PPV status request command response the contract confirmation command response and the ECM reception command response This section classifies the PPV program with recordable purchase operation and the response status of the IC card A Before purchase operation 1 Non recordable Program attribute that indicates the recording is prohibited 2 Recordable Program attribute that indicates the recording is permitted 3 Recordable only by the purchaser Program attribute status before the user purchase B After purchase operation 1 Non recordable Result of the charged fee when the user did not perform purchase operation of recordable program 2 Recordable Result of the charged fee when the user purchased recordable program 3 Recordable only by the purchaser After executing the purchase operation th
381. receiver that selection is always required automatic display shall not take place 2 For superimposed character operation writing in the PMT shall be possible regardless of ES transmission For handling in terms of multi view refer to 5 2 5 2 7 49 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 Allocation List of Various Numeric Values 8 1 Guidelines for Allocation of Various Numeric Values 8 1 1 Transport stream ID transport stream id allocation guidelines 15 12 11 9 8 7 4 3 2 0 transport stream id 16 bits A 16 bit transport stream id shall be divided as above and the values shall be allocated in accordance with the rules below bit 15 12 Allocate the same value as the low order 4 bits of the network_id bit 11 9 Set 000 With respect to the TS_ids of new consignment broadcasters to be added in 2008 and afterward the value shall be incremented by one at each time of new addition TBD the initial value shall be 001 bit 8 Set 0 reserved Note 3 bit 7 4 This shall indicate the number of the satellite repeater for broadcasting of the relevant TS This shall be the binary coded value of a channel number 0001 channel 1 0011 channel 3 0101 channel 5 Note 2 0111 channel 7 Note 2 1001 channel 9 Note 1 1011 channel 11 Note 2 1101 channel 13 1111 channel 15 bit 3 Set 0 reserved Note 3 bit 2 0 With the TS present in the identical satellite repeater a value is allocated starting
382. recording_ node yp control data 1 Recordable as Copy Free Copy control not asserted 00 0 Recordable as Copy Free with applying EPN Asserted Protection reguired m 10 DES Recordable as Copy One Generation with updating CCI to No_more_copies 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 00 Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy control not asserted 10 Don t care Not recordable 11 01 Don t care Not recordable 11 Don t care Not recordable 10 00 el Don t care Don t care Not recordable No descriptor Don t care Recordable as Copy Free Copy_control_not_asserted 1 This combination is not defined by TR B15 If however this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for the high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 2 If the service type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy_control_type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 3 APSTB inherits the value of APS control data in the digital copy descriptor 4 APSTB is handled as 00 8 43 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 6 Requirement for Installing C
383. rence descriptor shall be allocated in accordance with the rules below 15 1211 43 0 information_provider_id 16 bits A 16 bit information_provider_id shall be divided as above and the values shall be allocated in accordance with the rules below Bit 15 12 Set 0000 reserved Bit 11 4 Allocate the same value as the low order 8 bits of the transport stream id Bit 3 0 For broadcasters included in the identical TS the values are allocated starting with the broadcaster with the smallest slot number assigned 8 1 4 Allocation of broadcaster IDs broadcaster_id Broadcaster_ids serve as IDs for distinguishing each group of BS digital broadcasters and services The following are the allocation guidelines 1 Do not allocate 0x00 2 Allocate continuous values starting with 0x01 3 Allocate binary numbers 4 Ina case where one identical broadcaster id is used by more than one broadcaster the smallest number shall be used 5 The allocation of broadcaster_ids to newly joined consignment broadcasters shall be performed through coordination among the consignment broadcasters Note Regarding 4 let s assume that the following two broadcasters operate with the same broadcaster_id BS A Corp broadcaster_id 0x20 BS B Corp broadcaster_id 0x21 Because of this guideline BS B Corp is expected to use 0x20 and not to use 0x21 for the time being When the two broadcasters use different broadcaster_ids in th
384. rer eee reece errr errr eee reece reer eee rere rere rere errr irre rire 7 21 6 1 1 TS frame composition Ee ee eres 7 21 6 1 2 Dealing with TMCC that violates the regulation ee 7 21 6 1 3 Dealing with broadcasting break periods ee 7 22 6 1 4 Method for transmitting TMCC s basic informations rrr rete ses teeter Ee tenet ee ee ee Ee Re RE ee ees ee ee 7 22 6 2 TMCC Operation ee 7 24 6 2 1 Change instruction teeeeereeeerererrererreressereerersereererserereerereesserereeeereeeseeereerereeresrereerereerereereereseeeeeeee 7 24 6 2 2 Transmission mode slot information sesse EE Ee EES EE EE EE Ee EE EE EE ee ee ER ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ees 7 24 6 2 3 Relative TS slot information esse esse ees ese EE Ee EER GE ee EE Ee Ee Ee EER Ee Ee Ee Ee ee EE ee ee GR ee ee es ee ee ee ee 7 24 6 2 4 Relative TS TS_id correspondence El EE EE EE EE EE EG 7 24 6 2 5 Transmission reception control information se ese see Ee EE EE Ee EER EE Ee ee EE ee ee Ee ee Ee ER ee ees ee 7 24 6 2 6 Extension informatiOn eer ese se se see ee EE ee ee EE ee ee Ee eens Re ee ee Ee Ee Re EE EE ee ee ER ee GR ee ee Ee Ee Ee ee Ee ee ee see 7 25 6 3 Emergency Warning Broadcasting EWS Operation EE rere eee e Tree eee eee rere rere rere eee er errr err eer ees 7 25 6 3 1 ESE De SE EE EE EE OE sees eens eee eee eweees 7 25 6 3 2 Handling the TMCC start bit esse sesse see ee EE Ee EER EE Ee EER ER ER EE Ee Ee EER ee Ee Ee Re ee EE ee ee ee ee ee Ee eek ee ee 7 26 6 3 3 Multiplexing posit
385. resistant Eavesdropping on the line Both Common cryptosystem process function Level 0 No consideration Attachment of copyright information From the aspect of the diversification of distribution systems for multimedia data and ease of copying of digital data some contents need to provide solution for copyright problems 1 Level 0 If it is impossible to equip any technical copyright protection function copyright information should be notified to users at the very least Only legal means are available to restrain infringement of a copyright 6 75 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 Level 1 Functions and operations that a receiver performs when possible Use of a common key cryptosystem nullifies eavesdropping on the line In addition for digital contents such as sound or images a common key cipher is decrypted only inside of a tamper resistant guard vessel and the contents are decoded into analogue data for each target media Only the analogue data is output to prevent an illegal copy from being created without deterioration of the sound or image quality 3 Level 2 Functions and operations that a center performs when possible Using small redundancy remained in a media encoding method embed the copyright information and receiver ID as sub information that has almost no impact on reproducing the contents digital watermarking technique Functions and operations that a receiver performs when possible
386. rogram Available Available Unavailable Ee Others 1 Available Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable 1 The free program without content protection 2 Available only for Copy Free The digital copy control information in Table 5 3 indicates the information that controls the copy generation and specified by the digital copy control descriptor digital recording control data See Volume 4 in Part 1 Output protection in Table 5 3 indicates that the protection is performed on the high speed digital interface output for the Copy free content by using the output protection bit encryption_mode in the content availability descriptor See Volume 4 in Part 1 5 4 2 Details of Transmission Operation The operation of the digital copy control descriptor and output protection bit for the content availability descriptor must be handled as follows the digital TV service and emergency video service follow Table 5 4 the digital audio service and emergency audio service follow Table 5 5 and the data service emergency data service and bookmark list data service follow Table 5 6 If a combination is not defined by those tables it shall not be used For details of CGMS A see Volume 2 in Part 1 of this document To use Macrovision a contract must be made between the broadcasters and Macrovision Corporation For details see Volume 2 in Part 1 For details of setting up the copyright protection bit fo
387. rogram TS The PSI and the table transmitted by this special TS in accordance with the previous description are assumed 5 77 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table A 5 1 PSI and Table Transmitted by TS for EMM Transmission Table id Table 0x00 PAT 0x01 CAT 0x02 PMT 0x40 NIT actual 0xC3 SDTT 0x84 0x85 EMM including EMM message A 6 Basic Concept of Mandatory and Optional Digital satellite broadcasting is different from the current satellite broadcasting It does not take the form of supporting the external decoder but the form of the built in CAS function in the receiver As a result it is intended to be installed widely in the digital satellite broadcasting receivers and the classification of mandatory or manufacturer option is made for the functions which provide the service that uses the CAS Basically among the functions mentioned in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 the ones required for the service that uses the CAS are classified as mandatory items and the ones that are convenient if exist are left to the product planning of the manufacturers The mandatory mentioned here means that the broadcasters perform their transmission under the premises that it has been installed in the receivers with the CAS In this section the mandatory or option for the CAS is being classified Table A 6 1 Classification of Mandatory and Manufacturer Option Function on CAS Equipped Receiver
388. rohibited after Other than 1 one copy 4 00 1 For the high speed digital interface output operation for Copy never for the source function specified by DTCP is performed When however only the audio stream is output in the IEC60958 conformant format operation for No more copies is performed 2 For the high speed digital interface output operation for Copy one generation for the source function specified by DTCP is performed 3 Applied to the composite and component video output This is also applied when outputting the received video signals by converting the format The Macrovision control applies to the 4801 composite and component video signals 4 For details of analog video output see sections 6 3 and 6 5 2 of this document 5 For the high speed digital interface output encryption is applied according to DTCP When however only the audio stream is output in the IEC60958 conformant format encryption is not applied 6 If the content availability descriptor is not specified encryption mode is handled as 1 8 8 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 5 5 Operation of the descriptor for the digital audio service and emergency audio service Operation of Operation of the digital copy control the content Digital copy Analog copy control descriptor availability control 4 descriptor Copy control
389. rotection Rules for BS Digital Broadcasting is created The BS digital broadcasters shall follow the transmission operation standards specified by this volume The BS digital receiver manufacturers shall follow the rules specified by this volume to apply content protection to the recording of the transmitted signals various outputs for viewing and storage functions Also thorough consideration is expected to prevent malfunction caused by the unauthorized signals 2 References 1 ARIB STD B10 Service Information for Digital Broadcasting System 2 ARIB STD B21 Receiver for Digital Broadcasting 3 ARIB STD B25 Conditional Access System Specifications for Digital Broadcasting 3 Scope of Application The provisions in this volume apply to the transmission standards receiver specifications and standards for mounting the receiver for the content protection system for BS digital broadcasting 8 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 Definition of Terms Table 4 1 gives explanation on the terms Table 4 1 Definition of terms Pay program Program whose default ES group is to be charged free CA mode l is described in SDT or EIT Free program Program whose default ES group is not to be charged free CA_mode 0 is described in SDT or EIT Protected free program Free program transmitted securing the copyright within the broadcast wave without applying customer management Bound recording
390. rrence 2 Big traffic is concentrated on Subscriber the switch at the center switch 3 Congestion occurs Relay switch Con centration Con centration Subscriber switch Relay switch Ordinary phone Center 4 Receivers cannot call because of congestion EE TREE E 5 When congestion occurs also the ordinary phone line tends to be busy Figure 3 1 Mechanism image of congestion occurrence 6 90 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Appendix4 Supplementary explanation about network service 4 1 Massive calls reception service 4 1 1 Service outline This type of service usually provided for participation shows counts automatically the number of calls that are made to the notified service number OABO and informs the total total numbers for each service number to the broadcast station In this service the cut through function which connects calls that the number of lines set in advance can operate to the dedicated reception phone line operator or center is available Up to six service numbers for a massive calls reception service using a broadcasting media can be allocated to one program 4 1 2 Usage sample service target receiver only Figure 4 1 shows an image of questionnaire program using a massive calls reception service EE EE ee Ed EE EE EE N Ee DE 2 When a viewer selects an answer 1 Broadcast wave sends a guestionnaire a with
391. rs to a service temporarily scheduled It may be provided only several times a month It is not normally provided and is not scheduled beforehand The service IDs have been defined as OxA0 0xA1 and 0xA2 on the NIT Normal service Refers to a service normally provided It is provided almost always except when maintenance is conducted or when it is halted for midnight break It has been defined with a service ID other than that of a temporary service on the NIT 7 3 4 Operation of a temporary service 1 2 3 Handling service_id The service_id of a temporary service shall have been selected from among three digit numeric values allocated to relevant broadcasters and the service type shall be written in the NIT as a temporary service The values shall be presented by a receiver SDT operation SDT shall be always flowed as a temporary service Service start When the video rate of a normal service is reduced for the start of a temporary service sequence_end shall not be inserted In such a case where the video format is changed it is desirable that the operation is performed in accordance to Chapter 4 Seamless Switching in Appendix of Part 1 of ARIB STD B32 When duplicative processing of a temporary service is performed the PAT shall be immediately updated so that the start of a service can be recognized by a receiver 7 39 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 5 6 7 8 9 Notific
392. s it is necessary to get the approval of a viewer on the BML contents 6 3 3 Information which application should store An application stores following information according to need 1 Security class Specifying a receiver s security class that is necessary to execute the application Class 0 Security is not necessary Class 1 Security with CAS module is necessary Class 2 Security is necessary 2 Host number ID number of a center or others which an application specifies 3 Phone number related information An application should store information consisting of following information elements according to need 1 Calling area specification postal code Postal code for specifying area where calling to phone numbers is available 2 Phone number General phone number of a host e g DABCDEFGHJ K 00X Y SC 3 Line type Specifying a receiver s line types Multiple settings are possible e g PSTN mobile phone line PHS line 4 Physical layer protocol Specifying a receiver s physical layer protocols for every line type e g V 22bis MNP4 32kPIAFS 5 Data link and transfer protocol Specifying data link establishment and data transfer protocols between a receiver and a center collection networks e g BASIC partially based on X 28 TCP IP 6 Network specification identification Turn ON this function when a receiver adds a caller ID notification number and a carrier ID number to the target phone number 6 40 Ts C
393. s sense only when the error message due to the card response without Kw See 4 18 Error Notification Screen is displayed Therefore everything else should be processed as normal conditional access service S5 10 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 8 2 Related Standards Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 4 4 2 3 Program Viewing Chapter 4 4 8 Scrambling Detection Reference 2 3 5 Communication control of IC card Reference 2 3 10 Reception of ECM and control of Descrambler Reference 2 3 15 Program viewing This volume 5 Operational Information 4 9 Pay Program Reservation 4 9 1 Function Overview Program reservation should be treated without any distinction between free and pay broadcasting It is preferable that the program reservation function includes pay program in its range when receivers are equipped with the function Whether the reserved program is available for viewing is determined by the CA contract information descriptor from the SDT or the EIT and the viewing availability the recording restriction information and the viewing mode based on the contract confirmation command response are obtained in the IC card The viewing mode can be determined by the return code When this viewing mode is PPV mode the PPV viewing fee 1 the recordable PPV viewing fee 2 and the deadline of reserved purchase are included in the response from the IC card The deadline of reserved purchase mea
394. s telecommunication companies and manufacturers participate in this organization It standardizes the technology related to domestic use of radio wave CA Conditional Access system Conditional Access System This system controls viewing of services arranged channels and events programs CAT Conditional Access Table From the relevant information that constitutes the conditional access broadcasting CAT specifies the packet identifier of the TS packet that transmits individual information Event Information Table Component Component such as video audio text and various data etc It is the element that constitutes an event programs Descriptor Descriptor is a description area arranged in the table to carry a variety of information ECM ECM is common information which consists of program Entitlement Control information information related to program and keys for Message descrambling etc and control information forced on off command of scrambling function in the decoder EIT Event information table holds the information related to the program such as the program name the broadcasting date and time and the program contents Elementary Stream EMM EMM is individual information that contains work keys to decode Entitlement Management secret codes of each subscriber s contract information and common Message information ES Elementary stream corresponds to encoded video audio and
395. s a new model one year after the revision 5 Caller ID notification number Number to set whether or not a caller s phone number is notified to a receiver currently 3 digit e g 186 184 This function is applicable for receivers that come to market after version 2 2 revision of this document and applied to all receivers that come to market as a new model one year after the revision 3 Outside line capture number Store numbers which are necessary for the call function that is unique to receivers such as outside line capture in nonvolatile memory e g 0 4 Dial type Store a dial type of the PSTN line to be used in nonvolatile memory e g Tone 10pps 20pps 5 TCP IP related information Level 3 Refer to TR B14 Volume 6 7 4 2 Receiver managing information rules 6 4 2 Number addition function Specification A A receiver should add a special number and a carrier ID number under the conditions shown in Table 6 7 It should have a prefix addition function based on free description format to secure a given connection when a phone number system is changed Implementation method of the function depends on receivers 6 49 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 6 7 Number addition conditions of receiver Network When a caller ID When a fixed preferred When a carrier ID number specification notification connection cancellation e g OOXY is set identification 186 184 is set number 122 is set
396. s for recordable PPV purchase operation the digital recording control data listed on the digital copy control descriptor included in the second loop is operated with 10 or 00 In the operation of recordable PPV when the ES of 0x00 0x3F component tag excluding the default ES group is charged for each ES by separate ECM the operation of recordable program purchase is o ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 not performed for the ECM listed on the second loop of the PMT and it is operated with Recordable As it is mentioned later the receiver is to perform the copy control of the ES whose component tag is between 0x00 and 0x3F based on the result of the purchase mode of the default ES group in other words whether it was purchase with recording or it was purchase with view only for the purchase operation of either recordable or view only of the main program For the data ES of 0x40 0x7F component tag the digital copy control descriptor can be listed for each ES in the second loop of the PMT When the ES is charged by the separate ECM from the default ES group the recordable purchase for each ES can be operated In other words the operation by the IC card response of Recordable only by the purchaser can be performed However the recording control of this data ES is reflected only in the control of IEEE1394 For the partial TS output from IEEE1394 output the EMI is set by the most strict copy control value in the TS As a co
397. s point device or server device necessary for bi directional transmission service Mass calling service One of the network services including a massive calls reception service Master key A key used for a corresponding session key to share the session key Message digest Summarizing any length of data to a certain length digesting or that summarized data Message certifier MAC Mall An electronic shop and a group of such shops Log collection accounting A accounting method with which data broadcast rate is recorded for each user and total rate is settled up later One way function In mathematical calculation inverse operation is impossible or very difficult for one way function Line type A type of communication line such as PSTN mobile line PHS etc Diffusion If 1 or 0 is continuously generated in digital signal or a constant pattern appears continuously a bright line spectrum may be generated It interferes communication lines and a receiver cannot reproduce clock In order to prevent this problem add an known PN signal to generate a random signal Management server A server managing personal information totally and returning personal information according to the request from a host Simple cipher A simple cipher used in a case where there is no need to block a third person s decryption Simple authentication An authentication method used in
398. s with a receiver By this method services can be directly selected merely by pressing buttons that have been allocated to broadcasters and services Phase reference burst BPSK signals cyclically inserted so that BS digital broadcasting modulation waves which undergo time division multiplexing of multiple transmission systems can be demodulated steadily even with low CN Audio mode Format for audio signal processing The types of formats include monaural stereo multi channel stereo 2 audio and multi audio Hierarchical modulation Transmission system in which the following two types of transmission systems are used together a transmission system such as TC8PSK that allows transmission of large capacity and a transmission system such as QPSK or BPSK that allows reception even with low C N Diffusion Assigning known PN signals to make random signals to prevent such a problem that generation of bright line spectrum causes interference or disables a receiver to conduct clock replay when 1 or 0 digital signals are continued or when a uniform pattern is continued Descriptor descriptor Start control bit Bit for notifying a receiver of implementation of emergency warning broadcasting and others allocated in the TMCC Emergency warning Broadcasting for disaster notification This allows a receiver to forcibly broadcasting EWS provide its contents using start control signals and others Conditi
399. scrambled and the other one is scrambled with the common broadcaster group identifier for copyright protection The first loop of PMT contains the relevant ECM and the default ES group is not scrambled 3 Even in the above operations the ES to be scrambled to check the reception of Kw is not always scrambled in the given event the program used to check the reception of Kw and might be scrambled 8 23 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 only when the reception of Kw is checked in the content for example scrambled only one minute during the five minute program In this case a valid ECM is placed in PMT As mentioned above this test broadcasting is intended to check whether Kw is written to the receiver already in market and requires a test in advance Although the method to be used cannot be specified it is assumed that the test detects writing of Kw by checking whether the scrambled ES can be played The receiver can recognize the protected free program based on the value of the broadcaster group identifier In the operation of the receiver however this common broadcaster group identifier has a meaning only when an error is displayed to notify that the card is without Kw Other than that the content is handled as a normal conditional access service 8 2 Functional Restriction for the Content Protection For output of the digital audio service and emergency audio service although the setting copy_control_type 01 is available t
400. scriptor In this case the receiver does not need to manage the schedule for this delay time and it simply follows the automatic display message information acquisition command response from the IC card because the schedule control is conducted in the IC card For the automatic display message the retransmission check of the same EMM individual message is carried out using the message ID and the broadcaster identifier listed in the EMM individual message section It is desirable that the receiver is equipped with a mechanism to prevent re receiving the same message such as storing the last received message ID and broadcaster identifier The version monitoring of EMM common message is performed during the display period of the EMM common messages that are in use the period obtained by multiplying the sum of the automatic display duration time 1 2 and 3 by the number of times of the automatic display However if the automatic display message type is 0x02 display erasure the version monitoring will be carried out all the time When the message code main body is updated it will be immediately reflected and displayed The display time count at the time of update can be either the new count from the time of the update reload or the count from the next display time due to channel switching etc but the latter is preferable if possible The items that will be changed at the time of the version number update of the EMM common message are th
401. ses 4 10 3 Control of PPV Monthly Purchase Limit Please refer to the functions mentioned in Part 1 2 2 2 20 Control of Limit PPV Monthly Purchase Part 1 4 2 11 4 PPV Monthly fee allowance Setting Optional and Part 1 Reference 2 3 21 Control of Monthly PPV purchase ceiling in the ARIB STD B25 This function is a manufacturer option The definition of one month that is managed in the receiver is arbitrarily defined by the receiver However it is preferable to explain the definition of one month in the user manual The unit of fees is yen The possible setting limit of the highest amount is arbitrarily defined by the receiver As a rough guide it can be set to the minimum amount of 500 yen or more and the maximum amount of 5 digit figure and more ten thousand yen scale or more The step size of the setting amount is approximately 500 yen The settings at the time of factory shipping are arbitrarily defined by the receiver 4 10 4 Control of PPV Program Purchase Limit Please refer to the functions mentioned in Part 1 2 2 2 21 Control to Limit Single program PPV Purchase Part 1 4 2 11 3 PPV Unit Fee Allowance Setting and Part 1 Reference 2 3 22 Control to limit PPV program purchase in the ARIB STD B25 This function is a manufacturer option The unit of fees is yen The program which is the same fee as the setting price can be purchased The possible setting limit of the highest amount is
402. so that the content is specified as Copy one generation more than two copies of the content must not be created Also multiple copies in the same record format must not be created When the copy is digitally recorded as a backup in the area not accessible from the user this restriction does not apply Section 8 9 2 of this volume provides additional explanation The above restriction for recording to the digital record media applies on a receiving component basis When more than one receiving component exists the restriction above applies to each component 3 The content for which the digital copy control descriptor does not require protection the content can be digitally recorded in any format If however Appendix B 2 specifies the requirement for the relevant removable record media the requirement must be satisfied 6 7 Analog Recording of the Content for the Removable Record Media 6 7 1 Analog Recording of the TV and Data Services To analogically record the content for the digital TV emergency video data emergency data and bookmark list data services to the removable record media appropriate copy control must be performed according to the copy control information specified by the digital copy control descriptor That is when copying is prohibited the following operation must be prevented recording of the content to the removable record media and normal playback of the recorded content Even if the digital copy control descrip
403. ssage is displayed complying with the provisions in this document as long as the contents are displayed normally after descrambled by the valid IC card insertion once the receiver displays the error of not having the installed IC card inserted 4 13 4 Automatic Message Display for Receiver with Storage Function When Replaying Stored Programs The definition of the receiver with storage function is a receiver equipped with the record and replay function that allows replaying programs only in the device that recorded them Please refer to Volume 8 for detailed provisions If the program provided by the broadcaster which operates automatic display message is viewed the automatic display message will be also displayed when the program stored in the receiver with storage function is replayed At this time the control of display of automatic display message on each receiver is performed based on the information program replay mode stored in the IC card installed in that receiver On replaying the stored program with the receiver with storage function the control for automatic display message will be executed when the stored signal is the CA service descriptor listed on the CAT regardless of the service type when the CA_system_id obtained by the IC card corresponds to the CA_system_id listed in the CA service descriptor and when it is a relevant service simultaneously In order to achieve the function mentioned above when the program of the broadcaster
404. ssessesneesseessseessnseaseessseessssesssnesneessneessneessass 5 65 s 10T Format Nomper DE N GE DE GE De O E IE 5 65 5 10 2 Message Code Main Body Format of EMM Common Message for Format Number 0X01 5 66 5 10 3 Differential Information Format of EMM Individual Message for Differential Format Number OXL E EE NE 5 66 5 10 4 Example of Differential Information Use ceee eeteettetteettttteertreeertttsrrertetesttttsn tenerent tent 5 66 A Se Charactet Coden a OE EE E R E E E EE E E 5 67 5 10 6 Recommended Display Position of Automatic Display Message ee ee ees ee ee esse etree 5 67 5 11 CA Contract Information Descriptor steers EER EER ee SERE ReER EER GER ER Rek OER KERE KERR ERGE EER ERGE Roe RR ee een eene 5 69 5 12 Message EE 5 69 TEE EE 5 69 5 12 2 Example of Send Operations esecesesseeseesteeeseessenesneecenesneecenesnsenennensenenneneeneaensencens 5 69 5 13 Recording Control Response of IC Card vsvrsrsrseresreereseeeeseeeseesssneeteeneneeneenentensenenneeseneaneeeenans 5 71 5 14 CA Alternative Services reer ees ees see Rek innies nien eissai diees ee Re ee ee ee nena 5 72 5 14 1 Operation Unit ssssssssessssessssssssessseesseessessnneesnseeseeesseeeeseeesnesssuessneesssessseenseenieesnessnensenen 5 72 ENE Ee OE EE ER EE 5 72 5 14 3 Transmission Operation of Link Descriptor ree ees seeks EER Rek EER ER ER ERGE ERK ERGE KEER Re R GER ee ee ee Rene 5 72 5 15 CA Service Descriptors risers teseeeenteneneenseennensenennensencaneneencensasensensnaeacens
405. st The tables below list the unique values of the identifiers to be allocated inside the BS digital broadcasting network 8 2 1 TS id list Appendix table 8 2 1 BS digital broadcasting TS id list scheduled start December 1 2007 TS id Repeater Consignment Broadcaster 0x4010 Ich Asahi Satellite Broadcasting Limited 0x4011 Ich BS i Incorporated 0x4030 3ch WOWOW INC 0x4031 3ch B S Japan Corporation 0x4090 9ch Nippon BS Broadcasting Corporation 0x4091 9ch STAR CHANNEL INC 0x4092 9ch World Hi Vision Channel Inc 0x40d0 13ch B S NIPPON CORPORATION 0x40d1 13ch Fuji Satellite Broadcasting Inc 0x40f1 15ch Japan Broadcasting Corporation Simul channel 0x40f1 15ch The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting 0x40fl 15ch WORLD INDEPENDENT NETWORKS JAPAN Inc 0x40fl 15ch WX24 0x40f2 15ch Japan Broadcasting Corporation 7 66 8 2 2 service id list ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Appendix table 8 2 2 BS digital broadcasting service id list scheduled start December 1 2007 Consignment Broadcaster Television Radio Data oo Allocatableid Allocatable id Allocatable id ___ id written in NIT id written in NIT id written in NIT Japan Broadcasting Corporation 100 109 400 409 Snes 700 709 101 1 102 2 103 3 Non 700 701 707 708 Temporary 104 105 B S NIPPON CORPORATION
406. sting Volume 4 BS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for PSI SI Volume 5 BS Digital Broadcasting Specifications and Operational Guidelines for Conditional Access System CAS Receivers Volume 6 BS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Bi directional Communication Volume 7 BS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Transmission Volume 8 BS Digital Broadcasting Guidelines for Contents Protection Part 2 Operational Guidelines for Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting and Functional Specifications for BS Broadband CS Combined Digital Receivers Volume 1 Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Downloading Volume 2 Functional Specifications for BS Broadband CS Combined Digital Receivers Volume 3 Operational Guidelines for Data Broadcasting to BS Broadband CS Combined Digital Receivers Volume 4 Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for PSI SI ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Volume 5 Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines and Specifications for Conditional Access System CAS Receivers Volume 6 Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Bi directional Communication Volume 7 Broadband CS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Transmission Volume 8 Guidelines for Contents Protection to BS Broadband CS Combined Digital Receivers We hope many radio equipment manufacturers broadcasting operators users and others
407. t securely by broadcasting wave without customer control for the purpose of content right protection 5 3 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 4 Required Specifications of Receiver 4 1 Receiver Structure Figure 4 1 1 shows hardware structure related to the CAS This is just a model structure to explain the specifications The actual structure depends on the design of the receiver Broadcas Decode unit N ting signal Tuner BE E i TS decode 9 for video and Monitor input uni unit audio output Display unit Public P Control unit Key input Remote line unit control IC card Figure 4 1 1 Basic Receiver Structure 1 Tuner Unit Controlled by the control unit the tuner unit receives and selects broadcast signals It also performs packet processing of transmission signals and error correction processing 2 Descrambler Controlled by the control unit the descrambler performs descrambling of certain packets by the MULTI2 method Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 2 2 2 2 4 Descrambler Chapter 4 4 8 Scrambling Detection Reference 2 3 4 Descrambler Reference 2 3 10 Reception of ECM and control of Descrambler 5_4 3 4 5 6 7 8 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 TS decode unit The TS decode unit separates necessary packets from the TS multiplexed signals selects broadcast program signa
408. t care Macrovision encrypted encrypted encrypted off 4 Copy free 3 Output Not Output COMS A 10 SCMS 10 Don t care rohibited eherpied rohibited Macrovision Copy one 11 p ryp p off 4 generation w As 3 Output Not Output CGMS A a SCMS Ol Don t care sae es Macrovision prohibited encrypted prohibited APS Copy never Output Not Output CGMS A it SCMS 11 Don t care ed ae Macrovision prohibited encrypted prohibited APS Copy never 10 or 00 3 2 Output Output Output Output Output 3 Don teare Don tcare ohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited f f Not Not Not CGMS A o0 SCMS No descriptor Don t care Macrovision encrypted encrypted encrypted off 4 Copy free 1 The digital audio service and emergency audio service cannot be output Section 8 2 provides additional explanation on the functional restriction for the content protection 2 The digital TV service and emergency video service cannot be output to the high speed digital interface and all the video and audio outputs specified in this document 3 This combination is not defined by the operation rules Output to the high speed digital interface and all the video and audio outputs specified in this document are not allowed 4 Macrovision is off regardless of the value of APS_control_data 5 The digital audio service and emergency audio service are not encrypted 6 Mode B1 must be used for the digital audio servi
409. tch Code independent mode An extended method in the BASIC procedure to allow binary data transfer Copy control Control of copy generation This function places a limit on a recording device connected to broadcast receiver when it copies programs or other copyrighted pieces Service code SC A service class code of network services that carriers identified by OOXY Security level An index to define and operate severity of security in phase according to the security level required for each data Session key A one time key used only for one session in order to maintain the security level Center An equipment including a host necessary for providing bi directional transmission service Time stamp time stamp Tamper resistant A physical cover to protect a device so that a person who handles the device cannot read internal data or analyze functions Debit Money transfer between a user s bank account and a member store s account at the time of using Token A voting ticket used for electronic voting Traffic Amount of communication via a line such as a public network and switching equipments Negotiation The first process in communication between modems that have multiple modulation methods error correction functions and resend functions in order to find a common method and function Network service Value added service on the network between a receiver and a center such as data collect
410. tem Level 2 In order to prevent falseness at a center it is effective to link a message authentication code of the reliable independent authority and a message and to add a message authentication code of the center However a receiver and the independent authority must continue to keep the shared common key Level 3 When legal admissibility is required a certificate issuing authority using a public key cryptosystem is utilized 6 81 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Appendix 2 Reference for charging method Appendix 2 describes information that can be referred for data broadcasting operators to decide a charging method 2 1 Charging system This section shows how a viewer using a bi directional data broadcasting service pays fee by an electrical method charging method Charging methods that are available recently are shown below Terms in this document are not vocabulary of economics They are defined for convenience to explain a service image 2 1 1 Network payment 1 Network surrogate accounting In this method a surrogate accounting service that a carrier provides is used It is possible to pay information fee together with telephone bill Services such as an information fee surrogate accounting is available 2 1 2 Pay by card 1 Credit This is a system provided for credit card users A credit card company pays fee in substitution for a user and charges a sum later 2 Debit This is a system provided for users w
411. that carrier such as OOXY Always a selected particular carrier is connected 6 6 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Public key cryptosystem It is also called asymmetric key cryptosystem In this system a key for encryption public key and a key for decryption secret key are different Opening a public key and managing a secret key privately enables encrypted communication even without a common secret key Some public key cryptosystem such as RSA has a signature function too Entry rate Divide the number of users of a certain bi directional data broadcasting service by the number of viewer to get this rate Collection network A network collecting data from many receivers Signature A result of operation that only a person who has a secret key can create is used as an electric signature Collision free Feature necessary for hash function Probability that two random inputs have different output results is sufficiently high Certification Necessary feature for authentication and signature with a public key cipher which a reliable third party organization electrically issues Uplink Line that connects a receiver to a center device by a modem or others Information fee charging Charging of fee that a user of information pays for an information provider of information providing service via telephone line such as a telephone service A carrier charges the fee on behalf of the information pr
412. the content unusable To play the temporarily retained content the Copy never control must be applied to output For the high speed digital interface the Non Retention mode control specified by DTCP must be applied to output 6 5 4 Move Function The content whose copy control information after stored is No more copies can be moved according to the reguirements described below Move can performed on only a single record medium installed internally or connected digitally To move the content to other record medium connected via the high speed digital interface DTCP specifications must be satisfied If the number of connectable record media cannot be assured such as for the analog 8 17 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 video output the move function must not be performed During the move operation the content must not be playable for more than one minute simultaneously on both the source and destination media After the move operation usable content must not exist simultaneously on both the source and destination media That is the content in the source media must be rendered unusable after moved Section 8 3 2 of this volume provides additional explanation on rendering the content unusable To output the content into other than the move destination during the move operation the rules specified in section 6 5 2 of this volume must be followed 6 6 Digital Recording of the Content for the Removable
413. the main text of mail from the received EMM common message information and the differential information of the EMM individual message to store it The receiver should store at least 10 pieces of mail and its storage location should be the NVRAM Since the mail size is 800 bytes at most per mail at least 8k bytes of memory for mail need to be reserved When the mail which exceeds the storage capacity is received the stored mail can be erased from the one received at the oldest date and time One piece of mail should be 400 double byte characters or less and 800 bytes or less The display method the number of displayed character per one line or the display with page break etc is arbitrarily defined by the receiver It is desirable to install the display function which indicates mail reception to the user in the receiver The mail reception is the condition that unread mail is stored The receiver constructs mail from the EMM individual message and the EMM common message and it considers that the mail reception is complete at the time of the storage Then it notifies to the user by the means mentioned above Even if the IC card with different card ID from the one at the time of storing the mail is inserted the receiver does not delete the stored mail Also when the IC card that has different CA system id from the one at the time of storing the mail is inserted the receiver does not delete the stored mail 10 or more of the
414. the network payment mechanism information fee that should be actually collected by the information provider is collected by a carrier alternatively The carrier collects the fee together with telephone bill Information providers can effectively provide information to a vast number of viewers without managing fee or sending a bill One of the services of this type that is available now is an information fee surrogate collection service 2 3 1 Information fee surrogate collection service A Figure 2 1 shows an example of information surrogate collection service A Program contents Broadcast ST station H H EE ma Public Receiver network etc OABO ok i i Program Access point information Collection network Center Scope of the of information surrogate collection service A Program lt ER EP information Figure 2 1 Information fee surrogate collection service A 6 83 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 1 2 3 4 5 Service outline a The broadcast station registers information about a program using the information fee surrogate collection service A to charge viewers on the center in advance b The receiver calls the number of the information fee surrogate collection service A OABO xEEEX specified by the data broadcasting or other methods c The receiver is connected to the center via the collection network d The receiver receives data of the data broadcasting program information from the ce
415. ther by the viewer operation of service selection 5 46 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Once the display is carried out by satisfying the display condition of transfer confirmation screen there is no need to erase the display until the user performs the confirmation operation Even if the display condition has changed to unsatisfactory during the display there is no need to erase automatically and it can remain being displayed However transferring to the link destination should be carried out if the link condition is still valid and the user permits the transfer When the link service is the service with supplemental data broadcasting the acquisition of the link source service by the link descriptor and the acquisition of link type at the linking by the link descriptor should be possible on the data contents Please refer to the ARIB STD B24 for the DOM API for the BML document 4 22 3 Related Standards Please refer to the sections listed below in the ARIB STD B10 Part 2 6 1 Identification and Placement of Identifier 6 2 8 Link Descriptor Please refer to the section listed below in the ARIB STD B24 Volume 2 Chapter 7 Procedural Description Language Please refer to the sections listed below in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 Chapter 2 222415 Program Selection and Viewing Chapter 4 4 2 3 Program Viewing Reference 2 3 15 Program viewing 4 23 Caption Superimposed characters Scrambling and Display Priority 4 23 1 Caption The
416. tify an error detected in the connection other than the auto connection and detected in the data sending and receiving are specified in Specification B 6 53 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 6 5 Detail of phone number processing Figure 6 4 shows detailed relation among processes application information viewer setting information and communication related information in the phase I to phase III Concerning relation when the TCP IP protocol is used refer to TR B15 Part 2 Volume 6 Figure 7 5 l l Communication Application information Application process i Viewer setting information related information Phase I i Decision of security Security class class Extraction of postal code Decision of line Line type Physical layer protocol Data link transfer protocol Decision of physical layer x Data link transfer protocol H gt Decision of protocol Physical layer protocol Notification or non notification of caller ID Fixed preferred connection cancellation number Carrier ID number Dial type Outside line capture number Addition of Phone number special number carrier ID number identification Cut call identification Phase II Phase L I l l 1 l 1 i i i i l l l l I I I I i I Network specification i I l l l l l I I l l l l l l l I i l l 1 l l i Process EE il Information Figure 6
417. ting control center is required equal to election administration Token Digital voting ticket 1 Level 0 A massive calls reception service a typical service example is suitable for collecting a vast number of calls However for some services one receiver may call several times In that case a massive calls reception service may not satisfy the requirements of a data broadcaster 2 Level 1 When voting outcome affects other viewers behavior it may be necessary to prevent multiple voting from the standpoint of fairness Two examples that can be easily provided only by a bi directional data broadcasting service operator and a receiver are shown below Example 1 Multiple voting check using receivers ID allocated uniquely Preparation A voting reception center prepares an ID list of receivers that are used for voting Voting A receiver sends its ID together with a vote Counting The voting reception center checks up the receiver ID with the ID list to search a false receiver ID and multiple voting Example 2 Narrow down voting sampling When a large number of voters are target of the voting and the voting rate is supposed to be high there is fear that congestion occurs in the down network of the voting reception host In that case a sampling random selection function may be necessary to estimate a total voting result based on a part of voting result Preparation A bi directional data broadcasting service operator decides a n
418. tion method for the descriptor regarding the maximum bit rate refer to Part 1 Volume 4 BS Digital Broadcasting PSI SI Operation Regulations Table 5 4 1 Default maximum bit rate for each component Video 10801 16 22 Mbps 720p 12 22 Mbps 480p 6 12 Mbps 480i 4 8 Mbps Audio Standard stereo 144kbps High quality stereo 256 kbps 5 1 channel stereo 384 kbps Additional data 4 Mbps Subtitle 256 kbps Superimposed text 256 kbps 7 17 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table 5 4 2 Default maximum bit rate for each service Digital TV service 10801 24 Mbps 720p 24 Mbps 480p 12 Mbps 480i 11 Mbps Multiview 24 Mbps Digital audio service 1 1 Mbps Data service 2 2 Mbps 5 3 Multiplexing of TS 5 3 1 Maximum number of services The maximum number of services per single TS shall be 32 The maximum number for each service type is as below and transmission shall be performed so that the maximum numbers are not exceeded Service IDs for the business operators shall be allocated according to 8 2 1 Digital TV service 8 Digital audio service 16 Data service 24 5 3 2 Maximum number of slots The maximum number of slots to be allocated for TS transmission shall be 26 5 3 3 Statistical multiplexing When executing statistical multiplexing for more than one SDTV or multiview TV the maximum number of ESs to be appli
419. tion Please contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code gt Case 2 This is the case in which the IC card response is A103 and the CA system id listed on the conditional access method descriptor of the selected program and the broadcaster identifier listed on the ECM are the broadcaster identifier used for the free program for content protection mentioned in Volume 8 in the case of free program for content protection The necessary information is not in this IC card Please contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code Example 4 Non contractual outside of contract This channel cannot be viewed Please contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code Example 5 Non contractual expired The subscription has been expired Please contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code RI ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Example 6 Example 7 Example 8 Example 9 Example 10 Example 11 Example 12 Non contractual restricted viewing This channel cannot be viewed due to viewing restriction Please contact to the customer center of the channel you are watching Code Notification screen of purchase not permitted out of purchase period This program cannot be purchased because the purchase period has expired Code Notification screen of purchase not permitted due to data capacity full Please connect the phone li
420. tion time is secured 5 9 EMM 5 9 1 EMM Transmission Specifications The header structure of EMM section is based on the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Notification No 37 2003 Please refer to 3 2 4 EMMs in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 for the EMM main body structure in the EMM section The EMM section is not transmitted in multiple sections The transmission frequency of EMM is as follow The transmission frequency is determined by the combination of the EMM section and the EMM individual message section It is based on 5 9 3 EMM Transmission Frequency in this volume The receiver does not refer to the version number of the EMM section The transmission order of EMM is based on 5 9 4 EMM Transmission Order in this volume 5 9 2 EMM Message Transmission Specifications Please refer to 3 2 5 2 EMM Individual Message in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 for the structure of the EMM individual message in the EMM message section Please refer to 3 2 5 1 EMM Common Message in Part 1 of the ARIB STD B25 for the structure of the EMM common message in the EMM message section The EMM section is not transmitted in multiple sections The transmission frequency of the EMM individual message is based on 5 9 3 EMM Transmission Frequency in this volume The transmission frequency of the EMM common message is based on 5 9 3 EMM Transmission Frequency in this volume When the message main body area of the EMM common message is 0 byte and w
421. tis EES EIT p f actual EPG of own station Rats T T T actual O To be displayed Normal operation Broadcasting 1 O JO JO JO O empty Jo A frame is present but JAt the time of manual empi blank transmission etc O or Can be displayed ifl Broadcasting 2 O OJO 5 x EIT i present For a temporary service O or A frame is present but Break 1 O JA x JO an blank Normal broadcasting break A fame s oreseit h Break of independent audio Break 2 O x O JO O 18 present Dut and data broadcasting blank Note 1 Break 3 O JA x O x x Not to be displayed For a temporary service Broadcasting break due to failure or maintenance No signal x Ix x x x x Not to be displayed EE RF only O present A no description of the relevant service x absent Note 1 Ina case where a service with hierarchical modulation and a service without hierarchical modulation are multiplexed on the same TS the PMT of the service without hierarchical modulation can be transmitted through the high hierarchy refer to 4 in 7 1 2 Content transmitted through the low hierarchy Therefore in such a case where transmission is affected by rainfall reception may not be permitted resulting in the same status as break 2 7 41 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 7 Clock Operation 7 7 1 Absolute delay time For BS digital broadcasting possible absolute delay time is as below 1 Delay attributing to satellite connection 2 Delay attributing
422. to send answers of questionnaire Massive calls reception service Ordinary phone 0AB0 XXXXX4 Cut call OABO XXXXX5 Ordinary phone Operator on i Cut call OABO XXXXX6 Cut through call Ordinary phone 4 Some of viewers are connected to the center or operator Figure 4 2 Image of questionnaire program service target both of receiver and ordinary phone 6 92 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 4 2 Common national phone number service This section shows a case where a common national phone number service is used to unify phone numbers of access points when the multiple access points are settled up 4 2 1 Reverse charging of the line at access point A reverse charging service with common national phone numbers allow connecting a call for one number which is commonly used across the country to the access point specified by the calling area in advance 4 2 2 Caller charging of the line at access point A caller charging service with common national phone numbers allow connecting a call for one number which is commonly used across the country to the access point specified by the calling area in advance 6 93 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Appendix 5 Transmission method and connection conditions of the fixed preferred connection cancellation number 122 information 5 1 Transmission method 1 Cancel the fixed preferred connection and specify a carrier 122
423. to the predetermined display operation when it returns to the normal viewing mode When the blended display with the program video is not carried out by the menu etc the automatic display message does not need to be displayed Although the colors of automatic display message are arbitrarily defined by the receiver excessively loud colors should be avoided Achromatic colors are preferable The message frame is also arbitrarily defined by the receiver but it should make the message characters to be seen easily and it is desirable to be semi transparent etc in order to avoid excessive distraction on viewing programs As a guide the character size should be approximately 18x18 to 20x20 dot at the time of SD output The character size for HD output should be also displayed on the screen as it appears almost the same size as the one for SD output 5 25 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 When other errors occur on the operation mode of the automatic display message it is desirable that the automatic display message is displayed in the condition that the default ES group is normally decoded in order to avoid busy display with several messages for the viewers For example when the contents cannot be decoded due to not having IC card insertion under the condition that the default ES group for free program with content protection is scrambled and the automatic display message is operated together it is preferable that the automatic display me
424. to the removable media may use a method where the receiver stores the received content plays the stored content and then digitally records it to the removable media as well as directly recording the received content to the removable record media digitally To such receiver the rules in this volume also apply 8 26 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 10 Security of the Wireless LAN The rules for the security of the wireless LAN is specified in section 4 2 Guideline for Setting the Security Function for the Wireless LAN Devices in Guideline for Wireless LAN Security JETTA 8 27 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 9 Allowable Period for Implementation on the Receiver To perform content protection the receiver released after the issuance of this volume must follow the rules in this volume In reality however a certain period of time is required for the receiver manufacturer to satisfy the requirement Table 9 1 shows the allowable period for applying each requirement to the receiver Table 9 1 Allowable period for applying each requirement to the receiver Requirement Detail of the function Allowable Reference period 1 Support of the Normal viewing A 1 2 eo mee Card response Error message A103 B Neue 2 1 Analog video output A 2 2 Analog audio output A 2 3 Digital audio output A gar ee High speed
425. tor prohibits copying however analog recording is allowed only when the digital copy control descriptor APS control data is 00 6 7 2 Analog Recording of the Audio Service To analogically record the content for the digital audio and emergency audio services to the removable record media recording is allowed without applying the content protection system unless audio output is prohibited The audio of the content for the digital TV and emergency video services can be recorded to the analog record media without applying the content protection system unless audio output is prohibited 8 19 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 7 Installation Standard for the Receiver 7 1 Installation Standard for the Content Protection System The installation standard is specified aiming that the functional requirement specified in Chapter 6 is properly installed on the receiver and the receiver is designed and manufactured to effectively prevent an attempt to break or bypass the functional requirement 7 1 1 Basic Requirement for Installation Standard The receiver must be designed and manufactured to prevent an attempt to easily break the content protection system including the output control and copy control specified by the functional requirement The receiver must be designed and manufactured to prevent easy and malicious extraction change and copying of the content and control signals for the conditional access broadcasting system described in
426. tput control for the high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 2 If the service type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy_control_type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 3 For details of Not encrypted EPN asserted and Copy is never permitted see Table B 2 9 4 APSTB inherits the value of APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor or is set to 00 APS is Off 5 APSTB inherits the value of APS_control_ data in the digital copy control descriptor 8 44 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Table B 2 9 Copy control field for CPRM SD Video Normal area Authentication area Definition Field Value Field Value n 0000 Copy is never permitted i f CCCI Copy is permitted unlimited A Pe f ua cae EPN asserted TkureIndex RE 00 APS is Off MOTkureIndex Not 0 APSTB S 01 Type 1 of APS is On 10 Type 2 of APS is On 11 Type 3 of APS is On Both are 0 Not encrypted 6 See CPRM Specification SD Memory Card Book SD Video Part Revision 0 92 or later issued by the licenser 8 45 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 7 Requirement for Installing Vide
427. ts such as standard specifications of wireless facilities related to various radio utilization systems as Standard or Technical Report Technical Report defines concretely the measurement method and operational method for the target wireless facilities as a commercial standard based on the Standard that integrates the national technical rules and some private rules in order to secure appropriate quality and compatibility of the wireless facilities This Technical Report defines operational guidelines for BS digital broadcasting stations and broadband CS digital broadcasting stations and functional specifications for BS digital broadcasting receivers and combined receivers supporting both BS digital broadcasting and broadband CS digital broadcasting In order to secure transparency and fairness in the establishing process this standard was created based on the consensus of wide variety of internal and external interested parties including radio equipment manufacturers telecommunications carriers broadcasting operators users and others who participated in the standard meeting of the association This Technical Report consists of the following parts and volumes Part 1 Operational Guidelines for BS Digital Broadcasting Volume 1 BS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Downloading Volume 2 Functional Specifications for BS Digital Receivers Volume 3 BS Digital Broadcasting Operational Guidelines for Data Broadca
428. tween ACK and ENQ which are sent from the receiver ENQ Figure 5 13 Example of data transfer sequence Repeat this sequence until the data transfer 6 25 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 Telegraphic message format 1 Telegraphic message format on transmission Figure 5 14 shows a telegraphic message format on transmission Note Variable length DLE is not inserted in BN Co data DLE is inserted just before the code Note BN Block serial number 0 255 BN Complement of the block serial number 1 Figure 5 14 Telegraphic message format on transmission 2 CRC calculation range Figure 5 15 shows CRC calculation range DIS B B D l DIE C C L IT Data L 0 Data LITIRIR E X NIN E E X C IC Max 2 048 byte excluding DLE When the same code as DLE is generated in DIS B B D 1 L T Data L 0 E X NIN E Data dr pd om ARO ARO CRC calculation range fh a Note DLE that is inserted in data is eliminated from calculation Figure 5 15 CRC calculation range 6 26 3 CRC ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El calculation method For CRC calculation the method 16 bit CRC is used CRC 16 Sort a target to be calculated from the lowest bit of the top byte to the highest bit at the last byte in descending order to make a multinomial Multiply the multinomial by X S and divide
429. ull packet TS packet that does not contain meaningful information and is used for purposes such as stuffing Its TS ID is 0x1 FFF Network ID ID that identifies a network A single ID is assigned to equipment after network_id BS4 for the time being Version number version number Broadcaster broadcaster 7 5 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 Profile Distinction for restricting the functions of the technology to be used in terms of the MPEG2 coding system Maximum bit rate Value representing the maximum amount of information of the entire service or each ES needed when recording with a digital recording equipment is performed Multi channel stereo Stereo audio system including three or more channels In this system basic stereo channels L and R are added with the center channel and or sound channel for example For BS digital broadcasting 3 1 3 2 and 5 1 channels are used Multi view TV System that broadcasts multiple suites of video audio within a single service and allows switching in the unit of combination of video audio wanted by a broadcaster Mute flag Flag that controls muting a receiver with a sender Letter box Method by which the top and bottom of the screen are filled in with black when pictures having the 16 9 aspect ratio are displayed on a screen having the 4 3 aspect ratio One touch button selection One of the channel selection method
430. umber of group ID is seven 5 33 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 This is a mandatory function for the CAS The related description for the IC card information display can be found in Commentary A 7 in this volume 4 17 2 Related Standards Please refer to Part 1 Chapter 4 4 2 10 Display of Card Information in the ARIB STD B25 4 18 Error Notification Screen 4 18 1 Function Overview The types of error notification on the CAS are shown in the table below For the items that have descriptions in the columns of the corresponding return code and the SW1 SW2 in the table their return codes or SW1 SW2 from the card are described on the error messages as Code by using hexadecimal display is the return code or SW1 SW2 from the IC card Even though the error message is basically defined arbitrarily by the receiver it is desirable to refer and follow the example mentioned below for the decision in the customer center etc In addition a separate example of the error message display may be sent from the customer center The blank cells in the table of the display example are arbitrarily defined by the receiver Table 4 18 1 CAS related Error Notification No Error classification Corresponding return code SW1 SW2 Display example 1 No password match 2 No IC card insertion Example 1 3 Notification of non usable IC AIFF A102 Example 2 card insertion 4 Non cont
431. unction EIT Event Information Table This includes program related information such as program names broadcasting date time and broadcasting contents EPG Electronic Program Guide This allows a receiver to compose program information using SI information transmitted by broadcasters so that programs can be selected ES Elementary Stream This is equivalent to coded video audio and discrete data in PES packets An ES is transmitted with PES packets having an identical stream ID event This represents a program such as news and drama a group of streams with determined start and end time within the same service channel 7 2 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 GOP Group Of Pictures This represents a unit for coding processing with MPEG video It is composed of a single I picture and multiple P and B pictures LFE Low Frequency Enhancement This represents a multi channel stereo system s channel with low frequency enhanced MPG HI4L One of the MPEG 2 video coding systems main profile high 1440 level MP HL One of the MPEG 2 video coding systems main profile high level It represents 10801 HDTV coding MP LL One of the MPEG 2 video coding systems main profile low level It represents low resolution coding MP ML One of the MPEG 2 video coding systems main profile main level It represents 4801 SDTV coding
432. unction 1 2 1 Protection of viewer information Table 1 4 shows items that should be considered for protecting the viewer information classified into four levels Table 1 4 Protection level of the viewer information Security level Handled viewer Required module system information network services information access rights information function Level 1 Management of viewer Personal name and Both Common cryptosystem information encryption address etc Level 0 No consideration Person s approval In bi directional data transmission services service providers have to know viewers names and addresses to specify a receiver s address for shopping services When providing such bi directional services it is recommended to consider the following points to prevent leakage of the viewer information in terms of privacy protection Eavesdrop resistant on network Prevention of information leakage within center Protection of intrusion from external site to the center Only necessary personal data should be handled Do not use such data for another application or transfer to third parties without the approval of a relevant person 1 Level 0 Functions and operations that a center performs when possible It is recommended to obtain a viewer s permission when providing a service that needs the viewer information of which privacy should be protected 6 74 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El 2 Level 1 Functions a
433. unction to reserve information of the center in the registration update contents 6 3 9 Rules to register customer information in the center server When necessary information has been registered in the shared area for all operators personal information in the customer registration change contents documentation of broadcasters can be read out and used as registration information in the customer database in the center of each broadcaster When registering personal information in the shared NVRAM for operators to the customer management center it is necessary to indicate the usage and purpose clearly and to obtain permission of the viewer before registration Overwriting of data in the shared area for all operators is prohibited unless the viewer updates the information When registered information is not correct e g there is no registration date time or service ID in each field handle the information in that block as invalid and do not use for registration in the customer DB of the center When a customer is registered to the center of each broadcaster customer database side independent of a receiver a viewer is allowed to open the registration update contents of each broadcaster with his her receiver after registration reserve the target information in the center only when instructing a registration in the contents and write personal information in the shared area for all operators in NVRAM It is recommended that registrati
434. up and are able to be handled as other than Copy free are the following only the component for the caption the component tag value is 0x30 0x3F the component for the superimposed characters and the data component other than the default ES group the component tag value is 0x40 0x7F This is because the components other than data ES are handled according to the digital copy control descriptor in the first loop of PMT so that video and audio ESs other than the default ES group are not subject of content protection as well as the default ES group Also if the default ES group is not scrambled the component for the caption and superimposed characters are not scrambled For the program whose default ES group is free if the components other than the default ES group are handled as PPV and require content protection they must be scrambled In this case to make the content viewable without customer management the default ES group must be scrambled with the common broadcaster group identifier described in section 5 3 2 for copyright protection If a unique broadcaster group identifier is used to scramble individual EMM is required in advance like a pay program even if the program is free The table above categorizes such programs as a pay program No 5 to differentiate them from the programs in No 4 For the protected free program see section 5 3 the EMM and EMM messages may be transmitted to update Kw and send notification to a receiver
435. up_id 0x0 of the component group descriptor 3 Each component group shall include one video stream Low hierarchy components shall belong to no component group Service start gt 1 A service shall be started when the streams of a Sub are generated and multiplexed and the PMT is updated 7 42 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 2 When a service is started the Main defined with the default ES is used 3 The start of a service is informed to recipients through methods such as tickers and announcement 4 In a case where a component_group_descriptor cannot be acquired for example for several seconds after start switching in the unit of a group is not possible and video and audio components are switched separately 5 Switching between Main and Sub s is manually performed by a recipient using the video buttons or an equivalent function on the remote control unit 6 The EPG shall be able to indicate that MVTV is being implemented 7 In a case where hierarchical modulation is performed the Main s low hierarchy can be received if significant rainfall attenuation occurs while Main is being watched Because the maximum video ESs per service is four Sub s low hierarchy signals are not prepared However Main s low hierarchy components can be referred to through addition of a descriptor also to Sub s high hierarchy components In this case broadcasting with the Main s low hierarchy can be continued also while a
436. ure use Not defined yet In the definition of the encoding bit stream it shows that it may be defined in the ARIB standard for the future extension Any bit that has not been defined separately is set as 1 rpchof remainder polynomial coefficients highest order first RSA public key cryptography RSA is the most popular public key cryptosystem now and provides the encryption decryption function and the signature identification function SMTP SMPT Simple Mail Transfer Protocol RFC821 is a protocol for relaying and delivering e mail SSL SSL Secure Socket Layer is a security protocol for the socket level which is at the middle of the TCP layer and application layer and provides the encryption decryption function and authentication function STD standard TCP TCP Transmission Control Protocol RFC793 is an end to end protocol in the transport layer providing a connection type highly reliable transfer function with the error detection and correction function Telnet Telnet RFC854 RFC855 is a protocol providing a virtual terminal that enables controlling a remote server in the TCP IP network time stamp Communication time or random numbers added to important communication data allowing reuse and detection of the data UDP UDP User Datagram Protocol RFC768 is a protocol between two hosts in the transport layer This protocol does not have the delivery notif
437. ut call identification ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 El Identifying a cut call target number in a phone number for mass calls reception service 4 ISP connection information Level 3 Refer to TR B15 Part 2 Volume 6 7 3 3 4 ISP connection information rules 6 3 4 Information for host connection Level 3 Refer to TR B15 Part 2 Volume 6 7 3 4 Information rules for host connection 6 3 5 Operation of shared area in receiver NVRAM 1 the BS digital broadcasting data broadcasting operation standard 8 2 2 Operation of NVRAM commonly used in MM service 2 Table 6 5 shows allocation of the shared area for all operators Concerning allocation and operation of shared area for all operators in a receiver NVRAM conform to Table 6 5 Block allocation of shared area and field configuration Audience Block Number of f ER information Example Haracters Character type Field type element 0 Reserved iN STE Full width Note 2 S 30B Hiragana name 1 Hiragana name 1 W707 9 15 character eee S 24B Kanji name bs Full width Note1 U 4B Registration date time ae URE 12 character EUG S 4B Service ID 2 Hiragana name and Kanji name 2 3 Hiragana name and Kanji name 3 4 Hiragana name and Kanji name 4 5 Hiragana die mes Same as above Same as above Kanji name 5 above 6 Hiragana name and Kanji name
438. ver this combination is used to broadcast for some reason TR B15 specifies the output control for the high speed digital interface video output and audio output to restrict copying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 2 If the service type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy_control_type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 8 36 3 4 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 The value of APS control data in the digital control descriptor is inherited to APS in the private data byte of the copy status descriptor specified by CPS for BD RE hereafter referred to as APS of CPS for BD RE APS control data is handled as 00 or the value of APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor is inherited to APS of CPS for BD RE 8 37 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 B 2 2 Requirement for Installing D VHS 1 To record the received content in D VHS insert copy control descriptor described in D VHS MPEG Transport Stream Service Information Specification 2001 02 06 Ver 1 0 or later issued by the licenser For DTCP CCI and APS in copy_control descriptor inherit digital recording control data and APS control data in the digital copy control descriptor For EPN inherit encryption mode in the content avail
439. vice after the process is complete 5 45 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 The completion processing of CA alternative service is performed It does not return to the link source service after the process is complete lt 9 and 10 Normal processing 9 The reception not possible processing of service is executed in the same way as the normal reception not possible operation 10 The reception processing of selected channel service is executed in the same way as the normal reception operation When the viewer selects a non contractual service directly or by the EPG or the up and down keys the receiver activates the CA alternative service and displays the transfer confirmation screen However it does not start the CA alternative service if the following conditions apply 1 The viewer has already sign a contract with the pay program broadcaster in the case other than the non contractual mentioned above in 2 2 The service selected by the viewer is operated by non scrambling 3 The service type of the link service service_type is not supported by the receiver 4 The service that is not intended for the receiver for example the services in the network that are not subject of reception is specified as the link destination For the service at the time of reservation settings such as the time when the viewer tries to reserve the non contractual pay broadcasting service the CA alternative service does not start
440. which operates automatic display message is recorded by confirming the CA service descriptor in the CAT of the reception signal the EMM common message in the same CAT and in the same TS is also recorded In this case it is desirable to filter with the table ID 0x85 and table_id_extension40x0000 common message However filtering with only the table ID 0x85 EMM message regardless of table id extension can be acceptable The function that allows broadcasters to decide whether the automatic display message is displayed when the program of the broadcaster who operates automatic display message is viewed in real time and when the stored program is replayed should be installed in the receiver with storage function When the recorded program is replayed for viewing whether the display of automatic display message is specified to be displayed also during replaying is determined by referring the least significant bit of the delay time if the CA service descriptor is included in the CAT extracted from the TS of the reception signal If it is assigned to be displayed the least significant bit is 0 the automatic display message display information acquisition command will be issued to the IC card and the fixed phrase message number is obtained based 5 26 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 on the response Then the display will be carried out with the EMM common message in the replay signal that corresponds to the fixed phrase number On the othe
441. which transmission line coding is performed with half efficiency convolution codes with respect to BPSK broadcaster Consignment broadcaster that operates under the common operation system or a group of such consignment broadcasters broadcaster_id ID used for distinguishing individual broadcasters within a network This is uniquely assigned within a network CAS Conditional Access System This system controls services channels and events programs The system is absolutely essential for pay broadcasting CN ratio Carrier to noise ratio This represents the power ratio between the carrier power of high frequency signals and noise present within the band component Components that compose an event program video audio text various data etc current_next_indicator Current next indicator used to assign numbers for indicating whether individual sections are effective at present or in the future DTS Decoding Time Stamp This designates time management information for stream decoding duplex_packet Packet that undergoes duplicate specification of the same content This is recognizable with duplex_packet_indicator It is not used for BS digital broadcasting ECM Entitlement Control Message This represents common information composed of program information information about programs keys for descrambling etc and control information forcible On Off instruction of the decoder scramble f
442. x12 Not used Note 1 0x13 Not used Note 6 0x14 Nippon BS Broadcasting Corporation Note In a case where a single broadcaster is used by more than one company the broadcaster id having the smallest number shall be used Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to Media Serve Inc business discontinued on November 30 2004 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to Music Bird Co Ltd business discontinued on November 30 2004 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to Megaport Broadcasting Inc business discontinued on September 30 2005 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to Nippon Data Broadcasting business discontinued on September 30 2005 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to JFN Satellite Broadcasting business discontinued on November 30 2005 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to Japan MediArk Co Ltd business discontinued on November 30 2005 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to BS Communications Corporation business discontinued on March 31 2006 This broadcaster_id had been allocated to Digital Cast International Ltd business discontinued on March 31 2006 7 59 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 8 2 4 Logo ID list A logo ID specifies the correspondence of logo data and a service id It is issued and managed by The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting Dpa
443. ying Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 2 If the service type is digital TV service and emergency video service and copy_control_type of the digital copy control descriptor is 11 TR B15 restricts the output via the high speed digital interface video output and audio output Therefore this combination is handled as Not recordable 8 52 3 4 xS 6 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 For the definition of Primitive CCI see Table B 2 19 Primitive CCI is recorded in RDI Packs under the VOB Recording Mode and in Packet Group under the SOB Recording Mode To set APSTB follow the mapping in Table B 2 20 or set to 000 APS is Off APSTB is recorded in RDI Packs under the VOB Recording Mode and in Packet Group under the SOB Recording Mode To set APSTB follow the mapping in Table B 2 20 APSTB is recorded in RDI Packs under the VOB Recording Mode and in Packet Group under the SOB Recording Mode Set the value of ICT to 0 DOT to 0 and Trusted Input to 1 ICT DOT and Trusted Input are recorded in RDI Packs under the VOB Recording Mode and in Packet Group under the SOB Recording Mode Table B 2 19 Definition of Primitive CCI for AACS HD DVD Primitive CCI Content Status 000 Copy Freely 100 Copy One Generation 010 No More Copy 110 Copy Never Protection using AACS but copy 011 control restrictions not asserted without redistribution EPN Table B 2 20
444. zontal offset FCHO and frame_center_vertical_offset FCVO shall be transmitted as 0 or they shall not be transmitted lt Change of coding parameters gt It is desirable to follow the Operating Guidelines appended to Part 1 of ARIB STD B32 lt Range of video encoding rates gt The ranges of video encoding rates shall be as below for the time being The bit rates to be used for actual transmission shall be determined by individual broadcasters with picture quality taken into careful consideration MP LL 0 2 4Mbps MP ML 1 5 15Mbps MP H14L 4 24Mbps MP HL 12 24Mbps 4 1 3 Low hierarchy video format for hierarchical modulation For Low hierarchy video format regarding hierarchical modulation follow the standard in 3 4 Video coding system in Chapter 3 of Appendix of ARIB STD B20 and the standard in 6 3 4 Display of low hierarchy video in hierarchical modulation in ARIB STD B21 so that reduced pictures or still pictures shown below are presented 7 9 ARIB TR B15 Version 4 1 E1 lt Reduced video gt The formats of reduced video in terms of low hierarchy service are shown in table 4 1 2 The receiver s display images are shown in table 4 1 3 Table 4 1 2 Restrictions on reduced video coding parameters sequence_ sequence sequence_header parameters extension display extension parameters parameters Type t_ratio rogressive displa displa vertical horizontal as

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

4.1 E1 4.1 a1c 4.1 earthquake 4.1 earthquake today 4.1 explain the role of the regulator 4.1 earthquake tennessee 4.1 explain the rest and sleep patterns 4.1 eylf 4.1 earthquake tennessee 2025 4.1 earthquake strikes near corona 4.1 exercise class 10 4.1 estrategias de producto 4.1 elementos de la seguridad 4.1 enfermedades profesionales 4.1 el buffer de video en modo texto

Related Contents

MANUAL DEL SISTEMA DE INFORMACION  Classic Jug Kettle TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  FCI Home Appliances ECCB 30" User's Manual  User Manual - DSS Networks  LDMEI100G²  ZyXEL P-660HW-T v2 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file